2014.11.23 - Electrical Specifications Combined - Tender Submission

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.
08
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A049_RSP_EL_SPC_0001_T0
NOVEMBER 23, 2014
THE WEST BEACH CLUB

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah
Construction of the West Beach Club,
Palm Jumeirah, Dubai, UAE
Project:
DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

THE WEST BEACH CLUB,
Works:
G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE
Title:
DOCUMENT INDEX
DOCUMENTS INDEX
VOLUME 01
Tendering & Contract Conditions
VOLUME 02
Specifications
Volume 02.01
General Specifications Architecture & Interior Design
Volume 02.02
Interior Design Schedules
Volume 02.03
Civil & Structural Specifications
Volume 02.04
Sustainability Specifications
Volume 02.05
Fire Specifications
Volume 02.06
Plumbing Specifications
Volume 02.07
HVAC Specifications
Volume 02.08
Electrical Specifications
Volume 02.09
Specialist Lighting Specifications
Volume 02.10
Signage Specifications
Volume 02.11
Faade Specifications
Volume 02.12
Landscape Specifications
Volume 02.13
Vertical Transport Specifications
Volume 02.14
Waste Handling Equipment Specifications
Volume 02.15
AV / IT Specifications
Volume 02.16
Kitchen & Laundry Specifications
Volume 02.17
BMU Specifications
VOLUME 03
Bill of Quantities
VOLUME 04
VOLUME 05
VOLUME 06
Drawings
Health & Safety & Environment Plan HSEP
Addendums
Project:

Works:
Title:
DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08


TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 08
SECTION 260001 - PARTICULAR SPECIFCATION

SECTION 260500 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533 - CONTAINMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS
SECTION 263323.11 - CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SECTION 263353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
SECTION 263533 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
SECTION 282300 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
APPENDIX A
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260001 PARTICULAR SPECIFCATION
PART 1 - INTRODUCTION
A.
The scope of this document is relevant to the design work included in the electrical engineers
scope of work which in summary includes the following:
Power distribution
Small power
Lighting and Controls
Fire Alarm systems
Emergency lighting systems
Lightning protection
Earthing
IT
Security systems
B.
The contractor shall refer to the specialists package specifications and drawings for detailing.
This specification only covers where the engineers scope in terms of design interfaces with these
specialist systems.
C.
Please refer to mechanical engineers specification for BMS. The electrical specification does
however make reference to what electrical systems need to be interfaced to the BMS system.
D.
In the case of any discrepancy, order of precedence shall be decided by the Engineer and / or
shall be managed in accordance with the conditions of contract.
PART 2 - CODES & STANDARDS
A.
The predominant design standards used to develop the design for this project are
below and it shall be the contractors obligation to ensure that the procurement of
installation and testing/commissioning meets the requirements of these standards.
standards are the primary ones only of which there are sub standards specific
components which are outlined further in the relevant sections of this specification.
Division 08 Section 260001
Page 1 of 26
as outlined
equipment,
This list of
to systems
Particular Specification
Project:

Works:
Title:

DEWA Wiring Regulations
DEWA Substation Standards
Dubai Civil Defence
Dubai Police
EHS
Trakhees
Nakheel
IET Wiring Regulations, BS 7671
BS 7430
BS EN 62305
BS EN 60439 and IEC 439
BS 88, BS 60898, BS 60269-2
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 101
NFPA 110
CIBSE
B.
The most up to date guides/regulations shall be used at all times.
PART 3 - SCOPE OF WORK
3.1
A.
GENERAL
This contract includes design, co-ordination, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all
electrical services as per requirements stipulated under this contract.
Page 2 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
In addition to the below systems, the following scope of works is to be carried out by the MEP
Contractor.
All the Electrical Works listed below.
All necessary coordination with other trades to ensure the electrical works is implemented safely
and correctly.
Liaising with local authorities for all submittals and approvals.
Ensure the design meets the criteria for EHS accreditation.
All plant exposed to the elements shall be corrosion resistant to withstand the sea air environment.
C.
The following, including but not limited to, are the major electrical services which form part of this
package:
3.2
A.
3.3
MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER

The medium voltage power i.e. 11kV includes ring main units and transformers and the
interconnecting cabling. The tendering contractor shall ensure that they include all the necessary
requirements for the installation of the medium voltage systems. The DEWA regulations and
agreements in terms of scope in this context are often subject to discussion and the contractor
shall ensure that they have undertaken the necessary due diligence before they submit their price
to ensure all necessary costs are included. A clear defined scope between DEWA and the
contractor shall be established and included in the tender.
LV POWER DISTRIBUTION AND SWITCHGEAR
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the electrical power distribution
systems included but not limited to the following.
All LV switchgear
Sub main and final circuit distribution boards
Power factor correction and harmonic suppression
Transient over voltage protection
Metering
Page 3 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.4
Testing, commissioning of a complete low voltage distribution system with full documentation of all
approved material submittals and test certificates
STANDBY ELECTRICAL POWER
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the standby electrical power
distribution systems included but not limited to the following.
B.
Generator sets
C.
Generator fuel system, anti-vibration, acoustic treatment etc.
D.
Rack Mounted UPS
E.
Testing, commissioning of a complete standby power system with full documentation of all
3.5
CABLES AND PATHWAYS
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the cabling and pathways,
including but not limited to the following.
Power cabling
Fire alarm cabling
Control and instrumentation cabling
Containment
Testing, commissioning the complete cable and pathway installation with full documentation of all
3.6
SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the small power systems included
but not limited to the following.
Power supplies to all mechanical plant
Power supplies to all general sockets
Page 4 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

Power supplies to all fixed equipments
Power supplies to all IT, AV and Security systems
Power supplies to all pool equipment
Power supplies to all signage
Power supplies to all elevators
Power supplies to all other equipment as illustrated on the drawings
Testing, commissioning of a complete small power system with full documentation of all approved
material submittals and test certificates
B.
For bespoke systems requiring specialist input from contractors suppliers such as fire alarm
systems, central battery, lighting controls, ELV systems the contractor shall ensure that all power
supplies are accounted for in their price.
3.7
LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the lighting systems included but
not limited to the following.
Lighting fixtures
Lighting controls
Power to all lighting fixtures and controls
Testing, commissioning of a complete lighting system with full documentation of all approved
material submittals and test certificates
Dali Lighting control cable
3.8
EMERGENCY LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the emergency lighting systems
included but not limited to the following.
Emergency lighting luminaires
Emergency lighting central battery units
Page 5 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

Emergency lighting power distribution
Testing, commissioning of a complete emergency lighting system with full documentation of all
3.9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTHING
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the lightning protection and
earthing systems included but not limited to the following.
Full implementation of lightning protection system
Full implementation of building earthing systems
Testing, commissioning of a complete lightning protection and earthing systems with full
documentation of all approved material submittals and test certificates
3.10
FIRE ALARM & DETECTION AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEMS
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete delivery of the fire alarm systems included but
not limited to the following.
Fire detection devices
Fire alarm panels
Fire alarm wiring and interfacing
Voice evacuation system
Testing, commissioning of a complete fire alarm and detection system with full documentation of
all approved material submittals and test certificates.
Page 6 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 4 - ELECTRICAL POWER
4.1
SUPPLY INTAKE
A.
There is one substation proposed for the development which will consist of 2No. Ring
Main Units (RMU) and 3No. Transformers.
B.
The transformer rooms shall be dry type cast resin 11,000/400V step down transformers
rated at 1500kVA. The incoming 11kV cables from the RMU rooms shall be distributed
through cable trenches where they shall be terminated into the transformer gland box
from below.
C.
During the tendering process the MEP contractor shall discuss the project with DEWA and
finalise their scope with the respect to the items in the table below. Based on the
engineers discussions with DEWA during the design, the responsibility with respect to
these major items are as indicated. The MEP contractor shall ensure that this is
revalidated with DEWA and they encompass any other scope items as required by
DEWA in their tender.
D.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to submit and obtain all approvals from DEWA,
coordinate with local authorities and the master planner.
4.2
LOW VOLTAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION
A.
The contractor shall design, procure, install, test and commission a complete low voltage
power distribution system in accordance with DEWA and BS7671 requirements, the
design drawings and in accordance with the specifications. This shall include but not be
limited to the following:
Main distribution boards
Sub main distribution boards
Final circuit distribution boards
Isolators
Emergency power off buttons
Protection devices
Power factor correction
Page 7 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

Harmonic filters
Metering
Transient over voltage protection
B.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to engage a specialist LV equipment supplier.

They in turn shall provide a complete design detailing full schematic distribution, panel
sizes and details and all components to facilitate the safe distribution of power. The final
design and configuration shall be subject to the manufacturers equipment specification,
capabilities and arrangements. The contractor shall ensure that they include for the full
system in their tender.
C.
The contractor must carry out a full discrimination and cascading study based on their
selected switchgear manufacturer prior to ordering/procuring the switchgear.
4.3
LV SWITCHGEAR
A.
The main distribution boards, typically referred to as MDBs, shall be located in the main
LV switch room adjacent to the transformer room. There shall be one MDB per
11,000/400V transformer. The primary purpose of the MDBs is in the control and safe
distribution of 400V power to sub main power distribution networks and equipment
throughout the development.
B.
Main switch panels shall serve sub-main switch boards, distribution units, mechanical
services control centers and dedicated supplies as required for lifts, fire pumps,
mechanical services, etc.
C.
The main LV switchboards shall be Form 4b Type 6 freestanding with rear cable access
suitable for both top and bottom entry. The units shall be ingress protected to IP54.
Separate Power Factor Correction capacitor bank cubicles shall be provided adjacent to
the LV Switchboards within the main LV Rooms.
D.
Sub main distribution boards shall be either wall mounted or free standing depending on
the number of circuits. Cable access shall be from the front. All SMDBs shall have phase
indication lamps, volt meter and ammeter provided on the outside of the door enclosure.
E.
Distribution boards for final circuits shall be either surface or flush wall mounted
depending on location. Typically all panels in plant rooms or within builders work
enclosure shall be surface mounted whereas panels located in front of house areas shall
be flush wall mounted.
Page 8 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
The MEP contractor shall source the LV distribution panels from a single manufacturer.
G.
The contractor must carry out a full discrimination and cascading study based on their
selected switchgear manufacturer prior to ordering/procuring the switchgear.
4.4
POWER QUALITY
A.
The overall power factor of the installations shall be maintained within 0.93 (lagging)
and unity by the use of centralized capacitor banks.
B.
All light fittings with discharge lamps, mercury /sodium vapor, fluorescent tubes etc shall
incorporate capacitors to obtain a power factor of 0.9 or above, lagging.
C.
Power factor equipment shall be provided to suit the total power requirement of the
buildings. This shall be achieved using capacitor equipment housed within dedicated
enclosures and located adjacent to the main electrical switch panel for each building.
D.
Capacitor banks shall be organized in groups of switched multi bank stages so the
power factor compensation can be varied to suit the behavior of the load which may
occur at different times of days. Final sizing of capacitor banks shall be subject to DEWA
approval.
E.
Provision shall be made in the various panels/switch rooms for the introduction of active
harmonic filtering equipment. The MEP contractor shall utilize their specialist switchgear
supplier to provide a complete harmonic review of the development and provided the
anticipated active harmonic filtration equipment to suit the loads.
F.
The level of filtering equipment requirement should be assessed by measurement/analysis

under real applied load conditions during the early days of the respective buildings
occupation, to meet the requirement of the local authority reactive power compensation
and protection against harmonics. As part of the contract the switchgear supplier shall
return to the site at least 4 times during a 6 month period after the building is occupied
and operational to assess the harmonic content of the building and adjust the harmonic
filters according to the operating conditions of the load.
4.5
A.
METERING
All MDBs shall be equipped with bulk meter on the incomer for measuring electricity
consumption in line with DEWA requirements. During the drawing approval process the
MEP contractor shall establish with DEWA if the meters are to be located within the MDB
or a separate metering panel enclosure is to be provided.
Page 9 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
The incomer ACB on each MDB shall be equipped with a multifunction meter with a
pulsed kWh output to be connected to the BMS system for monitoring only. The following
parameters shall be monitored.
1.
Instantaneous line and phase voltage
2.
Instantaneous line and phase currents
3.
Power factor
4.
Frequency
5.
Instantaneous line and peak active power
6.
Instantaneous line and peak reactive power
7.
Instantaneous line and peak apparent power
8.
Total consumed active energy
9.
Total consumed reactive energy
10. Total consumed apparent power

11. % Harmonic content
12. Hours of operation
C.
All meters provided shall be fully programmable with touch screen or buttons/dials from
the front fascia and have nonvolatile memory. In the event of power failure all recorded
parameters shall be retained within the microprocessor.
D.
Each tenant shall be metered for billing purposes. The MEP contractor shall provide all
necessary containment and cabling for installation of the meter by DEWA.
E.
Check meters shall also be provided for energy consumption of plant loads. As per the
design drawings the following metering provisions shall be provided:
F.
The MEP contractor shall re-verify these requirements with DEWA and include all required
costs in their tender.
4.6
A.
SUB MAIN POWER DISTRIBUTION

Power shall be distributed throughout the development using cable systems. For vertical
Page 10 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

distribution of services electrical risers are provided to accommodate the sub main
distribution components including cable trays, sub main distribution boards and final
circuit distribution boards.
4.7
POWER TO MECHANICAL PLANT
A.
Mechanical services consists of:
Chilled water pumps
Sumps pumps
Fire pump
Water and drainage pumps
Air conditioning units
Irrigation pumps
Swimming pool plant
Elevators
B.
Please refer to the mechanical engineers drawings, specification and schedules detailing
the plant requirements.
C.
All motors will be provided with a local isolator and an emergency power off button,
EPO. The EPOs will be shrouded type to avoid accidental tripping.
4.8
A.
BMS REQUIREMENTS
The electrical LV systems shall be interfaced to the building management systems as
follows:
1. The incoming ACB on all MDBs (essential and non-essential) shall be interfaced to the
BMS and monitored for open/close/trip status.
2. The multifunction meter on all MDBs shall be interfaced to the BMS so all measured
parameters can be displayed at any given time and recorded.
3. All energy check meters shall be interfaced to the BMS so the measured parameters
can be displayed at any given time and the values recorded.
Page 11 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

4. Status of all automatic transfer switches will be monitored.

5. Lighting controls
6. Automatic transfer switches
7. Central battery system.
8. Security management system
9. Elevators
10. The generator control panel shall be interfaced with the BMS and all measurable
parameters and systems status shall be viewable from a central PC located in the fire
command centers.
11. The UPS control panel shall be interfaced with the BMS and all measurable
parameters and systems status shall be viewable from a central PC located in the fire
command centers.
PART 5 - STANDBY POWER
5.1
STANDBY GENERATOR
A.
A standby diesel generator shall be provided to support the essential and life safety loads.
B.
As per NFPA 110 the design ensures that intake air and exhaust air come directly from outside
and the room is two hour fire rated. A space allowance for acoustic attenuation has been
provided based on manufacturer recommendations. The MEP contractor shall ensure that their
proposed manufacturer provides appropriate acoustic attenuation.
C.
Automatic transfer switches are strategically located to ensure that essential power is made
available to essential and life safety loads during periods of mains power unavailability.
D.
A separate essential services electrical distribution system shall be installed throughout the
development. The method of distribution shall be via cables. Essential sub main and final circuit
distribution equipment shall be carefully coordinated to deliver the essential power where it is
required.
E.
The generator will come complete with an 8 hour base fuel tank.
Page 12 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
The contractor shall design procure install, test and commission a complete standby power
installation in accordance with DEWA, BS7671 requirements, the design drawings and in
accordance with the specifications. This shall include but not be limited to the following:
Standby generator
Generator fuel system
Generator anti vibration mounts
Generator acoustic treatment
Generator controls
G.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to engage a specialist standby power equipment supplier.
They in turn shall provide a complete design detailing full schematic distribution, panel sizes and
details and all components to facilitate the safe distribution of power. The final design and
configuration shall be subject to the manufacturers equipment specification, capabilities and
arrangements. The contractor shall ensure that they include for the full system in their tender.
Fire alarm and voice evacuation systems
CCTV systems
Telecommunication systems
Emergency lighting (central battery system)
Selected domestic water pumps
Sump pumps
AC units to critical areas includes: telecom rooms, fire pump room, central battery rooms, security
control room
5.2
A.
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES

No centralized UPS system has been specified and it is proposed to use rack mounted UPS
located within the IT rooms for all security and IT equipment. All rack mounted UPS will be 30min
autonomy
Page 13 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 6 - CONTAINMENT AND WIRING
6.1
CONTAINMENT
A.
The containment systems developed by the engineer is design intent only and details primary and
secondary containment routes only.
B.
The design intent details only tray, ladder and trunking. No conduits are detailed on the design
drawings.
C.
The following containments are proposed for the various systems as follows:
Main and sub main power systems : Cable Tray/Ladder
Lighting circuits : Trunking
Final power circuits : Trunking
ELV systems : Cable tray
Fire alarm systems : Trunking (horizontal risers)
Emergency lighting circuits : Trunking (horizontal)
D.
Should the contractor wish to propose alternatives in certain instances this shall be acceptable
subject to review.
E.
The contractor shall be responsible for:
Final routing and sizing of all containments to suit site conditions.
Ensure that the containment is complete to account for all accessories and devices
Detail and provide all conduits
F.
During tendering the contractor shall review the design intent containment drawings and ensure
that they allow for sufficient costs to account for the above.
G.
PVC type conduits shall only be permitted where they are concealed in the building fabric with
sufficient concrete/screed cover (i.e. a minimum of 20mm cover). Where conduits are required to
run surface on the building fabric within a ceiling space then these shall either be GI type or an
agreed high impact resistant type LSOH plastic.
Page 14 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
Heavy duty GI conduits shall be used for surface installations in plant rooms and all locations
external to the building where the conduit cannot be buried into the building fabric or concealed
securely within the building cladding. Generally, where plastered walls are available, conduits
should be concealed within.
I.
Trunking shall be provided where there are a number of multiple circuit cables to be run.
Generally where four or more circuits are to be run in a common route, then the contractor shall
provide a galvanized steel trunking system in place of conduit. This provides a neater more easily
identifiable installation rather than running multiple runs of conduits.
6.2
POWER CABLES
A.
The power cables to be installed throughout the building shall be LSF Low Smoke and Fume (or
LSOH Low Smoke Zero Halogen) outer sheath type. This follows the norm in Europe to minimise
build-up of poisonous fumes in the event of fire in highly populated or residential buildings.
B.
Sub-main cables shall be XLPE/SWA/LSF type whilst final circuits shall generally be LSF sheathed
single core cables.
C.
Where cables are buried externally for example those which serve external feeder pillars,
lighting, pumps or otherwise the cable specification can be PVC as opposed to LSF.
6.3
FIRE-RATED CABLES
A.
As per NFPA and local Civil Defence requirements the following systems shall be wired in fire
rated cabling:
Fire detection systems
Voice evacuation systems
Central battery/emergency lighting systems
Main, sub main and final circuit power cables serving life safety equipment
B.
The contractor shall ensure that the above is accounted even if it has not been explicitly detailed
on the drawings.
C.
The fire alarm cables shall be in fully fire rated and in accordance with NFPA, Trakhees Civil
Defence and UAE Fire Code requirements.
Page 15 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 7 - SMALL POWER SYSTEMS
7.1
WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.
Wiring accessories shall include but not be limited to the following:
Sockets
Fused connection units (switched/unswitched)
Flex outlets
Double pole switches (for lighting and power)
Industrial sockets
B.
The contractor is to ensure the following is included within their design:
All sockets shall be switched type
All fused connection units, switched or un switched shall have red indication lamps
Fused connection units serving essential equipment such as fire detection and alarm panels, fire
suppression control panels, access control panels etc shall be un switched type.
C.
Setting out of wiring devices shall be undertaken by the contractor in accordance with the
following:
DEWA regulations and the electrical small power detail drawings.
In public areas the contractor shall refer to the architect and interior designer drawings for setting
out of wiring accessories.
D.
Wiring accessory finishes shall be subject to the area they are located and coordinated with the
architect and interior designer. These shall be as follows:
Public areas hairline finish stainless steel
Plant rooms shall typically be metal clad.
Above ceilings eg. Connection units for water heaters, fan coil units etc shall be metal clad.
Page 16 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
The Ingress Protection (IP) rating of wiring accessories shall be subject to location, the particular
requirements are outlined below:
F.
Unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings or described otherwise in this specification
all wiring devices in internal areas shall be standard as would normally find in interior nonhazardous environments.
IP 67 shall be utlised for all external wiring accessories
IP 65 shall be utilized in mechanical plant rooms
IP 65 shall be utilized in electrical switch rooms, including main and essential LV rooms,
transformer room and generator room.
7.2
SPECIALIST SYSTEMS
A.
There are a number of specialist systems on this project which the engineers drawings interface
with. This section outlines these systems and defines what details the engineering drawings
encompass. All other details shall be as per the specialist designers drawings and specifications.
B.
The engineering drawings cover the Irrigation package as follows:
Power supply to irrigation pump rooms rated to suit the load and location noted by irrigation
specialist.
C.
The engineering drawings cover the swimming pool equipment package as follows:
Power supply to swimming pool plant rooms/enclosures rated to suit the load and location noted
by the pool specialist.
PART 8 - LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8.1
LIGHTING
A.
The lighting described herein shall include, but is not limited to, the following types of area:
Public Spaces
Specialist Lighting
Plant rooms
Corridors
Page 17 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

Store rooms
Offices
Stairs
B.
The contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and testing of the lighting systems
and ensuring the energy efficiency criteria are implemented.
C.
The setting out of luminaires shall be as per the interior designer and architects reflected ceiling
drawings and elevations. For areas not detailed such as plant rooms the contractor shall refer to
the engineers detailed drawings and apply good engineering and installation practice. It is
essential that the installation follows the design intent.
8.2
LIGHTING CONTROLS
A.
This contract is to include for the supply, installation, test and commissioning of the lighting control
system for the complete lighting design. A description of the system requirements is outlined
below.
B.
All Front of House lighting shall be DALI dimmable. The scene setting, zoning and grouping of
fixtures will be done during commissioning with the lighting control manufacturer representative
on site prior handover.
C.
Lighting controls shall be generally provided as follows:
D.
Corridors
Presence detector control (sensors)
E.
Offices
Presence sensors
F.
Plant & Store Rooms
Manually switched
G.
Car Parking & External Lighting
Photocell/Astronomical Clock plus override switch.
H.
Stair Cores
Page 18 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

I.
Facade
Astronomical Clock
J.
Atrium/Lobby
Astronomical Clock
K.
Toilets/Lockers
PART 9 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A.
The contractor shall design; procure install, test and commission a complete emergency lighting
system in accordance with local Civil Defence requirements, NFPA, the design drawings and in
accordance with the specifications.
B.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to engage a specialist emergency lighting supplier. They
in turn shall provide a complete design detailing full schematic distribution, battery sizes, panels
sizes and quantities, monitoring modules, switching modules etc. The final design and
configuration shall be subject to the manufacturers equipment specification, capabilities and
arrangements. The contractor shall ensure that they include for the full system in their tender.
C.
The design has been based on an AC/DC system. Should the contractor wish to install AC/AC
systems they shall ensure that it works within the space constraints of the building and does not
compromise functionality.
D.
As per the design drawings and schedules the emergency luminaires are slave luminaires only. In
other words the emergency lighting luminaires are dedicated and do not operate as functional
space lighting. This is the intent and this must be adhered to in accordance with UAE Fire Code.
E.
The contractor shall submit samples of the proposed emergency luminaires including exit signs to
the engineer, architect and interior designer for approval prior to procurement.
F.
The emergency lighting system shall be fully addressable. In terms of system monitoring the
contractor shall discuss and devise the most appropriate method. The emergency lighting system
shall be monitored over the TCP/IP network and the system software should be installed on a
central PC system or an individual PC.
Page 19 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

G.
The contractor shall refer to the architect and interior designers drawings for the setting out of
emergency lighting. Where such drawings are unavailable such as plant rooms etc the contractor
shall implement good engineering and installation practice.
H.
The emergency lighting system shall be fully interfaced to the BMS for monitoring.
PART 10 - FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS
10.1
GENERAL
A.
The contractor shall design, procure, install, test and commission a complete fire alarm and
detection and voice evacuation system in accordance with the local Civil defence, NFPA
regulations, and design drawings and in accordance with the specifications.
B.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to engage a specialist fire alarm and detection system
supplier. They in turn shall provide a complete design detailing full schematic distribution, battery
sizes, panels sizes and quantities, monitoring modules, switching zoning, cabling arrangements
etc. The final design and configuration shall be subject to the manufacturers equipment
specification, capabilities and arrangements. The design is intent only. The contractor shall ensure
that they include for the full system in their tender.
C.
Please note the setting out of visible fire alarm devices shall be as per the architect and interior
designer coordinated RCPs and setting out elevations. For plant rooms and other areas the
installation shall be as per the typical detail drawings shown and in accordance with good
engineering and installation practice.
10.2
FIRE DETECTION AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM
A.
An integrated analogue addressable fire alarm and detection system and voice evacuation system
complete with sensors, manual call points, control and monitoring units, communcaiton system ,
speakers, etc. shall be provided throughout the buildings.
B.
The Fire Alarm system shall be fully interfaced with the voice alarm to provide a fully compliant
NFPA 72 monitored voice alarm system.
C.
Optical type smoke detectors shall be provided in general areas and intelligent type combined
heat/optical shall be provided in mechanical plant rooms. The fire command center for the
development shall be integrated into the ground floor security room. This shall be the center of
operations from which fire fighting activities shall be directed and monitored.
Page 20 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
Additionally fire alarm repeater panels shall be located at alternative entrance points. The fire
alarm panels shall be networked together using fire rated cable.
E.
In accordance with NFPA requirements and local Civil defence requirements, ceiling voids shall
be provided with point type smoke detection. The contractor shall allow for ceiling mounted
indicators for the point type smoke detector above unless agreed otherwise with the local civil
defence.
F.
The contractor shall ensure that the fire alarm system is fully interfaced with the following systems:
Fire pump control panels
General extract system control panels
Air handling unit control panels
Pumping system control panels
Elevators
Clean agent fire suppression systems
Gas solenoid valves
Lighting control panels
Motorised fire dampers
Generator control panel
Zone control valves
G.
Fire alarm interfaces are not shown on the drawings so the contractor shall ensure all interface
requirements are provided in accordance with the specification and NFPA requirements.
H.
The voice evacuation system shall enable pre-recorded messages (both alert and evacuation) to
be broadcast in the event of a fire alarm and speech messages to be broadcast via a fire
microphone. The building shall be sub-divided into a number of voice alarm zones, generally
zones shall be on a per level basis.
I.
The cause and effect associated with the fire detection and voice alarm shall reflect the
requirements of Dubai Civil Defense and shall be developed by the MEP contractors specialist
supplier.
Page 21 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

J.
The specialist system supplier shall undertake calculations to verify all speaker quantities and
spacings.
K.
All fire detection loops and voice alarm channels shall be wired using multi-core LSF/LSOH fire
rated cable (coloured red) installed on galvanized cable tray, secured direct to the building fabric
and installed with PVC conduits recessed into the building fabric.
10.3
FIRE BARRIERS
A.
Fire barriers shall be provided for all service penetrations to maintain the fire-rating of walls,
floors, partitions, ceilings etc. This shall be coordinated closely with the main contractor who shall
close builders work openings to a 75mm perimeter around electrical service openings. The
remaining opening shall be fire-sealed by the MEP Contractor.
B.
In riser closet floors for ELV and mains power risers, floors shall be fire-sealed to provide two hour
fire ratings.
C.
For fill details on compartment fire ratings please refer to the fire engineering drawings.
10.4
DISABLED TOILET
A.
The disabled toilet alarm system shall consist of the following key components:
Zone controller supporting up to four zones or as per manufacturers capability.
Each WC shall be considered as a separate zone.
All zone controllers shall be networked to a master control station located in the BMS/security
control room.
The WC shall be fitted out with pull cord with assurance lamp, tone generator with notification
lamp and a reset button. When the cord us pulled the zone location shall go into alarm and
identify itself at the security room. The tone generator shall go into alarm and visual indicator shall
illuminate. The alarm cannot be reset from the master control station. Someone must go and
investigate the alarm occurrence and manually reset via the reset button located in the alarm
zone.
The reset button and pull cord shall be located within the WC.
The tone generator shall be located above the WC door. Where there is a lobby in front of the
WCs, then tone generator shall then be located over the lobby door facing circulation corridor.
Page 22 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
The drawings provided as part of the detailed design are design intent. Final arrangements and
system configuration shall be as per the recommendation of the specialist system supplier. MEP
contractor shall provide all power supplies, containments, components, interfaces to facilitate a
fully functional system.
C.
The disabled toilet alarm systems shall be connected to the BMS and monitored in the central
security room. Upon activation an alarm notification shall be raised in the security room. This can
be a separate alarm panel or it can be integrated over the TCP/IP network and the alarm can be
displayed over a PC or the security monitoring wall.
10.5
A.
BMS INTERFACING
The fire alarm and voice evacuation system, along with the disabled toilet alarm system shall be
interfaced to the BMS for monitoring.
PART 11 - EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

11.1
EARTHING
A.
Electrical earthing and equipotential bonding systems shall be designed in accordance with
DEWA requirements, telecom provider requirements, BS 7430 and BS 7671.
B.
The main electrical earthing systems shall consist of a consumer provided earthing system and an
earthing system provided by DEWA. This is most common form of arrangement in Dubai that is
basically a hybrid TN-S-TT system. However the final shape and form of system shall be as per
DEWAs approval/comments on the contractor shop drawings.
C.
The earth requirements for each system shall be separated as follows.
D.
Substation Transformers & RMU:
Separate earth pit for each transformer neutral.
Separate earth pit for transformer body earthing
Separate earth pit for each ring main unit
E.
Please note the above is design intent only. Final quantity shall be as per DEWA requirements.
The scope of work i.e. provision of earth pit, rod, cabling, earth bars and connections etc shall be
subject to contractor and DEWA discussions. The contractor shall ensure their costs include for
worst case scenario.
Page 23 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Substation LV Earthing
2 No. earth pits for each main distribution board
2 No. earth pits for each main essential distribution board. Secondary essential LV panels shall be
bonded to the main essential distribution board earth bar.
2 no. earth pits for each generator.
G.
Clean Earths
Dedicated earth pits for telecom intake rooms, one earth pit for DC earthing and one earth pit for
AC earthing.
2 No. dedicated earth pits for the main distribution frame room
2 No. dedicated earth bars for main IT room
H.
These earth bars shall be exclusively used for earthing and equipotential bonding of the
telecommunications equipment located within these spaces. This shall include but not be limited
to:-active and passive equipment cabinets, comms room air conditioning units, raised floor
pedestals, containment etc.
I.
Earth rods, typically consisting of 15mm copper, shall be driven into the subsoil and a cast of
approximately 250x250mm shall be made in the slab for the insertion of the earth electrode
inspection pits.
J.
The electrical earth electrodes shall achieve a value equal to or less than local authority
requirements. Earthing pits serving different functions shall be separated by a minimum of 6.0m
as per local authority requirements. Electrical earth pits and lightning protection earthing
provisions shall be separated by a distance of 6.0m minimum as per local authority requirements.
K.
All main, sub-main power and final circuit feeds shall be accompanied with auxiliary circuit
protective conductors.
L.
Equipotential bonding shall be provided to connect all items of extraneous metal work to the
general mass of earth to reduce potential shock hazards. This shall include HVAC systems,
domestic water pumping systems, sinks, raised access floor pedestals, sprinkler pipe works,
building structure, gas pipe work, etc. All electrical switch rooms and sub-main/rooms and risers
shall be furnished with a copper earth bar for the purpose of equipotential bonding.
M.
The final earthing solutions are subject to DEWA approval. The contractor shall allow for sufficient
costs to compensate for reasonable DEWA comments in their tender. Reasonable is deemed to be
Page 24 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

additional/modifications requirements without fundamentally changing the proposed earthing

system.
11.2
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
A.
The lightning protection system shall be fully in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
62305.
B.
During the design the contractormust engage a lightning protection specialist to undertake a risk
assessment of the kindergarten and primary/secondary building with the following classifications
noted.
West Beach Club LPS Class I
C.
The contractor shall submit for approval a lightning protection study and method statement from
their chosen specialist for approval by the engineer.
D.
To save cost and in the interest of more sustainable site installation solutions the lightning
protection system shall utilize as far as possible the natural components of the building.
E.
The down conductors shall be located around the periphery of the building as far as is reasonably
possible. Reinforcement bars in the designated columns shall be used as down conductors. A
minimum of 2no. rebars in each designated column shall be used from top to bottom. To ensure
electrical continuity of the rebar the overlap shall be equal to 20 times the diameter of the rebar
and the overlap shall be secured using either proprietary U clamp fixings or welds.
F.
Where each down conductor is bonded to the air termination network an accessible removable
test link shall be provided.
G.
The electrical continuity of the reinforcing bars shall be determined by electrical testing between
the uppermost part and the ground level. The overall electrical resistance should not be greater
than 0.2ohm measured using test equipment suitable for this purpose. If this value is not achieved,
or it is not practical to conduct such testing, the reinforcing bar shall not be used as a natural
down conductor.
H.
A test link shall be provided at the base of each column where the down conductor transitions into
the earth pit.
I.
All metal works, including water pipes, gas pipes, handrails, air-conditioning units, metal
cladding, metal roofs etc. in the vicinity of the Lightning Protection System shall be bonded, this is
to avoid any side flashing.
Page 25 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

J.
As per DEWA requirements the building earth pits and the lightning protection earth pits shall be
separated by 6.0m.
K.
The contractor shall allow for surge protection in accordance with the recommendation of their
specialist system supplier and as outlined in this specification. As a minimum surge arrestors shall
be provided for the following:
All main distribution boards
Sub main boards feeding external feeder pillars
Sub main boards serving external services i.e. plant and lighting.
L.
If the motor control center is fed from an SMDB then the surge protection in the SMDB shall be
sufficient.
M.
The contractor when tendering for this project shall ensure they have a full understanding of the
requirements of the lightning protection system and what is required of their specialist system
supplier. They shall ensure that they include all costs in their tender.
PART 12 - SECURITY PROTECTION
12.1
A.
12.2
GENERAL
This contract is to include for the supply, detailed design and installation of the CCTV system described
on the drawings and specifications.
CCTV
A.
CCTV cameras shall be located throughout the building. Cameras are to be provided as noted on the
drawings. Recessed Dome type cameras shall be used throughout. The contractor is to ensure that the
CCTV installation meets Dubai Police requirements.
B.
The CCTV cameras shall be wired to their respective location network switches ports through the use of
independent network and CCTV signals, these shall be relayed to the Main Control Room.
END OF SECTION 260001
Page 26 of 26
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260500 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORK

A.
The Contractor is required to :
B.
Carry out the building services installations described on the Contract Drawings and in full
compliance with the requirements of this Specification.
C.
Select material and equipment suitable for the duties detailed on the Contract Drawings and in the
Specification.
D.
Select material and equipment as described on the drawings and within the specification and
from the list of manufacturers within the specification.
E.
Carry out the detailed design as necessary for each of the Building Services installations.
F.
Co-ordinate all aspects of the Building Services installation and its designs such as Structure,
Architecture, ID, Specialist requirements and Local Authorities requirements.
G.
Co-ordinate the Building Services installations with all building services plant and equipment
manufacturers details.
H.
Co-ordinate the Building Services installation with all other building details.
I.
The Contractor shall manage, coordinate and facilitate risk management and review workshops
on a regular basis throughout the different phases and stages in the scope of services. The
contractor shall address both design and construction risks and maintains risk register for the
same. In this process, the contractor shall be assisted by the third party (shall not be sister
company) in carrying out applicable studies and report production and issue of the updated risk
registers (design and construction which includes safety) to all parties through the Engineer where
/ when required by the Engineer at no extra cost to the client. The third party appointed by the
Contractor shall be approved by all the parties ie., the Engineer / the Project Managers / the
Client. This report shall be part of Contractors Monthly report detailing the Risk Management and
Review exercises and workshops carried out.
J.
Supply and install only components that comply with the specification and as approved by the
Engineer.
K.
Supply and install all necessary fixings and fittings and additional sundry components as required
for the full installation of the systems described.
Page 1 of 21
General Requirements Electrical
Project:

Works:
Title:

L.
Test, Commission and set to work each of the systems of the Building Services installation in
accordance with this specification.
M.
Demonstrate the working system and the testing and commissioning of same to the clients
representative.
N.
Provide suitable training to client personnel for each of the Building Services Systems.Power
distribution.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A.
Engineer Appointed Engineer
B.
'Comment' - comment in writing by the Engineer.
C.
'Approval' (and words derived there from) approval in writing by the Engineer.
D.
'High Voltage' (HV) - 11000 volts between phases.
E.
'Low Voltage' (LV) - 400 volts between phases and 230 volts phase-to-neutral.
F.
'Extra Low Voltage' (ELV) - below 50 volts.
G.
IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers.
H.
BS - British Standard Specification.
I.
CP - British Standard Code of Practice.
J.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association (U.S.)
K.
CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
L.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Airconditioning Engineers
M.
ARI American Refrigeration Institute
N.
EN European Norm
O.
IEC International Electrotechnical Committee
P.
ISO International Standards Organization
Q.
FM Factory Mutual
Page 2 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

R.
UL Underwriters Laboratory
S.
External Area Non-air conditioned area
PART 3 - MANUFACTURER AND REFERENCE

A.
'Manufacturer' - the firm under whose name the particular product is marketed.
B.
'Reference' - the proprietary brand name and/or reference by which the particular product is
identified.
PART 4 - EQUAL AND APPROVED

A.
The phrase 'equal and approved' is deemed to be included whenever products are specified by
proprietary name. Products of different manufacture may be substituted if prior approval has been
obtained in writing from the Engineer during the tender period. If no request for approval of
alternative manufacturers has been obtained during the tender period, the tenderer will be
deemed to have submitted his tender offer based on the manufacturer(s) name listed. No
approvals of alternative manufacturers will be allowed within the last two weeks of the tender
period.
B.
Any item specified by Make & Model no. may be substituted with any one of the specified makes
for that particular item, which fully complies the features of the specified model. If no other
manufacturer can meet the features of the specified model, contractor shall provide the specified
item. No alternative proposal is acceptable, though the same is from one of the specified
manufacturer.
PART 5 - MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS WORKMANSHIP AND GOOD PRACTICE

A.
All installation work is deemed to be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and
/ or as described within this specification and in accordance with good working practice.
B.
The contractor is required to submit all manufacturers printed installation instructions as part of his
material submittal for each item.
C.
The Manufacturers recommendation for standard method of installation shall be tailored to suit
the project specific requirements and submitted by the Contractor for the Engineers approval prior
to commencement of installations at site. For the Specialist systems such as Fire Alarm, Emergency
Lighting, ELV systems, BMS etc., method of installation prepared by contractor shall be Endorsed
/ Approved by the Specialist vendor prior to submission to the Engineer for approval.
Page 3 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
It will be necessary to obtain approval / instruction in writing from the Engineer before ordering
materials and starting work in the case where the manufacturers recommendations have changed
between tender and construction or where they conflict with any other specified requirements.
E.
All work is deemed to be undertaken by / or under the close supervision of experienced

tradesmen, skilled in the particular type of work, and where materials, products and workmanship
are not fully specified they must be in accordance with 'good practice', as follows:
F.
Suitable for the purpose of the works stated in or reasonably inferred by the Contract Documents
and the relevant drawings.
G.
In accordance with good building practice, including the relevant provisions of current BS
documents.
PART 6 - COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS SPECIFICATION

AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Comply in full with all requirements described in, or implied, by this specification and with the
Conditions of Contract as well as Schedules and Drawings issued as part of the Contract
Documents.
PART 7 - CALRIFICATION OF DETAILS

A.
Request clarification and make all necessary enquiries prior to submitting the tender regarding
any obscurities or contradictions on or omissions from the specification, related Documents and
Drawings. No consideration will be given to cost claims for work arising from the failure to
obtain such clarification.
B.
The clarification required on amendments (Designs / Specifications) issued post contract shall be
notified to the Engineer within 14 Days from receipt of such amendments. No consideration will
be given to Cost / Time claims for work arising from the failure to obtain such clarifications on
time.
PART 8 - ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED ON SITE
A.
The contractor is required to provide a copy of the following documents on site and have them
available at all times for reference by the engineer and engineer's supervisor :
The 17th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
DEWA Regulations
Page 4 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

NFPA codes for fire alarms and emergency lighting
Telecom provider regulations
PART 9 - COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

A.
9.1
A.
9.2
A.
Comply with the requirements of all relevant British Standards (BS) regarding equipment
manufacture, design and installation whether or not these are specifically mentioned in the
Specification.
ALTERNATIVE STANDARDS
International Standards (ISO) or (IEC) which are equivalent to the appropriate British Standard
may be used. Other standards may be offered as an alternative only if submitted for approval
along with the equipment manufacturers written assurance that they are equal to BS, ISO or IEC
Standards.
DISCREPANCIES
In the event of a discrepancy between the Specification and any BS or other approved standard
request clarification in writing from the Engineer.
PART 10 - COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY AND OTHER REGULATIONS
10.1
STATUTORY REGULATIONS:
A.
Comply with all relevant statutory instruments and regulations current at the date of tender and in
particular the following:
B.
The requirements of the local Electricity & Water Authority.
C.
The requirements of the local Telecommunications Company.
D.
The requirements of the local Municipality Building and Drainage Department.
E.
The requirements of the local Civil Defence Department.
F.
Any other local Bye-Laws and Regulations.
Page 5 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

10.2
OTHER REGULATIONS:
A.
Comply in all respects with British Standard BS.7671:2008 "Requirements for Electrical
Installations" (IEE Wiring Regulations, Seventeenth Edition), incorporating all current amendments.
B.
Comply with the requirements of any Specialists appointed by Client / Engineer.

PART 11 - EXTENT OF WORKS
11.1
DESIGN:
A.
Verify the following by calculation based on specified standards, Statutory regulations and / or
requirements. These calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer along with appropriate
material / shop drawing submissions and the same shall be complied by the contractor at no
extra cost to client.
all co-ordination of protective devices to prove discrimination
all lighting calculations in accordance with design parameters
all cable sizes and short circuit ratings
all battery sizes for emergency lighting and UPS systems
all containment system sizes
B.
And all necessary calculations required from specialist suppliers for Emergency Lighting, voice
evacuation systems and the like.
C.
Complete the design of systems e.g. to ensure that electrical rooms, data hub rooms, central
battery rooms and the like are adequately air conditioned / ventilated to suit the requirements of
the selected equipment located within.
11.2
A.
LABOUR, MATERIAL and TOOLS:

Provide all labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all materials and equipment to form a
complete design and installation. Provide suitable tools for the correct fixing and fitting of all
components.
Page 6 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

11.3
A.
11.4
SUNDRY COMPONENTS:
Provide all incidental sundry components necessary for the complete execution of the works and
for the proper operation of the installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these sundry
components are mentioned in the Contract Documents.
CO-ORDINATION:
A.
Co-ordinate all services with regard to routing and allocation of individual service space in
relation to others within the given space.
B.
Ensure electrical services and fittings are located at least 300mm from water services and are not
located directly below.
C.
Co-ordinate sequence of installation, method of support and exact location of fixing holes to be
drilled in the building structure, and ensure that this information is available in time to suit the
building programme.
11.5
A.
11.6
A.
11.7
A.
11.8
TESTS:
Carry out all tests, adjustments and commissioning as described in this Specification and as
required by each system in order to give an effective working installation to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
BUILDERSWORK:
Identify all builders work requirements and show on detailed working drawings for execution.
WORKMANSHIP:
Carry out all installations in a neat and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
WORKING DRAWINGS:
A.
Develop Consultant design drawings to working drawing status based on HVAC, Plumbing, Fire
Fighting, Structure, Architecture, ID, Specialist system designs / requirements and in accordance
with the Engineer & Local Authorities requirements.
B.
Provide dimensioned, co-coordinated drawings showing all components to scale.
Page 7 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
Provide detailed sectional view drawings and fixing details of all components.
D.
Provide drawings as described in this Specification.
11.9
A.
INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
Provide manuals as described in this Specification.
PART 12 - MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide materials and equipment for each service or function, as far as possible, of one
manufacture and as per the manufacturers listed.
PART 13 - SUPERVISION
A.
The contractor will provide a Building Services coordinator in addition to full-time site supervisory
staff for each discipline.
B.
In addition to the above, the contractor shall obtain Specialist vendors approvals for the
installations prior to offer for the Engineers approval. This is applicable for and not limited to Fire
Alarm, PA/VA, BMS, Emergency Lighting and all other ELV systems.
C.
Provide CVs for proposed full-time site supervisory staff for approval by the engineer prior to
them being sited. The C.V. should demonstrate the candidates experience (not less than 10
years) in a similar role and academic qualifications (not less than a BTEC or HNC in Electrical or
Mechanical Engineering).
D.
Supervision / Approvals / Comments by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor from
supervising fully the correct installation of the works in accordance with Contract documents and
Local Authorities requirements.
PART 14 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A.
The contractor shall design, procure, install, test and commission a complete low voltage power
distribution system in accordance with DEWA and BS7671 requirements, the design drawings
and in accordance with the specifications. This shall include but not be limited to the following:
Page 8 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 15 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A.
The contractor shall design, procure, install, test and commission a complete low voltage
power distribution system in accordance with DEWA and BS7671 requirements, the
design drawings and in accordance with the specifications. This shall include but not be
limited to the following:
PART 16 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.
The contractor shall submit and obtain approval for the following within 28 days from
date of project award / prior to commencement of works,
PQP Project Quality Plan
ITP Inspection Test Plan
B.
Upon Approval / Agreement on the above, the contractor shall submit detailed method
of statements for installations, testing & Commissioning for the Engineers approval prior
to commence the same. Method of statement for specialist systems installation, testing and
commissioning shall be from respective approved vendors.
C.
The contractor shall comply the above plans & methods fully and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Any deviation which may require shall be approved in writing from the
Engineer. However, the review / comments / approval of the Engineer does not relieve
contractor from the responsibility of complying to the contract documents and local
authority requirements.
D.
The contractor shall continually monitor the quality of material and workmanship on site
to ensure that only approved materials are employed and that they are installed in the
proper manner for their purpose and entirely in accordance with the approved standards,
manufacturers recommended installation methods, approved method statements and in
accordance with the specification.
E.
The contractor will request the Engineer to inspect sample installations prior to
progressing full installation of systems. Irrespective of contractors compliance to all of the
above procedures, contractor shall ensure any material / system installed by them shall
be fit to purpose.
Page 9 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 17 - SUBSTITUITION OF NON-APPROVED MATERIALS

A.
Should any material or equipment be used without approval, the Engineer reserves the
right to request the substitution of the correct material or equipment. Should any
substitution be necessary the Contractor will bear the cost of any associated builder's
work or making good.
B.
The acceptance of alternatives must be agreed and confirmed in writing by the Engineer.
PART 18 - SAMPLES
A.
Provide samples of any materials to be used on site as and when requested by the
Engineer. The cost of providing said samples shall be borne by the contractor.
B.
Note that the Engineer may require the samples to be subjected to tests to ensure
compliance with British Standard and other relevant specifications. The cost of such tests
shall be borne by the Contractor.
PART 19 - TEMPORARY USE OF INSTALLATIONS
A.
Do not use any of the installations for any temporary purpose, except installation and
commissioning tests, without approval from the Engineer.
PART 20 - TEST AND INSPECTION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK

A.
The Engineer shall have access at all reasonable times to such parts of the Contractor's
work as may be necessary for the purpose of inspecting and testing the materials,
workmanship and performance of the plant.
B.
Inspection requests in accordance with Inspection Test Plan for any installations shall be
appended with excerpt of approved shop drawing and the same shall reflect any
amendments / deviations from the approved shop drawing. However, the Engineer is
entitled to demand for shop drawing revision prior to inspect the installation, if the
amendment / deviation are reasonably excessive in his opinion.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, apparatus and instruments for carrying out
routine tests in the presence of the Engineer.
Page 10 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 21 - RECORD OF WORKS

A.
The contractor shall maintain a programme of works indicating in detail the number of
men and hours allocated to specific tasks. The program shall indicate on a system by
system basis all aspects of the building services works. The programme will be updated
at least every two weeks and submitted to the engineer accordingly.
B.
In addition to the above, the contractor shall maintain set of marked up drawing, which
shall reflect the progress to date and any installation amendments / deviations from such
approved drawing. This shall be provided to the Engineer at any time during course of
the progress of works.
PART 22 - WORKING DRAWINGS
22.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Develop the design drawings to detailed working / installation drawings.
B.
All drawings will be prepared using the latest version of AutoCAD.
C.
Submit to the Engineer for comment, three A1 size paper prints and one A3 copy of each
drawing detailing the accurate and proper execution of the works. Ensure that all
services such as Mechanical, Architecture, Structure, ID, Approved Equipment Suppliers
and Specialist requirements have been fully complied prior to commencement.
D.
Update drawings as necessary during the course of the works to suit any Mechanical,
Architecture, Structure, ID, Approved Equipment Suppliers and Specialist revised
requirements / Amendments at no extra cost to client, if required by the engineer . Ensure
resources to enable re-submittal of revised drawings for approval within one week of
receipt of same.
E.
Any amendments required to Electrical designs based on the above such revisions shall
be carried out by the contractor at no extra cost to the client. Also, Local authority
approvals shall be obtained where necessary in accordance with Local Authorities
regulations / requirements.
22.2
A.
FORMAT
Drawings shall be 1 metric size to BS3429:1975 and in accordance with BS 308: Part
1: 1972.
Page 11 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
22.3
Text and line thin. Thicknesses shall be sized such that they can be read when the
drawings are reduced to A3 size. The tenderer shall allow for all general layout
drawings being produced at 1:100 scale when printed on A1 size paper and 1:50 or
1:20 scale for heavily serviced areas e.g. toilet areas, electrical switch rooms, plant
rooms etc.
TITLE
A.
Incorporate an approved 'Title Block` on all drawings with the following information
clearly indicated.
B.
Name of project.
C.
Scale of drawing.
D.
Title of drawing, incorporating the name and location of the service or services shown.
E.
Drawing number in accordance with an approved numbering system designed for use by
all trades.
F.
Name and address of the Main Contractor and the Sub-Contractor.
G.
Name and address of the Main Consultant and the Building Services Consultant.
H.
Drawing referred for preparation of working drawing ( For example : Design drawings of
MEP, Architecture, Structure, ID and Other Contractors shop drawings etc.,)
I.
Space shall be allocated for co-ordination endorsement from Civil Contractor, Specialist
Suppliers (where Applicable) and other specialist contractors, if any.
22.4
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A.
Show routes and sizes of all ductwork and pipe work.
B.
Show routes and sizes of all cables, cable ladders, trays and trunking.
C.
Show fixing details for all installation methods.
D.
Show location of all distribution equipment, control panels, and terminal equipment.
E.
Show details of all plant items.
Page 12 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Show all water and air flow rates on appropriate drawings.
G.
Show details of all control equipment.
H.
Show co-coordinated sections through service routes.
I.
Show wall elevations in electrical rooms.
J.
Show wall elevation for typical arrangement for mounting of electrical devices to suit
various applications e.g. water heaters, hand dryers, A/C controllers etc.
22.5
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A.
Provide wiring diagrams for all systems detailing all circuitry within equipment, together
with inter-connecting wiring to associated equipment.
B.
Indicate containment systems for external circuit wiring.
C.
Indicate the sizes and types of all cables together with the ratings of all such items as
fuses, switches and control devices.
D.
Show all terminal markings.
E.
Arrange the circuit diagrams, where possible, so that the main sequence of events is from
left to right and from top to bottom of the diagram and produce the diagrams generally
in compliance with BS 3939.
F.
Provide a schedule on each drawing to explain the abbreviations and symbols employed
for the designation of components.
G.
Securely fix and protect by non flammable transparent material a print of each of the
circuit and layout diagrams to the inside of the hinged front door of the panels, as
appropriate, or in such other positions as may be agreed with the Engineer. Reduce the
prints to a suitable size in cases where inadequate space exists.
H.
Individual circuit and layout drawings from component manufacturers will not be
accepted in lieu of an overall drawing.
22.6
A.
MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS
Provide manufacturer's certified as built drawings and illustrative literature.
Page 13 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Detail all internal circuitry and arrangement of equipment.
C.
Detail external layout of equipment including terminals and indicate any restrictions of
access to equipment, lifting information and fixing recommendations.
D.
Indicate all component ratings, terminal references and wiring sizes.
22.7
BUILDERSWORK DRAWINGS
A.
Provide Builders work drawings showing full dimensions of all foundations, bases, plinths,
holes and the like as well as the overall dimensions and mass of the plant concerned.
B.
Small holes, fixings and the like other than in plant rooms, switch rooms and roof areas
may be marked out on site, with the agreement of the Engineer, instead of on drawings.
22.8
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A.
Comment by the Engineer on any drawings will not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility with respect to the accuracy of such drawings, nor to provide suitable
equipment as specified, provided that any discrepancies, errors or omissions are not due
to inaccurate information or particulars furnished in writing by the Engineer.
B.
Any delay resulting from the failure to provide accurate and sufficient drawings and other
information in time to suit the construction programme will be the Contractor's
Responsibility.
22.9
PROGRESS DRAWINGS
A.
Maintain on site a set of drawings showing the progress of the works and any
modifications carried out during the installation stage.
B.
Ensure drawings are continuously updated to suit any architectural or engineering

revisions and re-submitted for approval to the Engineer.
C.
Progress drawings are to be available to the Engineer for his inspection on site
throughout the contract period.
Page 14 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 23 - RECORD DRAWINGS
23.1
A.
23.2
A.
23.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Produce a comprehensive set of 'as installed` drawings, based on the Working / Progress
Drawings, for the purpose of providing a complete and clear record of the finished Works for
future users.
FORMAT
Produce the final drawings, after corrections to take into account any comments by the Engineer,
to a standard A1 metric size to BS 3429 : 1975 and in accordance with BS 308 : Part 1 : 1972
to ensure suitability for microfilming.
TITLE
A.
Refer to same for Working Drawings, plus :
B.
Date of completion of the installation.
23.4
ISSUE
A.
Supply to the Engineer not less than 3 weeks prior to the issue of a "Practical Completion
Certificate", two A1 and two A3 size paper prints of each preliminary record drawing for
comment.
B.
Provide the employer at or before the date of practical completion, two A1 size paper prints, two
A3 size paper prints and one A1 size polyester negative of each final approved record drawing
and also in electronic format as listed below :
C.
Two copies of all approved As Fitted drawings on separate CD-ROM disks of AutoCAD files in
*.dwg format.
D.
Licensed AutoCAD file viewing software to enable the end user to view and print drawing files.
E.
Each disk shall contain an ASCII "README.TXT" detailing the contents of the disk and any special
information relating to the use of the disk.
F.
A "Practical Completion Certificate" for the contract will not be issued without receipt of these
record drawings.
Page 15 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

23.5
A.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
Comments by the Engineer on any Record Drawing will not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility with respect to the accuracy of the drawing, nor will it imply the Engineer's
acceptance of responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the drawing.
PART 24 - INSTRUCTION MANUALS
24.1
GENERAL
A.
Compile a comprehensive set of Manuals for the purpose of providing the future users with a clear
and complete understanding of the correct procedures for operating and maintaining all
installations, plant and equipment installed under the Building Services section of the works.
B.
Two copies of all final parameters and password details on separate CDs shall be handed over
to the client.
24.2
CONTENT
A.
Provide the following information:
B.
Description of each systems function.
C.
Detailed description of all operation procedures.
D.
Full details of the regular maintenance procedures recommended by the manufacturers for each
item of equipment.
E.
List of spare parts to be kept in store for each item of equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Manufacturer's printed manuals, regarding operating and maintenance procedures for all items of
equipment.
G.
Fully detailed manufacturer's drawings showing the construction of each item of equipment.
H.
Fully detailed internal and external wiring diagrams.
I.
Where two or more items of equipment are identical then one set of instructions will be accepted,
but in the case of similar, but not identical items, then a set of instructions must be provided for
each item.
Page 16 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

J.
Details of all components used within the installation.
K.
Local agent contact details for each component.
24.3
INDEXING
A.
Clearly indicate on the cover or on the inside front page of the Manuals the following information:
B.
Document Index and/or Content List. The index may include only the main headings of all
sections of the document, but in that case the individual sections should be preceded by a content
list giving full details of the documentation included within the section.
C.
Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor.
D.
Date of installation.
24.4
ISSUE
A.
Supply to the Engineer not less than 3 weeks prior to the issue of a "Practical Completion
Certificate", one preliminary copy of the manuals for comment.
B.
Provide the Employer at or before the date of practical completion, two copies of the final
approved manuals.
C.
A practical completion certificate for the contract will not be issued without receipt of these
manuals.
24.5
FORMAT
A.
Compile the final copies of the manuals after corrections to take into account any comments made
by the Engineer, into adequately bound volumes with suitable covers to withstand continual
usage.
B.
Each volume shall be bound in a loose leaf plastic folder, with a printed cover with the following
printed on the outer front cover:
C.
Project Title
D.
Project Number
E.
Location
Page 17 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Client's Name and Address
G.
Engineer's Name and Address
H.
Main Contractor's Name and Address
I.
Provide all of the content of the agreed manuals in electronic format (*.PDF) organized into a
similarly indexed electronic file as the hard copy. Provide index pages with hyperlinks to each
individual section of the manual or to each individual items electronic data.
24.6
A.
FAILURE OF INSTALLATION
Failure of any part of the installation subsequent to the 'hand over` that can be attributed to lack
of maintenance or incorrect operation by the User caused by omitting to supply adequately
detailed Operating and Maintenance Procedures at the time of 'hand over`, must be rectified at
no expense to the Employer.
PART 25 - PLANTROOM NOTICES

25.1
A.
25.2
A.
25.3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Provide in each plant room and switch room, a print of the schematic diagram on a varnish
timber base with a perspex front cover, or equal, and erect it on the switch room wall using screw
fixings.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Sequence of Operation / Cause & Effect shall be reflected in Matrix format for various systems
such as LV Distribution, Stand-by Generators, Fire Alarm, PA, Emergency Lighting, BMS, any other
systems as required by the Engineer and be availed at respective Plant / Service rooms. The same
shall be user friendly and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and / or Clients operatives.
TREATMENT FOR SHOCK CARD
A.
Provide in each main plant or switch room an A3 size card which indicates the action necessary
in the treatment of persons injured by electric shock.
B.
Mount the card on a varnished timber base with a perspex front cover or equal and erect it on the
switch room wall using screw fixings.
Page 18 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

25.4
INSPECTION NOTICE:
A.
Provide a Periodic Inspection Notice in the form prescribed in the IEE Regulations, with the
addition of the Installing Contractor's name.
B.
Mount the notice on a varnished timber base with a perspex front cover, or equal and erect on
the main switch room wall beside the schematic drawings using screw fixings..
PART 26 - MATERIALS TO BE HANDED OVER

A.
Hand over to the Employer, spare lamps, fuses, tools, loose equipment and the like (where
specified) and obtain the Employer's signature of receipt for such material.
B.
Submit a copy of each receipt with the final account for the Contract, together with an inventory
of the materials handed over.Sub-main cables shall be XLPE/SWA/LSF type whilst final circuits
shall generally be LSF sheathed single core cables.
PART 27 - SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

27.1
SPARE PARTS: Hand over to the Employer the spare parts specified and the list of spare parts
recommended by the manufacturer of each item specified.
27.2
TOOLS
A.
27.3
A.
Provide tools sufficient to carry out maintenance and major repair work on switchgear, electrical
equipment and plant items included in the Contract. Where appropriate, provide the
manufacturer's tool box complete with padlock and two keys.
INVENTORY
Provide an inventory in duplicate which lists and identifies by manufacturer's references each
spare part or tool handed over to the Employer at the Practical Completion of the Contract.
PART 28 - ROUTINE SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

A.
Provide routine servicing and maintenance, as per manufacturer's recommendations, of all plant
for a period of one year following date of practical completion.
Page 19 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 29 - LABELLING ABND IDENTIFICATION
29.1
GENERAL
A.
Identify all items of equipment, cables and circuit wiring, pipework and ductwork, by means of
labels, colour coding, numbered ferrules and terminals.
B.
Labels warning of danger must at all times be clearly visible to maintenance and operating staff.
C.
Do not use adhesive fixings on labels mounted external to equipment.
29.2
IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING LABELS
A.
Fix to all plant, equipment, switchboards, control panels, loose switchgear, distribution boards
and the like, labels giving the reference, duty and rating indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Fix warning labels, as necessary, for the safe operation of the equipment or system.
C.
Manufacture the labels from 2mm minimum thickness white laminate, engraved with 6mm high
'Optima' pattern letters, unfilled black for normal service equipment and 10mm high letters
unfilled red for essential services equipment and warning notices.
29.3
A.
29.4
IDENTIFICATION PLATES
Fix to all items of equipment an approved identification plate bearing the manufacturer's name,
reference number, size and model number, as well as any other information necessary to allow
the item to be readily identified for the purpose of obtaining spare parts.
CIRCUIT CHARTS
A.
Provide circuit identification charts at distribution boards by means of typed cards giving the
circuit details and rating of fuse or circuit breaker, equipment served and connected load.
B.
Fit the cards into a perspex 'pocket' fixed to the inside cover of the unit.
29.5
A.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Provide circuit details at switchboards and control panels by means of a suitably sized wiring
diagram giving wiring and component details, terminal markings and ferrule references.
Page 20 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
29.6
A.
29.7
A.
29.8
Fit the diagram into a perspex 'pocket' fixed to the inside cover of the unit.
TERMINAL MARKINGS
Identify each terminal within switchboards, distribution boards, control panels and control
equipment by suitable terminal markings bearing numbered or lettered reference corresponding to
those on the circuit charts and wiring diagrams.
WIRING IN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS

Identify all conductors by means of numbered ferrules bearing the circuit reference corresponding
to those on the circuit charts and wiring diagrams.
CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify cables at switchboards and control panels by means of a stamped brass or aluminium
label giving the cable size, number of cores and function.
B.
Fit labels at 30 metre intervals along the run of the cable and on either side of transit frames,
walls or similar obstructions on the cable route.
C.
Secure to the cable with galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wire.
PART 30 - STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A.
Store all materials, equipment and plant securely under weatherproof cover to prevent corrosion,
scaling, pitting, weathering and other damage at all stages during the construction period.
Page 21 of 21
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables,

cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.
Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems
communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.
Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and
data circuits.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
XLPE/SWA/PVC to BS 5467, 600/1000 volt grade

PVC/SWA./PVC to BS 6346, 600/1000 volt grade
XLPE/SWA/LSF to BS 6724, 600/1000 volt grade
DEFINITIONS
VFC: Variable frequency controller.
Page 1 of 8
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.5
APPLICATION
1.
1.6
A.
CONSTRUCTION
Multi-core :
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Stranded copper conductor,

XLPE (or PVC) insulated as indicated
tape-bedded, single aluminium wire armoured
PVC outer sheath.
INSULATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.8
stranded copper conductor

XLPE insulated
tape-bedded, steel wire armoured
LSF outersheath.
Single-core :
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Provide XLPE/SWA/LSF cables unless otherwise indicated.
Single Phase Power

Phase Wires - Colour of Phase
Neutral Wires Black
Three Phase Power Supplies
Phase Wires - Red Yellow Blue
Neutral Wires Black
TERMINATIONS
A.
Provide brass cable glands to BS 6121 complete with brass earth tag and overall PCP shroud.
B.
Select and install glands in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to maintain the IP
rating of the equipment being connected.
Page 2 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.9
A.
INSTALLATION
GENERAL :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Refer to Contract Drawings and BS 7671 for method of installation.

Refer to Contract Drawings for cable routes.
Obtain Engineers approval to cable route layout drawings prior to commencing any
associated preparatory work on site.
Do not store or install cables in locations directly exposed to solar radiation.
Do not use winches to pull cable.
Do not install through joints in cables.
Install all cables a minimum of 25mm from the nearest wall or solid surface.
Do not install cables within 300mm of water, gas and other piped services.
Do not route cables below water services pipework.
Ensure provision is made for adequate cable bends throughout the cable route.
Cables on tray /ladder/U-channel supports:
Provide cable tray/ladder containment systems for all armoured cables. Provide cable
ladder unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Grouped cables installed on cable containment will be spaced apart by at least one cable
diameter (of the larger cable) throughout the length of the cables run.
Secure cables to cable tray/ladder/U-channel using cleats where the cable is fixed to a
vertical cable support surface or ties where the cable tray surface is horizontal.
Cable in ground (direct buried and in single way ducts) :
Install buried LV cables 600mm below local finished ground level unless otherwise detailed
on the Contract Drawings.
Install buried HV cables 800mm below local finished ground level unless otherwise
detailed on the Contract Drawings.
Lay buried cables on a 150mm bed of riddled sand with a 100mm layer of sand over the
cable. Backfill in 100mm layers using riddled sand or earth and ram each layer to prevent
subsidence using power ramming only to the last 300mm of re-instatement.
19.
Install a cable marking tape 250mm below the finished ground level covering each cable.
20.
Install a cable marker at each change in cable direction, joint position and entry point to
buildings.
21.
Cables installed in ground will be laid in a single, horizontal layer spaced 450mm apart.
22.
Obtain Engineers approval before cables are covered and trenches backfilled.
Page 3 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
INSULATED WIRING CABLES

1.
PVC to BS 6004, 450/750 Volt grade.
2.
LSF to BS 6724, 450/750 Volt grade.
INSTALLATION
A.
Ensure that all wiring is looped from live and neutral terminals of accessories for circuit
progression.
B.
Do not joint wiring cables except at the terminals of accessories or equipment.
C.
Ensure that cables within equipment are neatly dressed and bound with nylon cable ties at
intervals of 100mm, or contained in perforated PVC trunking permitting 'take-offs' as required.
D.
Use heat resisting cable sleeves where circuit wiring terminates at, or passes through luminaires
or equipment terminal boxes, which may be subject to temperatures in excess of 0oC. Provide
wiring cables as follows:
1.
2.
Lighting
i.
ii.
iii.
Single Phase Power

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
E.

Neutral Wires - Black
Strap Wires - Colour of Phase

Neutral Wires Black
Three Phase Power Supplies
Phase Wires - Red Yellow Blue
Neutral Wires Black
Do not install wiring of more than one phase in an outlet box or switch box, other than one
designed for multi-phase use.
Page 4 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Do not install wiring originating from different distribution units in accessory or outlet boxes, other
than those designed for multi-phase use.
G.
Do not reduce the cross sectional area of circuit cables from that originating at the circuit
protection device.
H.
Allow for colour coding wiring cables by heatshrink oversheathing at all terminations within
distribution boards and equipment.
I.
Use crimped terminations for cables above 6sq.mm.
J.
Do not use pinch screw terminal devices.
K.
Identify circuit wiring within distribution equipment by using ferrules giving circuit reference at
neutral bar, earth bar and incoming and outgoing terminals.
L.
The number of wires grouped within containment systems shall not exceed the capacities listed in
the IEE Wiring Regulations.
2.2
A.
MINERAL INSULATED CABLES

STANDARDS
1.
B.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Copper conductors
Magnesium oxide insulated
Solid drawn copper outer sheath
PVC sheathed overall.
Provide red coloured sheath for fire alarm circuits.
SUPPORT
1.
D.
To BS 6207, 600 volt grade unless otherwise stated.
PVC covered single or multi-way saddles at 300mm intervals on walls etc. and 1000mm
on cable tray. Fix saddles with brass round head screws.
INSTALLATION
Page 5 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.3
A.
FIRE RETARDANT POWER SUPPLY CABLES

STANDARDS
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fire Safety Power Cables : orange
SUPPORT
1.
D.
BS 6387 category CWZ

BS 4066-1
BS 4066-3
Local Civil Defence Approved.
SHEATH COLOUR
1.
C.
Ensure that all wiring is looped from live and neutral terminals of accessories for circuit
progression.
Do not joint cables except at the terminals of accessories or equipment.
Ensure that cable bends are not less than six times the diameter of the cable.
Install cable passing through walls or floors in a conduit sleeve with brass bushed ends.
Protect cable where concealed in plaster and the like, with galvanised steel channel.
Fit 'SPACE RANGER' gland terminations with round milled edge heavy gauge locknut.
Provide sealing pot and sealing compound within each termination.
Where gland entries are not threaded, cut cable tails to suit and sheath with colour coded
neoprene.
Provide surge divertors at all luminaire connections in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
Cables should be straightened where necessary using the cable manufacturers MI cable
straightener tool.
Cables should be bent where necessary using the cable manufacturers MI cable bender
tool.
Provide fixings and supports for cable as per the manufacturers recommendations.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Refer to Contract Drawings and BS 7671 for method of installation.

Refer to Contract Drawings for cable routes.
Obtain Engineers approval to cable route layout drawings prior to commencing any
associated preparatory work on site.
4.
5.
Do not store or install cables in locations directly exposed to solar radiation.

Do not use winches to pull cable.
Page 6 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Do not install through joints in cables.

Install all cables a minimum of 25mm from the nearest wall or solid surface.
Do not install cables within 300mm of water, gas and other piped services.
Do not route cables below water services pipework.
Ensure provision is made for adequate cable bends throughout the cable route.
CABLES ON TRAY/LADDER/U-CHANNEL SUPPORTS :

1.
2.
3.
Grouped cables installed on cable support will be spaced apart by at least one cable
diameter (of the larger cable) throughout the length of the cables run.
Provide cable tray/ladder containment systems for all armoured cables unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings.
Secure cables to cable tray/ladder using cleats where the cable is fixed to a vertical cable
tray/ladder surface or ties where the cable tray/ladder surface is horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative]:
Page 7 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test [service entrance and feeder conductors] [and] [conductors feeding the following
critical equipment and services] for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
3.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Procedures used.
Results that comply with requirements.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
Page 8 of 8

And Cables
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes Electrical bonding systems and equipment.
B.
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Underground distribution grounding.

Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
Foundation steel electrodes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test wells.
Ground rods.
Ground rings.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
Page 1 of 11
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.
In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:
a.
1.6
Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells
ground rings grounding connections for separately derived systems Insert locations
based on NETA MTS NFPA 70B.
1)
Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within

specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if
values do not.
2)
Include recommended testing intervals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS FOR EARTHING SYSTEMS TO BS 7430

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Use earthing conductor

Minimum dimension BS 7430, current density 50A/mm2 or as stated on drawing
Form TAPE
Material copper, annealed.
Coverings None
Accessories conductor clips, metallic
Page 2 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.2
TAPE FIXING DEVICES

A. Secure bare copper tape to structure with fixing devices which avoid piercing tape and ensure
3mm (minimum) clearance of tape from structure, at 450mm maximum, centers.
B. Material for fixing system earthing copper alloy conforming to BSEN 50164.
2.3
EARTH ELECTRODES RODS FOR SYSTEM EARTHING

A.
B.
C.
D.
Standard BS 7430.
Form SOLID COPPER rod with female thread each end.
Dimensions Rod Diameter 15mm nominal Rod length 2.4m (2x1.2) minimum.
Earth electrode couplings Use high strength driving cap in contact with driven rod and couplings of
compatible material fully enclosing the rod threads.
E. Interconnect electrodes using bare copper tape 25mmx6mm.
F. Earth electrodes in draw pits provide concrete cover, permanently labeled for electrodes installed
through cable draw pit bases.
G. Main earth conductor connection Connect main earth conductor to first electrode using heavy-duty
purpose mode silicon aluminum bronze body conductor clamp and high tensile phosphor bronze
bolt in compliance to BSEN 50164.
H. Material to be minimum size as BS 7430 Table 4 Copper.
I. Accessories
J. Rod to tape clamp in compliance to BSEN 50164. Sized to suit earth rod and connector
2.4
EARTH ELECTRODE CLAMPS

A. Connect tape to electrode head using heavy duty purpose made silicon Aluminium bronze body
connector clamps or leaded gunmetal body connector clamps to BSEN 50164, and high tensile
phosphor bronze bolts to BS EN 12163.
2.5
EARTH ELECTRODE INSPECTION FACILITIES

A. Provide enclosure for each connection between earth conductor and associated earth electrode system. Install so that top is flush with finished ground or floor level. Ensure enclosure provides adequate access for testing purpose. Provide pit builders work details. Labeling Earth.
2.6
MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDS

A. Provide main equipotential bonds in accordance with BS 7430 and BS 7671
B. Material Insulated cable, single core to BS 6004
Page 3 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

C. Use no joints in main equipotential bonds.
2.7
SUPPLEMENTARY EQUIPOTENTIAL BOND

A. Provide supplementary equipotential bonds to BS 7430 and BS 7671.
B. Joints not allowed in these bonds.
C. Material Insulated cable, single core to BS 6004.
2.8
CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

A. Material :
Insulated cable, single core to BS 6004 as indicated:
B. Size: Provide protection conductors sized in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE Regulations) 54301-03 and Tables 54B, 54C, 54E and 54F or provide protective conductors sized in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE Regulations) 543-01-04 and Table 54G.
2.9
EARTHING CLAMPS
A. Use clamps complying with BSEN 50164, for bonding pipes and lead sheathed cables or similar.
2.10
EARTH BARS
A. Material: Manufacture earth bus bars from hard drawn, tinned, high conductivity copper bar.
B. Substation Earth bar: 100 x 6mm cross section 600mm minimum length.
C. Main Earth Terminal Bar: 25 x6 mm minimum for incoming live conductor not exceeding
50mm2 and 50 x 6 mm minimum for incoming live conductor over 50mm2.
2.11
TEST LINKS
A. Provide two test links, in connections between main earth conductors and earth bus bars. Fabricate each from two additional sections of earth bus bar. Mount on section on stand-off insulators
matching earth bus bar, use remaining section as removable test link. Secure 12mm high tensile
brass studs to fixed sections of bus bar and drill corresponding clearance holes in test links and
provide brass washer, nuts and locking devices to secure frame/neutral earthing and test links.
Page 4 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.12
LUGS/TAGS
A. Provide lugs or tags to enable connection of bonding conductors to equipment earth terminals.
2.13
PROTECTIVE CABLE TERMINATIONS
A. For bolted connections use crimp type lugs compressed by automatic tool to achieve correct pressure and crimp depth.
2.14
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR WARNING NOTICES/LABELS
A. Provide a permanent label marked in letters 4.75mm minimum height SAFETY ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION DO NOT REMOVE, in A visible position, at each bonding conductor connection
to extraneous conductive parts.
2.15
MAIN EARTH CONDUCTOR WARNING TAPES
A. Provide green/yellow PVC tapes labeled EARTHING CONDUCTOR over complete external
lengths of main earth conductors at 300mm depth below finished ground.
2.16
EARTH BAR LABEL
A. Label earth bar SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DO NOT REMOVE with wall mounted
laminated plastic tablet engraved in 10mm high red letters on white ground.
2.17
TAPE ELECTRODES
A. Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape, the tape shall be to BSEN 13601, of the size,
length, depth below ground level and layout as indicated.
2.18
EXTENT OF EARTHING
A. Ensure all exposed metalwork within the building installation is mechanically and electrically
continuous throughout the building.
B. Ensure all earth bars within each LV switchboard is solidly bonded and connected via CPC to
the main earth bar and electrode installation.
Page 5 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

C. All exposed conductive parts associated with the electrical installation and all extraneous conductive parts must be earthed via protection conductors.
D. Conduit/trunking etc. shall not be used as the sole protective conductor; however it will require
to be electrically continuous and will be tested to ensure it is so.
2.19
EARTH CONTINUITY
A. Earth continuity between separate items of switchgear, distribution boards etc., mounted adjacent
to one another shall be effected by means of high conductivity continuous copper tape, or LSF/PVC
sheathed cable colored green and yellow and sized in accordance with Chapter 54 particularly
Section 543 of the BS 7671 (IEE Regulations), connecting all items to the earth terminal.
2.20
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. All items of switchgear, accessories, luminaires, conduits and the other sheaths of MICS cables, the
armouring of all PVC/SWA/PVC cables together with all other items of electrical plant and equipment shall be effectively earthed by means of a protective conductor in accordance with Chapter
54, particularly Section 543 of the IEE Regulations.
2.21
TERMINAL BOXES
A. At every terminal point on the fixed wiring system an integral earth terminal shall be provided, e.g.
BESA boxes, accessory boxes etc. A protective conductor shall be provided and installed between
this terminal and the earth terminal on the associated switch, socket outlet, luminaire etc.
2.22
BUSBARS
A. Where bus bars are installed, the contractor shall ensure that all connectors, joints and tap offs effectively provide a good earth return path equal to the earth bar contained within the busduct. The
contractor will ensure that the system manufacturer witnesses and approves all busbar installation
connections and joints.
2.23
INCOMING SERVICES
A. All incoming metal piped services, all internal metal pipes and ducting for air conditioning and ventilation systems shall be connected to the main earthing terminal by means of equipotential bonding
conductors.
Page 6 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.24
KITCHENS
A. All equipment located in kitchens, e.g. cookers hobs etc shall have an additional supplementary
protective conductor interconnecting all pipework and the main earth terminal.
2.25
FLOORS & CEILINGS
A. All metallic floors and ceilings shall be sufficiently bonded to ensure that with a reasonable number
of tiles removed, earth continuity is maintained in accordance with the IEC Regulations.
2.26
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Where lengths of flexible metallic conduit connect to machines or other equipment, the flexible
conduit shall be supplemented by an external protective conductor, (sized in accordance with BS
7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations) of stranded copper conductor PVC/LSF insulated coloured
green/yellow and connected between the rigid conduit and the earth terminal on the equipment.
2.27
ARMOURED CABLES
A. Bond the sheaths and armour of low voltage and medium voltage cables solidly to earth using the
earth terminal of a proprietary cable gland.
B. Separate earth continuity conductors sized in accordance with BS7671 and the Statutory Authority
requirements shall be installed with all armoured cables and shall be bonded to the equipment
earthing terminal.
2.28
CLEAN EARTH
A. Install clean earths using double insulated cables from earth electrodes to equipment earthing
points. Mount all bus bars with insulators and separate from other earthing systems.
B. Note that the clean earth will be insulated and electrically separated from all other earths
throughout the installation and will provide a direct routing only from the earth terminal of the
equipment to a separate earth bar at main LV switchgear.
2.29
DISSIMILAR METALS
A. Ensure, where dissimilar metals are used for system, that purpose made jointing materials (bimetallic clamps to BSEN 50164) is used such that corrosion and deterioration of the electrical
connection are not caused. Ensure bonding connections to other metal parts of building are
Page 7 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

electrolytic ally compatible with those metal parts. Use the guidance
when bonding dissimilar materials.
2.30
given in BS 7430 Table 8
TAPE JOINTS
A. Provide waterproof protection at joints subject to moisture by using Denso Tape. Joint copper tapes
by brazing, using zinc-free brazing metal with melting point at least 600C or exo-thermic welding
(If PVC coated, then 160 C, if hard drawn copper, then 250 C).
2.31
STRANDED CONDUCTOR JOINTS
A. Provide waterproof protection at joints subject to moisture. Joint copper stranded conductors with
compression joints to BS 3288 Part I.
2.32
A. For bolted connections use crimp type lugs compressed by automatic tool to achieve correct
pressure and crimp depth.
B. Make connections between tape and equipment using high tensile grade brass bolts with brass
nuts, washers and locking devices. Use phosphor bronze bolts nuts and washer where connections are liable to corrosion.
2.33
EARTH ELECTRODES
A. Location
B. Located electrodes in undisturbed ground not less than 2m distant from building/structure protected, and away from telecommunication and pilot cables and metallic fences. Ensure that the horizontal length of the conductor doesnt exceed 20 meters before it is terminated to earth.
C. Driving
D. Drive rods vertically into ground with purpose designed electric hammer. (Where impenetrable strata encountered at shallow depth, drive at 300 to horizontal).
E. Depth of Rod
F.
4 minimum below finished ground surface.
Page 8 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

G. Depth of Electrode heads

H. Locate electrode heads just below ground level.
I.
Spacing
J.
Where electrodes are installed in a group ensures minimum distance between electrodes in twice
depth of rod. Where rods for clean earth are installed ensure distance from any system rods is
six times depth of clean rods.
K. Tape Depth
L.
Install interconnecting or electrode tape 750mm below finished ground level, rising vertically at
each electrode.
M. Connect grouped so electrodes to main earth conductor via bolted link in inspection pit as BS 7430
for test purposes
7. Backfilling
Backfill the immediate surrounds to the electrodes with low specific resistivity material (Bentonite for
retaining the moisture and Marconite to be used along with cement as a conductive aggregate).
Ensure backfill is well compacted and watered. Where soil backfill is insufficient to provide sufficiently low earth resistance then provide electrolyte backfills as required.
8. Electrode seals
Provide adequate seals where earth rods are to be installed through the base slab of a building.
Refer standard detail drawing for same.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALATION
A. Carry out the installation in accordance with BS 7671 and BS 7430.

B. Make joints in earthing conductors by any of the following methods:
1) Tin jointed area of conductor, install minimum of four rivets, then sweat joint solid. Wrap
joint in Denso tape below ground
Page 9 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

2) Proprietary crimps, by purpose made automatic machine, ensuring that a crimp, once
started cannot be released until full pressure, and crimp depth has been achieved. Wrap
joint in Denso tape below ground
3) Proprietary fusion welding system. Installed strictly in accordance with manufacturers in
structions. Wrap joints in Denso tape below ground
C. Ensure that where holes are drilled in the copper tape for connection to items of plant the effective
cross-sectional area of the connection is not less than that required to comply with BS 7671. Tin the
connected surface area.
D. Use clamps to BS 951 for bonding of pipes.
E. Provide all earthing cables with suitable mechanical protection, labelled and clearly identified
throughout the installation on the cable tray, ladder, trunking and conduit distribution facilities.
F.
3.2
Undertake all earthing and bonding in an inconspicuous and approved manner wherever possible.
All cabling routes shall be agreed with the engineer prior to commencement of the installation.
TESTING AND COMMISIONING

A.
3.3
3.4
Comply with section 26 08 00 of this specification.
INSTALLERS SUBMISSIONS
A.
Submit the following for the engineer's comment:
B.
Submit operating and maintenance instructions for all items of equipment including:
HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION
A. Fully record all tests, and submit all test results in writing to the engineer. The results to be
included as part of the operating and maintenance manuals.
B. Complete the respective distribution board schedules with measured test values for each
site location.
C. Provide specific information as follows:
1)
2)
3)
All ground resistance measurements for each earth electrode.

Ground resistance recording of test earth electrode position and identification of location
of test electrode.
fault levels at all main, sub-main and distribution boards
Page 10 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

4)
final earth loop impedance values at equipment locations for all sub main and final circuits
5)
test information and records at installation completion. These are required for future use
by the Client's electrical maintenance engineers in meeting their obligations on maintenance and periodic testing as required by BS 7671.
Page 11 of 11

Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260533 - CONTAINMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Steel cable trunking.

Steel conduit.
PVC trunking.
PVC dado trunking.
PVC conduit.
Flexible metal conduit.
Underground cable conduits.
Floor Boxes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
1.4
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
Page 1 of 13
Containment for Electrical Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
STEEL CABLE TRUNKING

CONSTRUCTION
1.
Return edge type with quick release turnbuckle lid fasteners at spacing not exceeding 1000mm.
2.
Minimum gauge:
Up to and including 100 x 100mm or equivalent cross sectional area - 1.2mm. Above 100 x
100mm or equivalent cross sectional area - 1.4mm.
SUPPORTS
1.
C.
Metal brackets at intervals of 1200mm or less as manufacturer's recommendation and at

150mm from bends, intersections and termination points.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install only gusset type intersections with bends and tee pieces of the radius type as supplied by
the trunking manufacturer.
2.
Where special accessories require to be manufactured submit drawings showing the proposals
to the Engineer for comments.
3.
Fix trunking using suitable round or cheesehead screws. Do not use self-tapping screws.
4.
Install trunking in vertical and horizontal runs parallel with the features of the building with the
lid on the top side wherever possible.
5.
Ensure that all trunking is mechanically and electrically continuous.
6.
Provide for thermal movement on long runs of trunking.
7.
Dress all holes cut in trunking and, with the exception of conduit connections, fit with a
protective PVC beading.
8.
Install a fixed lid section at points where trunking passes through holes in the structure, and
where openings are to be sealed. The fixed lid section is to project 25mm from both faces of
the finished structure.
Page 2 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
B.
9.
Ensure that the completed trunking installation is clean and dry internally before installing cables
and that any damage to the finish has been properly cleaned and painted with one coat of anticorrosive primer and one coat of zinc based or aluminium paint.
10.
Fit pin racks at intervals of 1200mm in vertical runs exceeding 1800mm and not more than
300mm from a junction, and retaining straps at intervals of 1000mm in horizontal runs where
the lid is on the side or the underside.
11.
Fit 'Rock' wool or a suitable equivalent fire barrier within trunking where it passes through floors
or fire division walls.
12.
Fit 12.5mm x 1.5mm copper earth bonding straps externally between all lengths of trunking,
accessories and items of equipment to ensure electrical continuity. Use brass bolts, nuts and
serrated washers to fix straps.
13.
Provide a copper earth bonding strap across each joint, fixed with independent mushroom
headed electro-plated bolts, nuts and serrated washers.
14.
Bond all trunking systems to the main earthing system at the nearest point to the main earthing
terminal.
15.
Provide adequate size trunking as per the IEE Wiring Regulations and appropriate guidance
notes.
16.
Where cable trunkings are suspended from structure on trapeze type arrangements ensure the
underside is supported by proprietary U-channel support system only i.e. steel angles will not be
accepted.
STEEL CONDUIT
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Heavy grade, hot dip zinc galvanised or sherardized.
2.
Concealed or surface: Class 3.
3.
Exposed or wet situations: Class 4
SUPPORTS
1.
Surface exposed conduit: distance saddles at intervals of 1200mm with centres increased to
2000mm for 32mm conduit and at 150mm from all bends.
Page 3 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
D.
2.
Surface concealed conduit or conduit buried in plaster: band saddles at intervals of 1200mm
with centres increased to 2000mm for 32mm conduit.
3.
Conduit set into concrete: fix to reinforcing steel using plastic clips or wire ties at approved
intervals.
TERMINATIONS
1.
Unthreaded holes: heavy brass bush, serrated steel washer, coupling and round milled edge
heavy gauge locknut.
2.
Threaded holes: round milled edge heavy gauge locknut.
INSTALLATION
1.
Do not install conduits of less than 20mm diameter.
2.
Do not install solid or inspection.
3.
Obtain the Engineer's comments to proposed runs on fair faced brick or block work.
4.
Protect conduits stored on site against mechanical damage and weather.
5.
Run surface conduit in horizontal and vertical planes with machine formed bends to ensure a
constant distance between parallel conduits.
6.
Install conduits buried in plaster or concrete a minimum of 15mm apart.
7.
Ream all conduit ends and erect with no more threads than are necessary at connections and
terminations and ensure that threads are free from oil, grease and rust before making the
connections. Treat exposed threads immediately with two coats of zinc-based paint.
8.
Arrange routes to avoid traps or pockets. Where traps are unavoidable arrange a draining
hole.
9.
Ensure that conduits are mechanically and electrically continuous.
10.
Fit round, milled edge, heavy gauge locknuts on both sides of conduit couplings with slip
couplings and an external earth bonding conductor where conduits bridge expansion joints in
the structure.
11.
Provide a back entry outlet box at the interface between concealed and surface conduit work.
Page 4 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
B.
12.
Install outlet boxes at wiring accessories produced by the conduit system manufacturer and
provide an earthing terminal at each outlet box.
13.
Ensure that at flush wiring points the front face of the outlet box is level with the surrounding
finished surface and that where ever necessary, manufacturer's extension pieces are provided
to achieve this condition.
14.
Ensure that conduits are clean and dry by swabbing out internally before the installation of
wiring.
15.
Plug excess holes in junction and outlet boxes with brass stopping plugs and protect the
installation against the ingress of moisture, plaster and the like.
16.
Ensure that boxes and accessories installed in exposed or wet situations are made watertight.
17.
Ensure that any damage to the finish is properly cleaned and painted with one coat of anticorrosive primer and one coat of zinc based or aluminium paint.
18.
Ensure that flush conduit installations are plumb vertical.
19.
Do not install flush horizontal conduit runs.
20.
Ensure that conduit routes run parallel with building lines.
21.
Conduits to outlet points will be routed from high level containment systems unless otherwise
indicated.
22.
Install cable in conduits to maximum numbers as listed in the IEE Wiring Regulations.
PVC TRUNKING
CONSTRUCTION
1.
PVC extrusion with return edges to receive a 'Snap-on' lid, providing a smooth profile without
projections.
2.
Heavy gauge, high impact, rigid, self-extinguishing grey PVC, with full range of accessories.
SUPPORTS
1.
Metal c-channel supports fixed at intervals of 1200mm or less as manufacturer's
Page 5 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

recommendation and at 150mm from bends, intersections and termination points.

C.
2.4
A.
INSTALLATION
1.
Fix trunking using suitable round or cheesehead screws.
2.
Do not install site formed accessories without the written authority of the Engineer.
3.
Where special accessories are required to be manufactured, submit drawings showing the
proposals to the Engineer for comments.
4.
Do not use self tapping screws.
5.
Install only gusset type intersections as supplied by the manufacturer, with bends and tee-pieces
of the radius type only.
6.
Ensure that all cable trunking is mechanically continuous.
7.
Dress all holes cut in trunking.
8.
Install a fixed lid section at points where cable trunking passes through holes in the structure,
and where openings are to be sealed. The fixed lid section is to project 25mm from both faces
of the finished structure.
9.
Ensure that cable trunking is clean and dry internally before installing cables.
10.
Fit pin racks at intervals of 1200mm in vertical runs exceeding 1800mm and not more than
300mm from a junction, and retaining straps at intervals of 1000mm in horizontal runs where
the lid is on the side or the underside.
11.
Fit 'Rock' wool or a suitable equivalent fire barrier within trunking where it passes through floors
or fire division walls.
12.
Store PVC cable trunking for at least two days prior to installation in a temperature similar to the
ambient in which it is to be installed.
PVC DADO TRUNKING

TYPE
1.
Single and multi-compartment heavy gauge, high impact, rigid, self-extinguishing white PVC to
BS 4678 as applicable, with full range of accessories providing a smooth profile without
projections and ensuring no deflection of lid when wiring accessories are in use.
Page 6 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
2.5
A.
2.
The profile shall include a chamfered top lid section.
3.
Metal screen inserts will be employed for screening between two equal compartments.
4.
The dado trunking system will have dimensions as indicated.
INSTALLATION
1.
Do not install site formed accessories. All bends 45deg, 90deg etc will be complete with system
manufacturer-made molded covers.Where special accessories are required to be manufactured,
submit drawings showing the proposals to the Engineer for comments.
2.
Do not use self tapping screws.
3.
Ensure that all cable trunking is mechanically continuous.
4.
Dress all holes cut in trunking.
5.
Ensure that cable trunking is clean and dry internally before installing cables.
6.
Store PVC cable trunking for at least two days prior to installation in a temperature similar to the
ambient in which it is to be installed.
7.
Arrange flush conduit connections to enter rear of trunking by means of a suitable recessed box.
8.
Power and data conduits will serve to each trunking length from the ceiling space.
PVC CONDUIT
APPLICATION
1.
B.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
C.
For use where buried in building fabric or in concealed installation within ceiling voids or wall
cavities.
Heavy gauge, high impact self-extinguishing rigid PVC conduit.
INSTALLATION
1.
Do not install conduits of less than 20mm diameter.
2.
Do not install solid or inspection.
Page 7 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
Do not install PVC conduits other than cast within concrete / blockwork walls.
4.
Protect conduits stored on site against mechanical damage and weather.
5.
Install conduits buried in plaster or concrete a minimum of 15mm apart.
6.
Ream all conduit ends and erect with no more threads than are necessary at connections and
terminations and ensure that threads are free from oil, grease and rust before making the
connections. Treat exposed threads immediately with two coats of zinc-based paint.
7.
Arrange routes to avoid traps or pockets. Where traps are unavoidable arrange a draining
hole.
8.
Ensure that conduits are mechanically and electrically continuous.
9.
Fit round, milled edge, heavy gauge locknuts on both sides of conduit couplings with slip
couplings and an external earth bonding conductor where conduits bridge expansion joints in
the structure.
10.
Provide a back entry outlet box at the interface between concealed and surface conduit work.
11.
Install outlet boxes at wiring accessories produced by the conduit system manufacturer and
provide an earthing terminal at each outlet box.
12.
Ensure that at flush wiring points the front face of the outlet box is level with the surrounding
finished surface and that where ever necessary, manufacturer's extension pieces are provided
to achieve this condition.
13.
Ensure that conduits are clean and dry by swabbing out internally before the installation of
wiring.
14.
Plug excess holes in junction and outlet boxes with brass stopping plugs and protect the
installation against the ingress of moisture, plaster and the like.
15.
Ensure that boxes and accessories installed in exposed or wet situations are made watertight.
16.
Ensure that any damage to the finish is properly cleaned and painted with one coat of anticorrosive primer and one coat of zinc based or aluminium paint.
17.
Ensure that flush conduit installations are plumb vertical.
18.
Do not install flush horizontal conduit runs.
19.
Ensure that conduit routes run parallel with building lines.
Page 8 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

20.
D.
TERMINATIONS
1.
E.
A.
B.
Steel boxes with suitable spouts for PVC conduit connections.
JOINTING CEMENT
1.
2.6
Male plastic threaded bush inside box with threaded-to-slip coupling outside.
OUTLET BOXES FOR SUPPORTING LUMINAIRES

1.
F.
Conduits to outlet points will be routed from high level containment systems unless otherwise
indicated.
Waterproof, non setting cement as Egaweld No. 2 or similar.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Black PVC sheathed flexible metallic conduit with metric threaded connectors, similar to
Unitubes 'Kopex' range.
2.
General Use: Leaded steel construction single layer, pliable type with black PVC sheath and
standard connector.
3.
Heavy Duty: String packed metal interlock flexible type with black PVC oil resistant sheath and
heavy duty weatherproof connector.
INSTALLATION
1.
Do not install flexible conduit in lengths exceeding 500mm without the written authority of the
Engineer.
2.
Install heavy duty conduit for motor connections, external applications and locations subjected
to vibration, risk of mechanical damage or exposure to moisture.
Page 9 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.7
A.
B.
3.
Install a suitably rated earth continuity conductor in all flexible conduits for power circuits and
terminate at fixed earth connections in the outlet and conduit boxes at each end of the conduit.
4.
Fit conduit adaptors at unthreaded holes with a male brass bush, serrated steel washers,
coupling and round milled edge heavy gauge locknut.
5.
Fit conduit adaptors at threaded holes with a round milled edge heavy gauge locknut.
UNDERGROUND CABLE CONDUITS

CONSTRUCTION
1.
Class E PVC
2.
Straight lengths and bends with internal diameters from 100mm to 225mm as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
3.
Grooved for splitting on site with snap-on plastic collar.
4.
Range of bellmouths.
5.
Range of solid and split hardwood plugs.
6.
Bends with range of pitches from 11.25 to 45 degrees, to allow a minimum bend radius of
600mm.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install conduit in trenches on a 100mm layer of sand at the depth and spacing appropriate to
the cable being enclosed.
2.
Install one conduit for each cable, complete with draw rope.
3.
Cover conduits under roadways with a 100mm layer of concrete, with conduit ends projecting
1000mm beyond the kerbs.
4.
Install bellmouths at all conduit terminations.
5.
Seal open ends with hardwood plugs immediately after conduit installation.
6.
Immediately after cable installation fit suitable split hardwood plugs with a final polysulphide
Page 10 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

sealant.
2.8
A.
B.
FLOOR BOXES
GENERAL
1.
Unit to be of steel construction with full corrosion protection.
2.
The compartments will be fully segregated top and bottom. Knockouts to each compartment will
suit the containment system to the box e.g. buried trunking system, flexible conduit etc.
3.
The unit will be suitable for mounting of the specified type of sockets.
4.
Data outlet plates will be suitable for mounting of the specified type.
OUTLETS TO BE PROVIDED
1.
C.
The outlets to be provided in the floor boxes shall be specific to the project and the numbering
reference on the floor box. The number of compartments the floor box consists of will be subject
to the functionality and the number of power sockets, data connectivity points and other outlets
which are required. Refer to the electrical symbol legend for a description of the project specific
floor box configurations.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
The units will be complete with a steel reinforced recess for up to 6mm carpet installation or for
other floor finish determined by floor box location. The contractor shall refer to the interior
designer and architectural drawings where applicable to determine the floor finishes.
2.
The housing will be finished in galvanized steel.
3.
The contractor shall source box depths which are suited to the interior finishes which will include
screed build up from the slab and surface cover.
4.
Floor boxes for raised floor installations will be provided to suit.
Page 11 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
D.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control
wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in
direction.
E.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
F.
Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.
G.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1.
2.
3.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure
raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
H.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound

prior to assembly.
J.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to

protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
K.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
Page 12 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

L.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts
hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
N.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
O.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less
than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
FIRESTOPPING
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
Page 13 of 13
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
A.
Applicable Standards
1.
IEC 61537
2.
BS EN 10130, 10131 and 10149.
3.
BSEN 1961
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.
Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1.
C.
Cable ladder cable trays.

Steel cable tray .
Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.
Page 1 of 9
Cable Trays For Electrical Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
1.4
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.
Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed

in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
cable trays.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS

Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended
location, application, and grounding.
1.
Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.
Page 2 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for
types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
C.
Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for the
following parameters:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
B.
CABLE LADDER
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Mild steel, hot-dip galvanised
2.
Minimum gauge - 2.0mm.
3.
Cross members at not more than 310mm centres with perforations to receive cable ties.
SYSTEM SUPPORTS
1.
C.
Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the

indicated support span when supported as a simple spa.
Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray.
Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.

INSTALLATION
1.
Use only proprietary accessories.
2.
Ensure that all ladder is mechanically and electrically continuous.
3.
Do not install site formed accessories without the written authority of the Engineer.
4.
Ensure that all ladder is installed in true vertical and horizontal alignment and parallel to
building lines.
Page 3 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
5.
Secure all joints with a minimum of two mushroom-headed electro-plated bolts on each side of
the joint.
6.
Dress cut sections and ensure that these and any damage to the finish are properly cleaned
and painted with one coat of anti-corrosive primer and one coat of zinc based or aluminium
paint.
7.
Provide a copper earth-bonding strap across each joint with independent bolt fixings,
preferably using a standard earth link provided by the manufacturer.
8.
Bond all ladder systems to the main earthing system at the nearest point to the main earth
point.
9.
Mount cable ladders clear of switchboards and similar equipment.
10.
Where cable ladders are suspended from structure on trapeze type arrangements ensure the
underside is supported by a proprietary U-channel support system only i.e. steel angles will not
be accepted.
STEEL CABLE TRAYS
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Perforated mild steel, return flange pattern, hot-dip galvanised, with full range of accessories.
2.
Minimum gauge thickness :
Tray-229mm : 1.5mm
Tray-305mm : 2.0mm
3.
Return flange height :
Trays-450mm wide - 19mm
Trays-450mm wide - 51mm.
Page 4 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
SUPPORTS
1.
C.

INSTALLATION
1.
Install tray with minimum clearance of 25mm from structure.
2.
Use only proprietary accessories with bends and tee-pieces of the radius type.
3.
Ensure that all tray is mechanically and electrically continuous.
4.
Do not install site formed accessories without the written authority of the Engineer
5.
Ensure that all tray is installed in true vertical and horizontal alignment and parallel to building
lines.
6.
Secure all joints with a minimum of two mushroom headed electro-plated bolts on each side of
the joint.
7.
Provide a copper earth bonding strap across each joint, fixed with independent mushroom
headed electro-plated bolts, nuts and serrated washers.
8.
Bond all tray systems to the main earthing system at the nearest point to the main earth point.
9.
Where two or more cables share a common route provide a tray system in addition to that
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
10.
Dress cut sections and ensure that these and any damage to the finish are properly cleaned
and painted with one coat of anti-corrosive primer and one coat of zinc based or aluminium
paint.
11.
Where cable trays are suspended from structure on trapeze type arrangements ensure the
underside is supported by a proprietary U-channel support system only i.e. steel angles will not
be accepted.
Page 5 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A.
Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems,
barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses,
cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.
B.
Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible
for inspection and adjustment.
C.
Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
D.
Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square-neck carriage bolts and locknuts.
E.
Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.
F.
Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances
shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying
capacity of the tray rungs.
G.
Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by
cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by
application.
H.
Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
I.
Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
J.
Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.
K.
Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment.
Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment
enclosure.
L.
Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended]. Space connectors and set gaps according to
applicable standard.
Page 6 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

M.
Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
N.
Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
O.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping."
P.
Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire
and smoke barriers.
Q.
Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
R.
Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data
processing; or of different insulation levels.
S.
Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.
T.
Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.
3.2
CABLE TRAY GROUNDING
A.
Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for
grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.
B.
Cable trays with single-conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding
conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch
intervals.
C.
When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely
remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing
splice-to-grounding-bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials
recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
3.3
A.
CABLE INSTALLATION
Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.
Page 7 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2.
Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable
ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
C.
Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches.
D.
Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to
equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables
independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and
enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.
E.
Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72
inches elsewhere.
F.
In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
CONNECTIONS
Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the
connections are completed.

Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements.
Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may
cause or have caused damage.
Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that
permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are
separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.
Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the
cable tray.
Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
Page 8 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
3.6
A.
Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in
suspect areas.
Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all
takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity.
Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PROTECTION
Protect installed cable trays and cables.
1.
2.
3.
Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against
falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable
tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk
of damage is over.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable
tray manufacturer.
Page 9 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
The overall objective is to achieve the most energy efficient lighting, with the lowest cost of
ownership, without compromising user comfort or convenience.
C.
Flexibility through software configuration and programming shall enhance lighting design
freedom to maximise the aesthetic potential whilst facilitating energy saving measures.
D.
The lighting control shall provide effective energy management and reporting of lighting load
status throughout the installation. It shall provide convenient and intuitive manual control,
supported by appropriate automatic operation to minimise energy consumption.
E.
The lighting control system shall be modular and scaleable. It shall utilise digital network
technology based on the standard open DALI protocol for local field networks and Ethernet
TCP/IP for the backbone infrastructure.
F.
The lighting system shall allow control of DALI emergency fittings by facilitating automation of
Emergency Function and Duration Testing and generation of test reports.
G.
To ensure simplicity and reliability, it is a requirement that the system network controllers / routers
handle network connections directly. Systems that utilise additional converters or similar
intermediary devices are not acceptable.
H.
System intelligence shall be distributed and reside within the lighting ballasts, LED drivers, load
controllers, input devices, gateways and network routers.
I.
The system shall be capable of processing command instructions from switches, sensors and other
devices with sufficient speed that the user of the system sees the resulting action as a direct
response to a switch being operated, or sensor triggered. The installation shall be capable of
forming a building wide lighting control system. Integration to BMS/BAS shall be via the Ethernet
TCP/IP backbone infrastructure.
Page 1 of 19
Lighting Control Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

J.
1.2
A.
Changes to the system shall be made by an Operator Workstation consisting of either a desktop
PC or commissioning (temporarily connected) laptop computer. However, the PC shall not be an
active control component within the system. After commissioning, the control system routers and
devices shall retain all configuration and programming information required for the system to
operate automatically without the PC being present.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
General Overview
Quality Assurance
Lighting Control Modules
OVERVIEW
A.
The system shall be formed of local networks connected to routers. The routers themselves shall
inter-connect and communicate via a backbone Ethernet network using TCP/IP.
B.
It is a requirement that the lighting control system is capable of being installed as a completely
separate system to other building services. However, the IP addressing of the devices shall allow
sufficient range and flexibility for the system to utilise the owners building data network and
structured cabling system if required.
C.
DALI networks shall utilise a suitable two-core data cable (which should be screened in electrically
noisy environments). The installing contractor shall ensure that any network cable used within
modular wiring or power-track type wiring systems is suitable for DALI use. To this end the
contractor shall ensure that the cable type and wiring method is approved by the controls
specialist.
D.
The Ethernet backbone cabling shall be of not lower specification than CAT 5e data cable
terminated with RJ45 type connectors.
E.
The system shall be designed in such a way that typically each floor of the building is provided
with one or more local networks. These local networks shall then be connected together via the
router devices to allow the passing of messages between different areas within the building, and
also for communication to and from the Operator Workstation.
Page 2 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
For reasons of data integrity, speed and reliability, mains borne signalling or R.F. networking
methods are not considered an acceptable substitute for the hard wired data cable which forms
the backbone of the system. However, wireless devices may be connected to the system to allow
additional functions and flexibility. For example the use of a wireless networked laptop computer
for commissioning.
G.
All DALI devices connected to the system shall be fully compliant with the DALI Standards. Any
enhancements, devices, commands, or functionality provided by the controls specialist, in
addition to those covered by the DALI Standard, shall not cause any detrimental effect to the
standard DALI devices or the local DALI communication network.
H.
All DALI networks and devices shall utilise full DALI addressing, reporting and feedback. The use
of non-addressed DALI broadcast messages will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of
this specification.
I.
The local DALI networks shall accommodate all luminaires including those with emergency fittings
and control input devices. Sensors, manual control panels and other local control devices shall
connect directly to the local DALI network. Systems requiring a separate data bus for control
devices are not acceptable.
J.
Generally, all local control devices and interface modules shall derive their power from the DALI
network and require no other external power source. Where conventional switches or specialist
sensors have been specified in areas controlled by the system, these may be connected to the
DALI networks by suitable DALI input interfaces.
K.
Devices requiring external power supplies and/or controllers may only be utilised in exceptional
circumstances. For example devices with high power consumption, such as long range microwave
sensors.
L.
The control system design shall be such that the DALI networks remain within the constraints
imposed by the DALI Standard. To allow for future expansion or modification of the system, local
DALI networks shall be designed in such a way that a minimum of 30% spare capacity is allowed
with respect to both the DALI power supply maximum load, and the number of connected DALI
nodes.
M.
Control shall be via the logical grouping of devices. Load interfaces that are to be controlled
simultaneously shall be identified collectively as a group. There shall be no limit to the number
of load interfaces that can be included within a group. To allow freedom in respect of installation
and configuration, there shall be no restrictions on how loads are functionally grouped for control
with respect to their physical location or connection to the system.
Page 3 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

N.
1.4
A.
A control input shall manipulate a group. Points of control shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
daylight harvesting devices
2.
occupancy sensors
3.
timer controlled scheduled events (with or without astronomic correction based on the local
longitude and latitude)
4.
manual control panels
5.
wireless input devices
6.
switch inputs
7.
voltage or current inputs
8.
RS232 serial interface
9.
TCP and UDP control commands via Ethernet
10.
BMS / BAS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Proven Competence
1.
B.
The controls manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years proven record in the design,
manufacture and world-wide support of professional lighting control equipment
Processes
1.
The manufacturer shall have a recognised quality system for the design, engineering and
manufacturing
processes
registered
to
ISO
9001:2008.
The manufacturer shall have a recognised environmental management system for the
design, engineering and manufacturing processes registered to ISO 14001:2004.
2.
The manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate commitment to the Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment regulations 2006 (WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC).
Page 4 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
D.
Certification
1.
All equipment shall carry CE and shall fully comply with the Restriction of Hazardous
Substances regulations (RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC), proof of compliance shall be
available from the manufacturer upon request.
2.
Equipment safety shall be by the application of EN 60950-1:2006. Alternative safety

standards shall only be accepted where the manufacturer can demonstrate equivalence.
3.
Insulation electrical safety testing shall be at not less than 4 kV RMS.
4.
All equipment shall be specified for operation to Pollution Degree 2. The working ambient
temperature range shall be 0 to 40 degC and to 90%, non-condensing, relative humidity.
5.
Mains powered load interface units shall be rated for installation category (over voltage
category) II.
6.
Electromagnetic compatibility shall be demonstrated by the application of EN 61000-63:2007 emission standard and EN 61547:2009 immunity standard. Alternative standards
shall only be accepted where the manufacturer can demonstrate equivalence.
7.
Electrostatic discharge immunity shall be tested by the application of IEC 6000-4-2:2009.

Surge immunity simulating the effects of lightning strikes shall be tested by IEC 6000-45:2006.
Warranty
1.
All equipment shall carry a minimum of five years warranty under normal use and service
to be free from defects in materials and manufacture. The warranty shall include
programming and commissioning carried out by the manufacturer.
2.
During the warranty period the manufacturer shall bear the costs of replacement or repair
necessitated by equipment failure the cause of which being attributable to the
manufacturer.
3.
The warranty period shall commence from when the equipment is first energized after
installation.
4.
The manufacturer shall offer repair or make available new, refurbished units or
replacement alternatives to ensure maintenance of functional operation of the installed
equipment for a period of six years from the commencement of warranty.
Page 5 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.5
A.
B.
C.
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES (for On-Off switching & Dimming control)

Software
1.
The system shall be provided with a comprehensive software package for the Operator
Workstation that is used for the initial commissioning and setting to work of the installed
devices.
2.
It shall be possible to monitor the current state of the lighting and manually select preset
levels or dim the lighting in any area of the building from the Operator Workstation or
Browser.
3.
The system shall provide full reporting of information from DALI ballasts and devices and
generate alarms for failure conditions.
Groups
1.
A group identifies co-operative devices, typically made up of a number of dimmer/load

interfaces (lighting channels) and controlling user interfaces. Each group shall have a
unique system number. A group is global, in that it can include any of the system devices
regardless of their physical point of connection. All control actions and interactions shall be
on the basis of group associations.
2.
Any number of load interface devices shall be able to exist in any one or more of the
groups. A controlling user interface shall belong to a single group only. There shall be no
limit to the number of Routers that have devices defined within the same group.
Scenes
1.
A scene is a description of the combined effect of the lighting levels made up of one or
more controlled lighting channels operated collectively within a group. Variations between
the channel levels can be used to set the mood, optimise the aesthetic effect or simply set
practical lighting for the area. Recall of a scene is thereby a group command and as such
allows any number of load interface devices to be included.
2.
As requirements change, during the course of a day for example, different variations,
scenes, may be required. Typically an area will have four active scenes in addition to an
off scene.
3.
Scene levels shall be associated with each dimmer/load interface whereby up to 128 may
be defined for each load by programming. Thereby within each group up to 128 scenes
may be recalled.
Page 6 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
4.
The scene levels of each dimmer/load interface remain absolute regardless of the
controlling group recall.
5.
To expedite programming, scenes shall be associated in blocks of 16, the first of which
shall have default values pre-set. Programme assignment of a control device to a group
shall automatically allocate to it this first block of scenes. However all such assignments
shall remain changeable by programming.
6.
Scene fade time shall be associated with the source of the scene recall. Systems with a
fixed fade time per scene shall not be accepted.
7.
The range of the programmable fade-time shall be not less than 36 hours with a resolution
not exceeding 1 second. A fade time is absolute and is the time taken for the lighting to
change from current levels to those of the recalled scene regardless of the differences in
start and end levels.
8.
All scene levels and fade times shall be stored by the system for use by a control device.
Router
1.
A Router shall be fully autonomous. Routers shall link via an Ethernet 10/100 network and
use TCP/IP protocol. Each Router shall have its own IP address that shall be fully
programmable and allow co-existence on public or private networks. System data
exchange, programming, system interrogation, and remote access control shall be via the
Ethernet network connection.
2.
Commercial Lighting - A Router shall support full specification DALI networks, each offering
independent control of up to 64 DALI devices. Load and user interfaces shall co-exist as
required, or as physically convenient, on the same DALI network. There shall be no
restrictions requiring the grouping of loads with specific controls. It shall be possible to
group any mixture of loads and user interfaces, across any of the Routers in the system.
3.
Each device shall be automatically uniquely identified. In addition a device shall be able to
be named to make its identity and use clear to the user. Naming shall allow any mix or
number of alphanumeric characters without a restrictive limit.
4.
Each group shall be identified by a unique number given by the programmer as part of the
system configuration. There shall be no restrictions on the numbering to allow such as the
allocation of number blocks to specific areas for ease of programming association. In
addition a group shall be able to be named to make its identity and use clear to the user.
Naming shall allow any mix or number of alphanumeric characters without a restrictive
limit.
Page 7 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
5.
A Router shall store group data that shall be defined and/or changed as required by
programming. Any number of load interface devices shall be able to exist in any one or
more of the groups. A controlling user interface shall belong to a single group only. There
shall be no limit to the number of Routers that have devices defined within the same group.
6.
To facilitate system operational checks and expedite initial system set-up without the need
to programme individual levels, a number of default level settings shall be provided for
each load interface. These shall be held by the Router and shall include 100%, 75%, 50%,
25% and 0%.
7.
Each level setting for each load shall have a unique identity and in addition shall be able
to be named to make its identity and use clear to the user. The name shall be of
alphanumeric characters and without a restrictive limit to the number of characters.
8.
The level identity shall remain the same regardless of the origin of group recall.
Daylight Harvesting
1.
The system shall provide the means of exploiting available daylight to achieve energy
savings. The implementation shall use light measurement techniques to ensure the
maintenance of appropriate illuminance, and shall be additional to that offered by
dawn/dusk scheduling alone. Where different approaches may be best suited to the area
to be controlled, alternative methods may be offered; for example open loop or closed
loop controls. In all cases user comfort shall not be compromised and control methods
adopted shall give operational transparency to the occupants.
2.
Open area control by scene modification:
i.
Open, for example leisure or circulation areas, may use open loop control. A selected
artificial lighting scene shall be automatically and proportionately modified in response to
the changing daylight to maintain the desired combined illumination level of the controlled
area. The proportionality shall be programmable over the range of daylight to allow site
profiling to suit the structure of the area. A single sensor shall be able to be used with as
many areas as required each with an individual profile. The artificial level changes shall
be programmable to provide slow transitions that are aesthetically pleasing and not
distracting. The location of the daylight sensor(s) shall be as specified by the lighting
designer or as recommended by the controls manufacturer to ensure reliable and consistent
performance through the changing seasons of a year.
Page 8 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
i.
4.
i.
Open area control by scene triggering:

Artificial lighting scenes shall be automatically triggered in response to the changing
daylight to maintain the desired combined illumination level of the controlled area. The
trigger levels shall be programmable over the range of daylight to allow site profiling to
suit the structure of the area. A single sensor shall be able to be used with as many areas
as required each with an individual profile. The range of the programmable fade time shall
be sufficient to allow aesthetically pleasing changes but with a resolution not exceeding 1
second.
Defined local area control:
Office and work areas shall use closed loop control to ensure the maintenance of a
specified illuminance. A single sensor shall monitor the controlled area, for example a
desktop, and adjust the group artificial light level dynamically to compensate in real time
for the variations in daylight contribution and thereby maintain a constant illuminance. The
speed of tracking shall be programmable to allow subjective adjustment.
The system shall also offer adjacent area tracking whereby areas not monitored directly by
a sensor can be set to follow the controlled area either directly or as a percentage change.
This is to facilitate large office control where daylight harvesting is most effective near the
windows, but where light levels away from the windows may require a proportional
change.
ii.
F.
Multiple sensors placed within the same group shall offer light measurement averaging.
There shall be no limit to the number of sensors that can be in the same group. The location
of multiple sensors shall be as specified by the lighting designer or as recommended by the
controls manufacturer to ensure reliable and consistent performance.
Occupancy Control
1.
Energy saving shall be provided by the use of intelligent and programmable occupancy
control. Presence, absence or a combined response shall be selectable for each controlled
area. Multiple sensors placed within the same group shall allow co-operative control for
large areas.
2.
Presence detection:
i.
One or more suitable occupancy sensors connected to the

automatic illumination of a controlled area. To facilitate initial
shall offer automatically assigned levels; however there shall
programmable choice of levels thereafter. Dimmable loads shall
Page 9 of 19
system shall initiate the

configuration the system
be no limitation on the
have a default fade time
Project:

Works:
Title:

of two seconds but shall be programmable from instantaneous to 24 hours with a

resolution of one second.
3.
i.
By default the absence response shall apply whenever the controlled area is using artificial
illumination, however by programming it shall be possible to programme the response to
apply only to specific lighting settings. The time of absence prior to the response shall be
fully programmable to 24 hours with a resolution of one second. Re-occupancy within this
time-out period will reset the response as if occupancy had been continuous.
ii.
For user comfort, the response shall be in two stages with the selection of an intermediate
stage prior to assuming the unoccupied settings. The time the intermediate stage is
maintained shall be programmable from 90 seconds up to 24 hours with a resolution of
one second. The transition time to the intermediate and unoccupied settings shall be
independently programmable to 24 hours with a resolution of one second. The default
times for both shall be two seconds. The intermediate and unoccupied settings shall be fully
programmable. The default levels for both shall be 0%.
4.
i.
5.
i.
G.
Absence
detection:
One or more suitable occupancy sensors connected to the system shall initiate the
automatic reduction in illumination of a controlled area after a time of non-occupancy
(absence).
Corridor hold:
Additional areas shall be able to be conditionally appended to a controlled area such that
access routes, stairwells and similar illumination can be maintained as needed whilst the
controlled area is in use.
Exit delay:
When unoccupied settings are selected for a presence controlled area other than through
the sensor input, for example when a manual control panel is used, an exit delay shall be
provided to allow evacuation of the area. During the exit delay presence sensor inputs
shall be ineffective, to avoid unwanted re-selection of occupied settings. The time of the exit
delay shall be programmable from 90 seconds up to 24 hours with a resolution of one
second.
Scheduler
1.
The system shall offer a scheduler whereby lighting settings can be automatically recalled
relative to time, day and date. The scheduler shall include an astronomic function that
can accept local latitude and longitude information and thence derive dawn and dusk
times. The full data of the scheduler shall be held in each Router.
Page 10 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
2.
Synchronisation to a system master clock-calendar shall be optional and selectable

between Routers and connected PC(s). In the event of a network disconnection a Router
shall continue the schedule autonomously. In the event of loss of power each clock shall
continue to run for not less than two days.
3.
Scheduler actions shall be to the clock calendar or relative to dusk and dawn, or any
mixture thereof. Time resolution shall be to one second. It shall be possible to offset dusk
and dawn times by up to 12 hours before or after their real times and such offsets shall
have a resolution of one minute.
4.
Until DALI emergency fittings are assigned a dedicated group schedule, the system shall
automatically generate a schedule for Emergency Function and Duration testing and
generate test reports to facilitate verification of correct operation prior to commissioning.
The schedule shall include appropriate test intervals and out of hours timing.
5.
There shall be no practical limit to the number of scheduled actions permitted.
Hardwired manual control panels

1.
Wall switch-plate style control panels shall provide direct user control. These shall be
simple in use, ergonomically styled and largely self-explanatory in function. All controls
shall include LED indicators to show current state. Multifunctional keys where the response
is historically dependent upon previous operation shall be avoided.
2.
Each physical panel shall have a single DALI address such that multiple functions are subdevices of the single address.
3.
Push button key panels shall provide manual recall or modification of programmed lighting
group settings. Each button shall be independent and fully configurable by programming to
control any required group. There shall be no inherent limitations as to the use of each
button. The number of buttons on a single panel shall be suitably limited to maintain
simplicity of use.
4.
Slider panels shall offer direct level control of a group lighting settings. The physical
position of the slider shall relate directly to the control level. A programmable option shall
allow fade to off or fade to the load minimum level when the slider is moved to its
lowest setting. Multiple sliders controlling the same load interface(s) shall operate on the
last takes precedence principal.
5.
Rotary controls shall offer proportional control of a group lighting settings. The control shall
be continuous, that is no end stop, and give relative change to the current settings.
Clockwise rotation shall correspond to raise and anti-clockwise rotation to lower. The
rate of modification shall be programmable for both slow and fast physical rotation.
Where multiple rotary controls are used for the same load interface(s) then each shall give
Page 11 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

smooth relative change of the settings from the point of use with no step transitions through
the change of control
6.
I.
J.
The control shall include an integral push switch, the function of which shall be
programmable. Options shall include a toggle action between an on level and "off. An
LED shall indicate the switch status.
IR Receiver
1.
All hard wired manual control panels shall include an IR (infra-red) receiver to allow the
use of a cordless controller. The nominal working range, when used in conjunction with the
manufacturers specified transmitter, shall be four metres.
2.
A minimum of seven programmable functions shall be provided. The IR functions shall be

independent of, and not limited to, the functions of the control panel.
3.
To permit the independent operation of multiple panels within close proximity, a

programmable option shall be the choice of IR reception block. At least 10 alternative IR
blocks shall be offered.
Conditional response
1.
It shall be possible to create conditions for a control response. A condition shall be either
true or false and thereby provide a means of logical control. The response to which the
conditions are applied shall only occur if all the applied conditions are met, that is
logically true.
2.
A condition shall be allowed from any control input. Conditions shall thereby be able to be
created by, but not be limited to, the action of a manual control panel, occupancy control,
daylight harvesting, switch and voltage inputs, and scheduled events with astronomic
correction based on the local longitude and latitude. Thereby any control input shall be
able to apply a conditional response to any other input.
3.
A conditional action shall include the ability to inhibit or permit a selected control
response. (A typical application being to inhibit manual control panels out of office hours.)
4.
A conditional action shall include the ability to execute an alternative control response to
that of the selected source. (A typical application is the change of function of input devices
when room partitions are moved.)
5.
Any mixture or quantity of conditions shall be allowed to be combined by logical and

and or statements.
Page 12 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

6.
K.
L.
Nesting of conditions shall be permitted to any depth. To simplify programming a complex

set of conditions shall be able to be defined as a single condition and thereafter used as
such.
BMS / BAS
1.
The system shall offer BMS / BAS connectivity to the lighting system by use of IP or via a
gateway, providing connection to common network protocols such as LonWorks, BACnet,
and Modbus, along with many proprietary network protocols.
2.
The client application shall be provided by the host BMS / BAS, or any third party
equipment needing to interact with the lighting control system. The ease of interaction and
presentation of data shall be entirely dependent upon the client.
3.
BMS / BAS connectivity shall provide the recall and modification of group or load
interface lighting levels, system status and device status where available.
4.
Remote connection shall be entirely under the control of the user but typically it would be
assumed to be a standard Ethernet network connection which could be the same physical
layer as that of the lighting control system.
Control over Ethernet

1.
The system shall allow an external client to open a TCP connection to any Router. The use
of UDP shall also be permitted. Data management shall be by the lighting control system
such that all data exchange shall be via the targeted Router regardless of its physical
system connection. General protocol and target port numbers for incoming messages shall
be provided by the controls specialist.
2.
System queries shall include device type and parameters, and time and date.
3.
Control shall include the recall and modification of programmed group light level settings
and in addition shall allow the storing of group lighting levels and setting of time and date.
4.
Control shall allow initiation and termination of Emergency Function and Duration testing at
both device and group levels.
5.
The system shall be able to originate user defined Ethernet messages. Entry shall be
optionally in ASCII, hexadecimal or decimal with a specified target IP, port number and
whether TCP or UDP is to be used. Triggering of the message shall be programmable from
any system control source.
Page 13 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

M.
N.
Power interruptions
1.
The actions carried out at power up shall be programmable, and shall include the state of
conditional responses, linking and scheduled events.
2.
The recovery from a power interruption shall be deterministic. It shall either continue as if
no interruption had occurred, that is restore settings as they were prior to the interruption
including the correct state of scheduled events, or power up in a programmable defined
way.
Fault resilience
1.
The system shall be fault resilient whereby a device or cable failure shall not compromise
the remaining system elements. Failure of a DALI sub-net shall in no way inhibit operation
of remaining sub-nets baring the loss of interaction. Loss of integrity of the backbone
Ethernet shall not inhibit autonomous operation of the remaining segments.
2.
In the event of a device failure the system shall provide automatic configuration and
programming of a replacement part such that service repair is by failed device substitution
only. There shall be no mandatory requirement of holding pre-configured/programmed
devices or the need of expert user knowledge of the Operator Workstation for routine
maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOFTWARE PLATFORM
A.
The controls specialist software package shall run under Microsoft Windows 7TM, Microsoft
Windows XPTM and Microsoft VistaTM.
B.
The package shall include defined operating modes that shall include:
C.
1.
- Monitoring of the system and its components
2.
- Live interaction with system elements
3.
- Live programme editing
4.
- Offline programme editing
Programmable password access shall allow operator security levels to inhibit accidental system
changes.
Page 14 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.2
ROUTER
A.
The Router shall be in the form of a modular plastic enclosure for EN 50022 M36 DIN rail
mounting, of not more than nine module widths.
B.
Status indicators shall be visible with the Router mounted showing operation of the
communications ports, facilitating installation and system checking.
C.
Commercial Lighting - The Router shall be self-contained, requiring only a protected mains supply
for operation, and shall accept any AC supply in the ranges 90 - 250 Volts and 45 - 65 Hz
without adjustment. The requirement for additional external power supplies is not acceptable.
D.
DALI ports:
E.
DALI ports of double insulation rating shall be provided, each with integral 250mA DALI supply.
F.
DALI ports shall be independent, each allowing the individual control of up to 64 DALI devices.
G.
Network connection:
H.
Ethernet network connection shall be via an RJ45 connector for 10/100 Mbit operation over
Cat5e cabling. This Medium Dependent Interface port shall provide automatic crossover (auto
MDI/MDI-X) to allow the use of common cable termination practice and thereby shall avoid the
need of selective crossover cabling.
I.
Memory:
The data for all connected devices and all associated system data shall be held in non-volatile
memory, and shall be retained for not less than 10 years in the event of loss of power.
2.3
Sensors
A.
Integrated Sensor:
B.
An integrated ceiling-mounting unit shall provide luminance measurement, occupancy sensing

and IR remote control reception. The three sensor elements shall be separate to ensure no
interaction and to give defined performance. The unit shall be of a low profile, suitable for flush
mounting into a standard ceiling tile using a nominal 55 mm diameter hole.
Page 15 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
PIR Sensors:
1.
D.
Microwave sensors:
1.
E.
Occupancy detectors using PIR technology. A range of sensors shall be available to suit
various applications such as small office, large office and high bay. Detectors shall have
options for ceiling and surface mounting. Sensitivity shall be programmable from the
specialist software package.
Occupancy detectors using microwave technology. A range of sensors shall be available

to suit various applications such as open plan, corridor and warehousing. Detectors shall
have options for ceiling and surface mounting. Sensitivity shall be programmable from the
specialist software package.
External Daylight Sensor:

1.
Photodiode sensor with linear scaling for daylight measurement up to 150,000 LUX. IP 55
rated housing and UV resistant.
F.
The DALI connection shall use two-part screw terminal connectors to allow disconnection of the
sensor module whilst maintaining the DALI wiring integrity.
G.
The sensor shall be powered from the DALI network. Other than the DALI power constraints and
the limits imposed by DALI addressing there shall be no limit to the number of sensors supported
by the system.
2.4
Specialist occupancy sensor interface
A.
Where a specialist sensor is appropriate the controls specialist shall offer an interface that shall
allow connection of the sensor to the DALI network. The choice of sensor shall be in collaboration
with the controls specialist to ensure compatibility to the system. Where practicable the interface
shall allow powering of the sensor from the DALI.
B.
Functionality shall be the same as that of the integrated occupancy sensor.
C.
The interface shall be of small size capable of being fitted internal to the sensor with nominal
dimensions of 20x50 mm by 10 mm thick plus captive connection leads.
Page 16 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.5
Hardwired Manual Control Panels
A.
Controls shall connect to one of the DALI networks of a Router. Communication and the provision
of operating power shall be via the DALI network. Maximum current drawn by an individual
control shall not exceed 10 mA.
B.
Controls shall be mountable within a BS 5733:1995 back-box of 47 mm depth. Construction

shall be modular such that a control panel is made up of one or more control modules. Modules
shall clip into single gang or double gang module mounting frames for attachment to the backbox.
A single gang frame shall accept a single control module and fit into a single gang back-box. A
double gang frame shall accept up to three control modules and fit into a double gang back-box.
Any mixture of control modules shall be permitted. A matching blanking module shall be used
when less than three modules are required in a double gang back-box.
C.
The DALI connection shall use two-part screw terminal connectors to allow disconnection of the
scene control panel whilst maintaining the DALI wiring integrity. The connector shall be 6-way
internally linked as three pairs to facilitate link-through wiring of the DALI pair and optional screen
without the need for terminal sharing of the wiring.
D.
Integral IR receiver lens shall be discrete and of a significantly smaller proportion to manual
controls. The lens shall give wide-angle coverage with a high sensitivity cone of nominal 60
degrees.
E.
Control panel fascia options shall include, but not be limited to, white plastic, polished brass and
brushed stainless steel and shall use secret fixing (no visible screws or fastenings). In addition
the manufacturer shall offer custom panel solutions to allow continuity of style and finish where
standard panel options are unsuitable.
F.
Push-button modules:
1.
G.
Buttons shall give mechanical movement with tactile feedback of operation. Button style,
size and spacing shall give easy operation without risk of multi-button operation. The
buttons shall be organised in columns of not more than 4 buttons and not more than two
columns to a single module. LED tell-back indication shall be integral to the button.
Module variants shall include:

1.
Two button, pre-configured as on and off.
2.
Two button, pre-configured as level raise and level lower.
3.
Five button, pre-configured as four levels and off.
Page 17 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.6
4.
Seven button, pre-configured as four levels, off, raise and lower.
5.
Eight button, pre-configured as seven levels and off.
Luminaires
A.
All luminaires shall be equipped with ballasts or drivers meeting the DALI specification in respect
of remote control.
B.
To obviate any compatibility issues and as far as is practicably possible, the same manufacturer
should produce the control system and luminaire ballast or driver. Otherwise the contractor shall
ensure that the control system and luminaires are compatible in consultation with the
manufacturers concerned.
C.
In the event that a luminaire is specified for which no DALI control-gear exists, control-gear
compliant to the EN 60929 1-10V analogue control standard shall be substituted. In accordance
with the specification of the lighting designer these should then be either circuit controlled or
individually controlled by the use of suitable DALI compatible load controllers from the control
specialists product range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SENSOR INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
B.
Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2
A.
CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structureborne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration
isolators.
Page 18 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.3
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction,
pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
B.
3.5
Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

DEMONSTRATION
A.
Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements

for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.13
"Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train, Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
Page 19 of 19
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
The short circuit settings within the specification must be followed unless otherwise stated on
drawings. The trip setting times/characteristics indicated are for guidance, however the
manufacturer must provide as closely as possible from his range. Alternative switchboard paint
colours will be considered.
C.
Switchboard shall be fully type tested including the 7 tests and additional seismic and internal arc
containment test. All the type tests shall be on one certificate. Provide full discrimination study
along with co-ordination calculations and curves by the original component manufacturer. Provide
full short-circuit calculations for the distribution system by the original component manufacturer.
Provide busbar sizing calculation for each board. Provide temperature rise calculation for each
board
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V
and less for use in ac systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
1.3
Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication
and metering requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
Page 1 of 25
Low Voltage Switchgear
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.4
STANDARDS
IEC 61439-1
Type tested assemblies for LV switchgear voltages not

exceeding 1000 V ac.
IEC 61439-3
Distribution boards
IEC 60947-2
ACBs, MCCBs
IEC 60947-2
IEC 60898, MCBs
IEC 60144
Direct acting meters
IEC 60831-1&2
Power factor correction capacitor
IEC 60664 & IEC 1010-1
Power factor regulator
IEC 60070 & IEC 60831
Capacitor switching contactors
IEC 60289 & IEC 60076
Detuned reactors
IEC 60947-4
Motor starters
IEC 60947-4
Contactors
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection of enclosures
IEC 364 & IEC 755
Earth leakage relays
IEC 60947-1 &60947-4
Overload relays
All switchgear and control gear assemblies shall fully comply with :
IEC 61439-1 and 2
Specification for type tested assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
All breakers should be rated for 50C ambient temperature at 400Volts. In the event of a derating
the manufacturer shall specify the current carrying capacity at required service temperature.
B.
All ACBs shall be draw out type and of 3 or 4 pole as indicated on the drawing. The draw out
operation shall be possible through a closed door, while the racking handle shall be stored on the
Page 2 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

ACB in such a manner as to be accessible without defeating the door interlocking. Bus-coupler
ACBs shall be of the 4 pole type.
C.
MOUNTING
1.
D.
E.
F.
Chassis mounted, drawer, within cubicle switchboard.
ULTIMATE SHORT CIRCUIT BREAKING CURRENT (Icu) :

1.
65kA rms @ 400V 3-phase
2.
(or as otherwise indicated on drawings)
3.
SERVICE SHORT CIRCUIT BREAKING CURRENT (Ics) :
4.
65kA rms @ 400V 3-phase. (100% Icu) (or as otherwise indicated on drawings)
5.
RATED SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND TIME (Icw) : 65kA for 1 sec

indicated on drawings)
(or as otherwise
PROTECTION UNIT/RELEASE
1.
Adjustable setting of :
2.
Long Time
3.
Short Time
4.
Instantaneous
5.
Earth Fault
6.
For detection of Earth Fault a separate CT should be provided in the Neutral and the
feedback given to the Trip Unit.
7.
The trip Unit should have a TEST & QUERY switch for testing the Unit and also for finding
the last fault status.
8.
The trip Unit should have a retentive memory of the last fault at least 48hrs.
INDICATIONS
1.
Electronic Trip Unit Active
2.
Alarm, Release Fault,
Page 3 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
Indication for individual faults (L,S, I, N & G)
4.
Control Unit with digital LCD display with menu key and navigation buttons for :
5.
Ammeter. I1, I2, I3, IN, Earth leakage current (where required).
6.
Communication (where required)
7.
& MEASUREMENTS (where required)
8.
Overload Warning
9.
Load Shredding, Load reversing
10.
Temperature alarm, Phase unbalance
G.
Control Unit with digital LCD display with menu key and navigation buttons for :Ammeter, I1, I2,
I3, IN, Earth leakage current and maximeter for these measurements
H.
Fault indications
I.
Volt, Watts, Volt-ampere reactive, Volt-amperes, Watt-hours, Hz, Vpeak, Apeak, PF, and
maximeters and minimeters for all values.
J.
Load shedding and reconnection depending on power or current
K.
OVERLOAD SETTING (Ir)

1.
L.
M.
SHORT CIRCUIT SETTING (Isd)

1.
Adjustable, 0.5Ir to 10Ir
2.
Time delay settings, tm at 0,0.1,0.2,0.3, 0.4s
EARTH FAULT PICK-UP SETTING (Ig)

1.
N.
Adjustable, 0.5In to 1.0In.
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release A-B-C-D-E.
REMOTE ON/OFF CONTROL

1.
Provide an under-voltage release and an electric motor for re-charging the closing spring
mechanism of the breaker.
Page 4 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.
2.2
Provide remote control keyswitch for each breaker located on a single, flush mounting
stainless steel control panel as indicated on the drawings.
AUXILIARIES
A.
Geared motor closing release
B.
4 Auxiliary contacts : 2 N/O ,2 N/C wired to a readily accessible terminal box.
C.
1 Electrical fault indicator
D.
1 mechanical fault indicator
E.
Digital metering and display of
F.
Voltage (across each phase)
G.
Amperes (across each phase)
H.
KWh
I.
Power Factor
J.
Total Harmonic Distortion
2.3
INTERLOCKS
A.
Locking device in OFF position.
B.
Locking against unauthorized closing, in the operator control panel.
C.
Ready to Close signal
D.
Push button padlocking device
E.
Open position locking
F.
Disconnect position locking
G.
Racking interlock
2.4
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Automatic closing shutters covering all live parts
B.
Shutter prop/locking device
Page 5 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
Terminal shield
D.
Door sealing frame
E.
Protective cover (IP55) (where required)
F.
Pad lockable in out position
G.
Door frame Interphase barrier
2.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide busbar or cable connections as required.
B.
All ACBs will be in draw out execution. The connections should be such that it is possible to
change from vertical to horizontal and vice versa at the site itself.
2.6
NON-AUTOMATIC ACBs
A.
IEC 60947-3 : Switch Disconnector Characteristics.
B.
Bus-couplers and ACBs are required to provide isolation only and should be without tripping
mechanisms. But they should trip is the Short Circuit current is > 15xIn.
2.7
A.
2.8
BECMS INTERFACE
Provide BECMS interface for relay of all measurement information described above to the BECMS
system electrical PC station via an Ethernet gateway.
NUMBER OF POLES
A.
All ACBs used as incomers and Bus Couplers will be 4-pole.
B.
Outgoing ACBs will be 3-pole.
2.9
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
All MCCBs shall be rated for 50oC Services temperature 400 Volts.
B.
The MCCBs should be suitable for 690 Volts system.
C.
Plug-in within form 4-6 switchboards as per IEC 60439-1. In other case fixed type.
D.
NO. OF POLES
Page 6 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
A.
B.
1.
3-pole for circuit protection.
2.
4-pole for bus couplers and transfer switches.
3.
As indicated on drawings.
BREAKING CAPACITY
1.
ULTIMATE SHORT CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITY (Icu)
2.
For MDB Icu = 50kA
3.
For SMDB Icu = 36kA
SERVICE SHORT CIRCUITCURRENT WITHSTAND AND CURRENT (Ics) = 100% Icu

1.
ULTIMATE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT WITHSTAND CURRENT (Icu) :
2.
As indicated in the drawings, 50kA on MDBs, 36kA on SMDBs
3.
SERVICE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT WITHSTAND CURRENT (Ics) :
4.
100% Icu
CURRENT LIMITING CHARACTERISTIC

1.
Provide current limiting / limited energy let-through characteristics within the breaker such
that the let-through fault current through the breaker is reduced to 20% of the calculated
short circuit rating.
2.
MCCBs equipped with thermal magnetic trip units shall have adjustable thermal protection
and fixed magnetic protection for current ratings up to 200A. For current ratings greater
than 200A the magnetic protection shall be adjustable from 5 to 10 times the current
rating. In four-pole breakers, the neutral pole shall have the tripping threshold equal to that
of the phases unless otherwise stated in the drawings.
3.
MCCBs above 250A up to 630A frame size equipped with electronic trip units shall sense
that actual RMS values for:
a.
Long time protection from 40% to 100% of the trip unit rating.
b.
The short time protection shall be adjustable from 2 to 10 times the thermal setting,
c.
The instantaneous protection shall have the threshold fixed between 12 and 19
times nominal current depending on the rating.
Page 7 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

d.
2.10
A thermal memory (in the event of repeated overloads, the electronic trip units shall
optimize protection of cables and downstream devices by memorizing temperature
variations). A load monitoring function shall be an integral part of the electronic trip
units indicating four load levels (60%, 75%, 90% and 105%) by LEDs (with flashing
LED for 105%). It shall be possible to install with the electronic trip unit, a high
threshold earth fault protection, a load monitoring remote indication or a set of four
fault indicating LEDs in front to indicate the cause of tripping.
PROTECTION UNIT/RELEASE
A.
MCCBs equipped with thermal magnetic trip units for System Protection shall have adjustable
thermal protection and fixed magnetic protection for current ratings up to 200A.
B.
For current rating greater than 200A up to 250A both the magnetic protection and overload
protection shall be adjustable.
C.
For Overload Protection Ir = 0.8 xIn
D.
For Short Circuit protection Ii = 5 to 10 x In (in = rated current)
E.
MCCBs above 250A frame size equipped with electronic trip units shall sense that actual RMS
values for.
F.
The Trip Unit should be either LI or LSI as required by the application.
G.
If E/F protection function is needed the same should be settable type with current display.
H.
The Trip Unit should be an integral part of the MCCB ie no additional voltage source be required
for the Trip Unit.
I.
The Electronic Trip Units should have following indications:
J.
1.
Overload Status (1>1.05xIr)
2.
LED to indicate active status of the Trip Unit
3.
Long time protection from 40% to 100% of the trip unit rating.
4.
The short term protection shall be adjustable from 2 to 10 times the thermal setting,
5.
The instantaneous protection shall have the threshold fixed > 12 x In.
6.
The Trip Unit should have Thermal Memory.
AUXILIARIES
Page 8 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
Shunt trip
2.
4 Auxiliary contacts: 2 N/O, 2 N/C.
3.
Digital metering display (for Main and Sub-Main feeders) of :

i. Voltage (across each phase)
ii. Amperes (across each phase)
iii. KWh
iv. Power Factor
v. Total Harmonic Distortion
K.
L.
M.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Resin moulded case.
2.
Silver alloy quick make & break contacts.
3.
The MCCBs should be Line/Load interchangeable. They should be suitable for both vertical
& horizontal mounting, though any adverse effect on the electrical performance. The
operating mechanism should be quick make/quick break type.
ACCESSORIES
1.
Toggle switch where MCCBs are located in form 2 panels.
2.
Rotary handle and extended rotary handle for MCCBs within form 4 boards.
3.
Pad lockable in out position.
FAULT TYPE INDICATION

1.
N.
Provide LED indicators for Fault Type i.e. for overload, short circuit, earth fault.
BMS INTERFACE
1.
Provide BMS interface for relay of all measurement information described above to the
BMS system electrical PC station via an Ethernet gateway.
2.
Interface should be provided to BECMS through any of the following protocols:
Page 9 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
O.
2.11
Modbus, LON woks or Ethernet.
NUMBER OF POLES
1.
All MCCBs used as incomers and Bus Couplers will be 4-pole.
2.
Outgoing MCCBs will be 3-pole.
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
All MCBs shall be rated for 50 deg. C ambient temperature.
B.
TRIPPING CURVE CHARACTERISTIC
C.
D.
1.
Type C for lighting and small power loads
2.
Type D for motor loads
BREAKING CAPACITY
1.
Icn = 6kA (IEC 60898 rating)
2.
(Or greater as required by calculated short circuit levels)
SHORT CIRCUIT SETTING

1.
E.
OPERATING CYCLES
1.
F.
G.
A.
O-C-O = 20,000 (mechanical)
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Resin mounted case
2.
Silver alloy quick make and break contacts
ACCESSORIES
1.
2.12
5In<In<10In
Common switching bar on multi-pole breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

All RCDs shall be rated for 50 deg. C ambient temperature.
Page 10 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
C.
D.
E.
NO. OF POLES
1.
Single phase - 2- pole
2.
Three phase - 4 pole
TRIPPING CURRENT (Idn)

1.
30 mA for small power circuits, water heaters etc.
2.
100mA for lighting circuits, fan coils etc.
3.
As indicated in drawings.
TRIPPING TIME (Tdn)

1.
0.2s at 1 x Idn
2.
0.04s at 5 x Idn
3.
10kA (IEC 61009 for RCBOs)
4.
NO. OF SWITCH OPERATIONS AT FULL LOAD

1.
F.
2.13
A.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Resin moulded case
2.
Silver alloy quick make & break contact
CARTRIDGE FUSES
STANDARDS
1.
2.14
O-C-O = 20,000
BS 88
INCOMING SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
A.
Suitable and rated 50 deg. C ambient temperature.
B.
NO. POLES
Page 11 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
1.
2-Pole for single phase loads
2.
4-Pole for three phase loads
RATED OPERATING CURRENT

1.
D.
2.15
A.
B.
AC23A
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Resin moulded case.
2.
Silver alloy quick make and break contacts.
MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (MDB)

PSCC WITHSTAND CAPABILITY
1.
65kA rms symmetrical for 1s
2.
(Or as otherwise indicated on the drawings)
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Floor mounting cubicle type modular assembly.
2.
Front and Rear Access or all Front Access as indicated on the drawings.
3.
Epoxy polyester based at high temperature finish to RAL 9002 (or similar to suit Engineer /
Architects requirements)
4.
Sheet steel, 2mm thick
5.
Form 4b Type 6
6.
IP 54.
7.
In accordance with drawings indicating board elevation, stacking densities and maximum
overall dimensions.
8.
Steel support framework for mounting of cubicle as required in raised floor applications.
9.
3mm thick non-ferrous gland plate along length of panel for top and bottom cable access.
10.
Extendible modular assembly.
Page 12 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

11.
Ventilated to suit component requirements.
12.
Tin plated high conductivity copper busbars of PSCC withstand of 85kA for 1s and 187 Ka
peak.
13.
Tin plated high conductivity copper earth bar along length of board.
14.
Glass filled polyester busbar support clamps, all supports will be supplied by the original
manufacturer of enclosures.
15.
Neutral bar c.s.a. to match live busbar.
C.
MDBs shall be type tested as per IEC 61439-2 by the original manufacturer or local assembler.
D.
The prototype assemblies shall conform to the following 7 type test defined in IEC 60439-1:
1.
Verification of temperature rise.
2.
Verification of dielectric properties.
3.
Verification of short circuit withstand strength.
4.
Verification of the effectiveness of protective circuit.
5.
Verification of clearances and creepage distances.
6.
Verification of mechanical operation.
7.
Verification of degree of protection.
E.
Main distribution boards should have been tested for Internal Arc withstand as per AS 3439-1 or
IEC 61641 for internal arc confinement.
F.
The complete switchboard including enclosure, busbar system, circuit breakers, motor starters,
major switchgear components, etc. shall be from one single principal manufacturer only. Local
assembly/ local adaptation are allowed however keeping in line with requirements of IEC
standards and ensuring local adaptations done do not affect type testing results of prototype.
G.
Franchised Panel Builders of the approved original manufacturer shall assemble the Switchboards
(namely MDBs, MCCS, SMDBs, DBs). The franchised panel builder shall have a minimum of 5
years experience under the franchisee agreement.
H.
COMPONENTS
Page 13 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

I.
J.
K.
2.16
A.
1.
Analog metering Maximum Demand meter
2.
Digital Metering - KWh meter, Ammeter, voltmeter, PF and THD meter and as per the
schematic diagram.
3.
Anti condensation heaters as required.
4.
Integral automatic regulating power factor correction capacitors as per the schematic
diagram.
5.
Local Authority metering as required and as per local authority specification.
LABELLING & IDENTIFICATION

1.
All busbars to be fully PVC insulated in appropriate RYB phase colour. Black for neutral,
green / yellow for earth.
2.
Label all devices according to BS 7671 and Local Authority regulations.
3.
Label access panels with warning notices as required by BS 7671 and Local Authority
regulations.
4.
Provide, adjacent to the MDB, an approved A1 size single line wiring schematic diagram
with clear Perspex cover, cardboard mount, hardboard backing and varnished softwood
timber frame. Wall mounted.
VIEWING WINDOWS
1.
Supply and install Spyports on all main switchboards and Essential switchboards.
2.
Install in suitable locations agreed with the engineer.
3.
Allow 3 No. ports per switchboard.
The ports will be as per Mikron Spyglass Lockable Viewport with IR window Model-19015-3 or
equal and approved.
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (SMDB)
1.
36kA rms symmetrical for 1s.
2.
Page 14 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
C.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Zinc coated mild steel, 1.5mm thick, EGI with anti corrosion protection.
2.
Form 2b Type 2 unless otherwise indicated on drawing.
3.
IP41
4.
Tin plated high conductivity copper busbars (completely encapsulated).
5.
Steel support framework for mounting of cubicle as required.
6.
Tin plated high conductivity copper earth bar
7.
Refer to drawings for board elevation, stacking densities and maximum overall dimensions.
8.
Certification of enclosure from independent authorities.
9.
Dip coat primed, powder coated in textured finish to RAL 9002 (or similar).
CERTIFICATION
1.
D.
E.
Certification of enclosure by independent laboratories .
COMPONENTS
1.
Digital metering of incomer - KWh meter, Ammeter, voltmeter, PF and THD meter and as
per the schematic diagram.
2.
Anti condensation heaters where boards are located externally or outside of Air
conditioned spaces

1.
All busbars to be fully PVC insulated in appropriate RYB phase colour. Black for neutral,
green / yellow for earth.
2.
Label all devices according to BS 7671 and Local Authority regulations.
3.
Label access panels with warning notices as required by BS 7671 and Local Authority
regulations.
4.
Provide, adjacent to the MDB, an approved A1 size single line wiring schematic diagram
with clear perspex cover, cardboard mount, hardboard backing and varnished softwood
timber frame. Wall mounted.
Page 15 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
MOUNTING
1.
Floorstanding / wall mounted / flush or surface as described on drawings / schedule.
INCOMER
2.
G.
2.17
A.
VIEWING WINDOWS
1.
Supply and install Spyports on all sub-main distribution boards that receive a standby
generator supply.
2.
Install in suitable locations agreed with the engineer.
3.
Allow 3 No. ports per sub-main distribution board.
4.
The ports will be as per Mikron Spyglass Lockable Viewport with IR window Model19015-3 or equal and approved
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (DB)

STANDARDS
1.
B.
C.
Switch disconnector.
IEC 60439-3
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Zinc coated mild steel, 1.2mm thick.
2.
IP31.
3.
Dip coat primed, powder coated in textured finish to
4.
RAL 9002 (or similar).
5.
Short circuit withstand: 17kA rms for 2 ms. Peak short time with stand: 35kA.
COMPONENTS
1.
Devices and control components as per the schematic diagrams/wiring schedules
2.
Anti condensation heaters where boards are located externally or outside of Air
conditioned spaces.
Page 16 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
E.
3.
Perforated sheet steel A4 sized wiring plan pocket finish to match DB enclosure, mounted
to door rails spanning across door.
4.
Provide comb busbars for connection to din-rail mounting protective devices.

1.
Clearly label all devices :
2.
RCDs should indicate section number,
3.
Mcbs should indicate circuit number,
4.
Mcbs should be colour coded R,Y or B as appropriate,
5.
Labels should be durable, plastic based.
6.
Label panels with warning notices as required by BS 7671 and local authority regulations.
7.
Provide plastic-laminated A4 sized distribution schedule as appropriate within each

distribution board
MOUNTING
1.
F.
INCOMER
1.
G.
A.
Space will be provided in the distribution board for the addition of 20% extra mcbs and
20% RCDs to that shown on the schedule. Provide din rail sized to suit.
CONTROLS
1.
2.18
Isolator of equivalent rating or greater to the upstream Circuit Protective Device.
FUTURE SPACE
1.
H.
Wall mounted, flush or surface as indicated / as required by location. Refer to architect

finishing schedules, standard electrical detail drawings and schedules.
Provide matching extension enclosures to board to accommodate controls such as time

clocks, metering, lighting relays, contactors etc. Provide suitable din-rail in controls
enclosure as appropriate.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (MCC)

STANDARDS
Page 17 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
B.
C.
D.

1.
50kA rms symmetrical for 1s.
2.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Zinc coated mild steel, 2mm thick.
2.
Form 3b Type 1 unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
3.
IP54.
4.
Tin plated high conductivity copper busbars.
5.
Steel support framework for mounting of cubicle as required.
6.
3mm thick gland plate along top and bottom.
7.
Tin plated high conductivity copper earth bar.
8.
Refer to drawings for board elevation, stacking densities and maximum overall dimensions.
9.
ASTA certification of enclosure by independent authority
10.
Epoxy powder polymerized at high temperature finish to RAL 9002 (or similar).
CERTIFICATION
1.
E.
F.
IEC 60439-1
Certification of enclosure by independent authority
COMPONENTS
1.
Devices and instrumentation as per the schematic diagram.
2.
Anti-condensation heaters as required.
3.
Devices will be provided to suit the short circuit withstand level indicated.

1.
All bursars to be fully PVC insulated in appropriate phase colour. Black for neutral, green /
yellow for earth.
Page 18 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

G.
2.
Label all devices according to BS 7671 and specification section G.02.
3.
Label access panels with warning notices as required by BS 7671 and local authority
regulations.
4.
Provide, adjacent to each Control Panel, an approved A3 size single line wiring schematic
diagram with clear Perspex cover, cardboard mount, hardboard backing and varnished
softwood timber frame. Wall mounted.
MOUNTING
1.
H.
INCOMER
1.
I.
2.19
A.
C.
Non-Auto MCCB with CT module and digital metering.
CONTROLS
1.
Provide matching extension enclosures to MCC Panel to accommodate controls such as

BEC,BMS outstations, time clocks, metering, lighting relays, contactors etc. Provide suitable
din-rails and mounting arrangements in controls enclosure as appropriate.
2.
Ensure controls wiring and mains powers are segregated by physical barriers/separated
enclosures.
CONTACTORS
1.
B.
Floor standing / wall mounted / flush or surface as described on drawings / schedule.
BS60947-4
CONTACTOR RATING
1.
Provide electromagnetic air break contactors of suitable current rating, characteristics and
features to satisfy the circuit applications indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Where contactors are to be used for switching of lighting and motor circuits, the
manufacturer is to select contactors to satisfy the performance required of the equipment.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Generally, contactors are to be located within MDBs, SMDBs and DBs. Where indicated to
be located remote, these will be mounted in surface mounted individual enclosures to be of
Page 19 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

a zinc coated mild steel construction to IP31 for indoor dry areas and IP56 for wet plant
rooms or external or wet areas with facilities for both top and bottom cable entry.
2.
D.
E.
COMPONENTS
1.
Provide operating coils for 230 volts 50Hz A.C. supply and capable of operation from
remote position.
2.
Provide earthing terminal.
LABELLING
1.
F.
2.20
A.
2.21
A.
Provide the labeling and identification required by section G.02 of this specification
INSTALLATION
1.
Provide cable spreader box where required.
2.
Ensure that all components are clean, securely fixed and that all connections are properly
made.
3.
Ensure that safety notices, labels and identification devices are correctly applied.
4.
Ensure that the correct fuses are fitted and control devices are correctly set and operational
UNDERVOLTAGE RELAYS WITH RE-SET TIMERS

1.
B.
Before assembly all enclosure components are to be finished overall in electrostatically

deposited epoxy powder paint.
IEC 947-2
REQUIREMENT
1.
Fixed under voltage tripping threshold 75% Un.
2.
Automatic re-set time delay setting adjustable between 1min and 10min.
SURGE PROTECTORS
1.
BS 6651
Page 20 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
C.
2.22
A.
2.
BS 2914
3.
BS EN 62305 (Lightning Protection)
REQUIREMENTS
1.
Suitable for multiple pulse events without breakdown.
2.
Maximum let-through voltage : 600V. (L-N, N-E,L-E).
3.
Category B type High (6kV 1.2/50s open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20s short
-circuit
current).
4.
Peak Discharge current : 10kA (8/20s waveform).
5.
The protector should not impair or interfere with the normal operation of the protected
system.
STATUS INDICATION
1.
Full Protection present
2.
Reduced Protection replacement required
3.
No protection failure of protector
4.
Volt Free Contacts for remote indication
METERING / INSTRUMENTATION
1.
IEC 51, IEC 414, IEC 473
B.
REQUIREMENT
C.
On all main switchboards and on other SMDBs and MCCs indicated, provide metering of :
1.
Voltage (across each phase)
2.
Amperes (across each phase)
3.
KWh
4.
1/2 hourly Maximum Demand
Page 21 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
E.
2.23
A.
5.
Power Factor
6.
Total Harmonic Distortion
LONG SCALE IRON TYPE

1.
Select instrumentation, with all necessary instrument transformers, transducers and the like,
for the applications indicated on the Contract Drawings and comprising:
2.
Ammeters, long scale moving iron type, accuracy class index 1.5, each with a phase
selector switch.
3.
Voltmeters, long scale moving iron type, accuracy class index 1.5, each with a phase to
phase and phase to neutral selector switch.
4.
Power factor indicators, long scale moving coil type for use on unbalanced three phase
four wire systems.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Provide instruments for panel mounting with a flat scale plate, a square bezel 96x96mm
colored black and with a toughened glass window.
2.
Provide movements designed to ensure sustained accuracy and reliability, resistant to the
effects of shock and vibration.
3.
Cases to be of molded high impact flame retardant polycarbonate with the bezel and
terminal plate of glass filled flame retardant polyphenyleneoxide.
CURRENT & VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

METERING CTs
1.
Provide metering CTs where required for electricity energy meters supplied by the local
supply authority. All CTs to be Class 1 type and comply with local authority specification.
2.
Provide all CTs with 5A secondary current rated at 5VA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installation
tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
Page 22 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.
B.
Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron floor sill embedded in floor, concrete base
and attach by bolting.
C.
3.3
1.
Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into floor & concrete base.
2.
Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and
according to seismic-restraint details. See Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.
3.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more
than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete bases
according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary
blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs
as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:

1.
2.
3.4
A.
Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
a.
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control

and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
b.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution

components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
Page 23 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
D.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
Switchgear.
b.
Circuit breakers.
c.
Protective relays.
d.
Instrument transformers.
e.
Metering and instrumentation.
f.
Ground-fault systems.
g.
Battery systems.
h.
Surge arresters.
i.
Capacitors.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints
and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Page 24 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Section 260573

"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
B.
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
CLEANING
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters
and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair
exposed surfaces to match original finish.
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and
Training."
Page 25 of 25
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Wiring accessories are to be surface or flush mounted as indicated on the Contract Drawings
C.
Lighting switches are to be of the rocker type mounted on an adjustable grid unless noted otherwise
on the drawings
D.
Provide multi-gang assemblies where lighting switches are indicated to be grouped together at one
location and are on a common phase and from a common distribution board
E.
Provide separate mounting boxes where lighting switches, which are grouped together are connected
to more than one phase or distribution board
F.
Provide galvanised steel mounting boxes to BS 4662, with knockouts and an adjustable lug, for flush
installed accessories
G.
Provide stove enamelled steel mounting boxes to BS 5733, with knockouts and an adjustable lug, for
flush installed accessories
H.
Provide a brass earthing terminal in each mounting box
I.
Provide special complete lighting switch and dimming control plates. Ensure boxes have adequate
segregation for ELU control wiring and general lighting circuit wiring
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Definitions
2. Administrative Requirements
3. Actions and Submittals
Page 1 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
A.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Coordination:
1.
2.
1.5
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall
plates.
C.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERNAL DRY AREAS
Lighting switches to BS 3676
20 ampere, single pole, one way, two way and intermediate
Socket outlets to BS 1363
13 ampere, three pin with single pole control switch
Connection units to BS 5733
double pole control switch, pilot lamp and where indicated a flex
outlet
Page 2 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

Switch units to BS 3676
2.2
20 ampere double pole control switch, pilot lamp and where indicated a flex outlet
EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL (Non-air conditioned) AREAS
Provide assemblies to BS 5420 rating of IP56

Lighting switches to BS 3676
10 ampere, semi-rotary
1 way and 2 way switches
Socket outlets to BS 1363
13 ampere, three pin with semi-rotary control

switch
A.
Provide a 30mA RCD to BS 4293 capable of pulsating DC fault current protection, where
indicated on the Contract Drawings
B.
Enclosures to be of durable engineering insulated material with a self closing cover to socket
outlet.
2.3
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Fix all accessory boxes.
B.
Install accessories at the correct mounting height and where accessories and similar components are
shown adjacent to each other the lower edges are to be in line
C.
Ensure that all accessories are properly earthed
D.
Ensure that the methods of fixing and connection maintain the degree of protection afforded by the IP
rating specified
E.
Protect accessories on installation and where ever practical install face plates only on completion of
final decoration
Page 3 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.4
INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS
A.
TYPE: To BS 4343 to the rating and configuration indicated on the Contract Drawings
B.
Provide assemblies to BS 5420 rating of IP56.
C.
Interlocked switch socket outlet with a semi-rotary control switch, in an enclosure of durable
engineering insulated material with a self closing cover to the socket outlet and material with a self
closing cover to the socket outlet and complete with sleeved plug top to maintain IP rating during use
D.
Provide a 30mA RCD to BS 4293 capable of pulsating DC fault current protection, where indicated
on the Contract Drawings.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
WORKMANSHIP
Ensure that the methods of fixing and connection maintain the degree of protection afforded by the IP
rating specified
SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORY FINISHES

Provide lighting switches, small power socket outlets and data outlets in the following described
areas as per the finish description and type listed below :
1.
B.
Type 1 - Flush Mounting Hairline Finish Stainless Steel
Provide the plate finish as listed below in the following areas :

1.
In auditorium, libraries, main entrances.
C.
Flush mounting brushed hairline stainless steel wiring accessory plates with metal inserts and
screwless or concealed screw fixings. The projection from the wall will be less than 5mm and the
plate shall have smooth rounded edges and corners.
D.
The receptacle in this socket outlet must be suitable to accept the pin configurations for pin shapes
from all major countries and regions of the world including UK, US, Europe, Middle East,
Australia.
E.
Type 2 - Flush Mounting Metalclad
F.
Provide the plate finish as listed below in the following areas where conduits can be recessed in
walls:
Page 4 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

G.
In air-conditioned plant rooms (with plastered walls)
H.
Flush mounting metalclad wiring accessory plate with white plastic inserts.
I.
Type 3 - Surface Mounting Metalclad
J.
Provide the plate finish as listed below in the following areas where conduits are installed surface on
walls:
K.
In air-conditioned plant rooms
L.
In ceiling voids
M.
Surface mounting metalclad wiring accessory plate with white plastic inserts.
N.
Type 4 Surface / semi-recessed toughened, polycarbonate
O.
Provide the following wiring accessory type in the following areas :
P.
External plant rooms
Q.
External areas
R.
Type 5 Flush mounting white plastic
S.
Provide the following wiring accessory type in the following areas :
T.
In classrooms, offices, corridors.
U.
Flush mounting white plastic wiring accessory plate with white plastic inserts.
V.
Surface / semi-recessed IP66, fully rubber-gasketted, polycarbonate unit with switch and lift open
lid and self-closing spring to maintain the IP rating of the socket outlet during use of device
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
Page 5 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold devicemounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Page 6 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
2.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles [up] [down], and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the [right] [left].
Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade
at the top.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet
boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2
A.
3.3
GFCI RECEPTACLES
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not
required.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with [black] [white] [red]-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4
A.

Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative]:
Page 7 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
B.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Test straight-blade [convenience outlets in patient-care areas] [hospital-grade

convenience outlets] for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99.
Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz..
D.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Page 8 of 8
Wiring Devices
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
All motors, switchgear, starters and drives will be selected and coordinated by the MEP
Contractor to provide optimum system efficiency according to the requirements of the
mechanical and subsequent electrical loads.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and
less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.
1.
1.3
centers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).
B.
CPT: Control power transformer.
C.
DDC: Direct digital control.
D.
E.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
F.
NC: Normally closed.
G.
NO: Normally open.
H.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
I.
PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
J.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
K.
VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.
Page 1 of 17
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.4
STANDARDS
A.
Electrical :
B.
IEC/EN60034-1
C.
IEC/EN60034-2
D.
IEC60034-8
E.
IEC60034-1 (LV)
F.
Mechanical :
G.
IEC60072
H.
IEC/EN60034-5
I.
IEC/EN60034-6
J.
IEC/EN60034-7
K.
IEC/EN60034-9
L.
IEC60034-14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS
A.
All motors will be High Efficiency type as defined by IEC/CEMEP class 1.
B.
CALIBRATION
1.
2.2
For 50C ambient temperature, 95% RH.
TYPE
A.
Induction
B.
Squirrel Cage
C.
Duty S1
D.
Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC)
E.
IP55
Page 2 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Class F Insulation
G.
Class B Temperature rise
2.3
2.4
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Cast iron for ratings greater than or equal to 25kW
2.
Aluminum for ratings less than 25kW unless stated otherwise
CONTACTORS
A.
AC-3 rated in accordance with BS EN 947-4
B.
AC-14 or AC-15 or DC-13 rated as appropriate and in accordance with BS EN 947-5
C.
Provide electromagnetic air break contactors of suitable current rating, characteristics and
features to satisfy the circuit applications indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D.
Where contactors are to be used for switching of lighting and motor circuits, the manufacturer
is to select contactors to satisfy the performance required of the equipment.
2.5
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Generally, contactors are to be located within MDBs, SMDBs and DBs. Where indicated to
be located remote, these will be mounted in surface mounted individual enclosures to be of a
zinc coated mild steel construction to IP31 for indoor dry areas and IP56 for wet plant rooms
or external or wet areas with facilities for both top and bottom cable entry.
B.
Provide operating coils for 230 volts 50Hz A.C. supply and capable of operation from
remote position.
C.
Provide earthing terminal.
2.6
A.
2.7
LABELLING
Provide the labeling and identification required by the general requirements section of this
specification.
INSTALLATION
1.
Provide cable spreader boxes where required.
Page 3 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.8
A.
2.9
2.
Ensure that all components are clean, securely fixed and that all connections are
properly made.
3.
Ensure that safety notices, labels and identification devices are correctly applied.
4.
Ensure that the correct fuses are fitted and control devices are correctly set and
operational.
5.
Before assembly all enclosure components are to be finished overall in electrostatically

deposited epoxy powder paint.
MOTOR STARTERS
Provide motor starters for all motor loads greater than 1HP.
STARTER TYPES
A.
Provide motor starters to ensure that starting currents are limited to the following maximums :
B.
For motor rating < 15HP : 5 x FLC : (DOL)
C.
For 15hp < motor rating < 50HP : 2 x FLC : (Star / Delta)
D.
For motor rating > 50HP : 1.5 x FLC (Soft start)
E.
(Or as otherwise indicated on the drawings)
2.10
A.
2.11
LOCATION
Starters to be located within Motor Control Centres or as local device adjacent to equipment
as indicated on the drawings.
COMPONENTS
A.
Contactor (s)
B.
AC-3 rated in accordance with BS EN 947-4
C.
AC-14 or AC-15 or DC-13 rated as appropriate and in accordance with BS EN 947-5
D.
Thermal overload relays
E.
An overcurrent protection and tripping mechanism is to be provided on each phase.
F.
Under Voltage protection and tripping mechanism is to be provided on each phase.
Page 4 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

G.
Positive protection against single phasing.
H.
Auxiliary contacts as necessary for the required control functions, with a minimum of two
spare. (Contacts to arrange normally open or closed, as required).
I.
Lockable in the off position, with electrical interlocks to de-energise all parts before access
can be obtained.
J.
Stop / reset push button control.
K.
Electronic Time Delay Relays adjustable from 0.2 to 180s.
2.12
LOW VOLTAGE SOFT STARTERS
A.
Solid State soft starters for 3 phase induction motors suitable for mounting within control panel
enclosures as indicated on drawings. Ensure co-ordination with panel assembler to ensure
necessary ventilation and heat dissipation for all electronic drives and equipment.
B.
Provide with built-in digital operation panel and with communication interfaces for ASCII and
Modbus. Ensure compatibility also, with Building Management / Plant Control System.
2.13
CONTROL
A.
System type : Digital with microcontroller; starting ramp with progressive increase in voltage
and current limitation.
B.
Initial voltage (pedestal) : 30%-95% Un
C.
Starting torque : 10% - 90% Mdirect start
D.
Kick start : 95% Un (90% Mdirect start), adjustable 0 to 999 ms
E.
Motor current (lm) : 0.4 to 1.2 Ir ( rated Astat current )
F.
Acceleration ramp time : 1s to 99s ( types: standard or linear ramp up )
G.
Energy savings : Output voltage reduction according to power factor
H.
Override : Fixed output voltage permanently equal to supply voltage
I.
Bypass : Direct control of a bypass contactor
J.
Deceleration ramp time : 1s to 060s ( 1s to 99s in secondary ramp)
K.
modes: coast to stop, soft stop,
L.
Pump control or linear ramp down
Page 5 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

M.
DC braking 0s to 99s ; 0.5 to 2.5 ln
N.
Slow speed Forward: 7% or 14% of nominal speed ;
O.
Reverse: 20% of nominal speed
P.
Retry : 0 to 4 attempts, and 1 to 99 sec. retry time
Q.
Monitoring : Motor current, line voltage, power, power factor and elapsed time
2.14
Running
A.
External Control : Start - Stop
B.
Acceleration phase : Adjustable time
C.
Permanent time : Energy savings/ Override choice
D.
Stop phase : Power cut-off / Ramp / DC braking / Pump control
2.15
Inputs / Outputs
A.
External Control : 4 digital optocoupled
B.
Two fixed (Start, Stop), and 2 programmable (I3, I4)
C.
1 analogue 0-5V DC for tachogenerator input feedback
D.
Outputs : 3 programmable relays (1r, 2r, 3r)
E.
1 analogue 0-10V DC output for current metering
2.16
Protection Systems
A.
Current limit : Adjustable from 1 ln to 7 ln
B.
Overload : IEC class 10 and 20 ( selectable )
C.
Cool-down time after overload trip : 300 s for reset
D.
Loss on input phase : Trip at 3 s
E.
Thyristor short circuit : Trip at 200 ms
F.
Heatsink overheating : Trip at 200 ms
G.
Motor thermistor : Trip at 200 ms
Page 6 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
Loss on output phase : Trip at 3s
I.
Stalled rotor : Trip at 200 ms
J.
Supply frequency error : If f < 45Hz or f > 65 Hz,
K.
Overcurrent : 100 to 150% ln; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99s
L.
Undercurrent : 0 to 99% ln; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99s
M.
Overvoltage : 100% to 130% Un; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99s
N.
Under voltage : 0 to 50% Un; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99s
O.
Error ( CPU ) : 60 ms
P.
Memory : 4 former errors
Q.
Long start time : 2s x ta ( ta= acceleration ramp time )
R.
Long slow speed time : 060s
2.17
Environmental Conditions
A.
Temperature : 0 to +55 C
B.
Relative humidity : 95%
C.
Mounting position : Vertical
D.
Protection degree IP 00, UL open
2.18
A.
2.19
LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

The Variable frequency drive shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001:2008 & ISO
14001:2004 Certified Plant and manufacturing location in EU Countries.
Inverter Type
A.
Provide three-level Voltage Source Inverter (VSI) with fast-switching power semiconductors
Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristors (IGCTs), without parallel or series-connected devices.
B.
The above is an old technology.
Page 7 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.20
1.
Latest is fully digital, microprocessor controlled using latest IGBT technology of

uncontrolled diode or thyristor rectifier bridge, DC link capacitance and an IGBT
controlled inverter.
2.
The inverter shall be controlled with the Vector Control or with Flux Current Control
Alternatively; the drive shall be programmable with (multipoint) V/f control.
3.
The PCBs shall be coated.
Input
A.
Variation: 10% of nominal voltage as normal operating range, down to 25% safe
operation with derated output
B.
Operating in a voltage range of 380V to 480V AC, +10%, three phase, at frequencies of
47 to 63Hz
2.21
Auxiliary Voltage
A.
400VAC 10%, 50Hz. 3 phase
B.
Drive shall be self-sufficient, no auxiliary voltage required.
2.22
Output Voltage
A.
Sinusoidal, 400V
B.
The output voltage shall be PWM signal. Output signals not following the PWM logic shall not
be allowed. The output voltage shall be min, 90% of the input voltage, depending on the
control type (see inverter type)
2.23
Output Frequency
A.
0 to 66Hz
B.
up to 90KW 650Hz
C.
110kW and above min. 200Hz, derating>100Hz possible
2.24
Efficiency
A.
typically >98%
B.
Range: 96 to 98%
Page 8 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.25
Input Power Factor
A.
Fundamental: >0.97
B.
Total: >0.96
C.
Value:>=0.95
2.26
A.
Standard Control Connections :

Digital Inputs:
1.
All digital inputs to be galvanically isolated, rated for 22250VAC / 22150VDC.
B.
Control Inputs to be of 24 V DC. Recommended to have external interposing relay for higher
Voltage.
C.
Digital Outputs:
1.
D.
All digital outputs to be relay outputs with switch-over contact, potential free, rated for
20250VAC or DC Analog I/Os.
Type: Programmable Relay Outputs with 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive) / 250 V AC / 2 A

(Inductive load).
1.
All analog I/O galvanically isolated, rated for 420mA or 010V.
E.
Provide also for motor winding and bearing temperature monitoring.
F.
Direct monitoring of PTC / KTY 84 is offered in the Drive. For Bearing monitoring separate
Device to be used.
G.
Remote Control:
1.
differential analog inputs for speed reference
2.
freely programmable analog outputs 2 offered as standard.
3.
differential digital inputs Isolated 6 Nos. Digital Inputs offered with PNP/NPN logic for
direct communication
to be automation level.
4.
freely programmable relay outputs with switch-over contact for drive status indications.
H.
3 Programmable Relay Outputs, 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive) / 250 V AC / 2 A (Inductive load)
I.
Process Interface:
1.
1 differential digital input for:
Page 9 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

Process Stop or Run Enable

J.
Possibility to connect tripping and alarm signals from transformer and motor protection and
other external locations directly to the drive
K.
The above main functions can be derived from the available Inputs and Outputs.
L.
M.
2.27
Main Feeder Breaker Control Interface:

1.
3 digital outputs for controlling the breaker (1 for closing, 2 for tripping)
2.
3 differential digital inputs for breaker status indication
The above main functions can be derived from the available Inputs and Outputs.
Overload Capacity
A.
Normal use, 10% short term overload capacity allowed for one minute every 10 minutes
B.
The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% Overload for
60 seconds repeated once in 600 seconds
2.28
Ambient Temperature
A.
To be rated for use in ambient temperatures of up to 50C.
B.
Contractor to ensure adequate cooling and ventilation when drives are mounted in Motor
Control Centres.
C.
Design Operating ambient Temp 40C.
D.
Derating factors applicable for higher ambient temperature.
2.29
Enclosure Classes
A.
Air-cooled: IP42
B.
VFD Modules to be IP21.
2.30
BMs Interface
A.
The VFD will have terminals for connections to the BMS.
B.
All common fieldbuses including Profibus, Modbus, Modbus+, Interbus S, Devicenet,

LONWORKS, Ethernet, ControlNet, CAN Open
Page 10 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
Drive to have two communication ports with four inbuilt protocols.
D.
Provide a door mounted microprocessor based digital operator control module to allow the
station operations personnel to setup and monitor the drive parameters. Observe output
speed, load and voltage, and monitor status and fault information.
2.31
Protective Functions
A.
Overcurrent,
B.
short circuit,
C.
earth fault,
D.
input phase loss,
E.
output phase loss,
F.
overvoltage,
G.
undervoltage,
H.
overtemperature,
I.
motor overload,
J.
motor underload,
K.
motor stall protection,
L.
VSD Fan Failure
M.
Self Hardware Monitoring Test
N.
Fast current limit for Trip free operation.
O.
Drive to have 2 LEDs as standard to indicate Drive status when the Operator panel is not
connected.
2.32
Additional Component
A.
Redundant cooling fan.
B.
Braking chopper for effective motor braking and short deceleration times DC Braking,
Compound Braking as alternative can be offered.
C.
Start-up bypass for synchronous transfer of up to 4 motors to the line.
Page 11 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
Drive shall have facility for 3 Programmable V/F Characteristics / curve with boost
functions.
2.
Drive to have simplified Vector control. (e.g. Flux Current Control on board) for
improved Dynamic response and optimized motor control.
3.
Drive to incorporate Energy Saving Mode. i.e. When the Drive under PID control drops
below a certain energy saving set point the Drive to have automatic feature to ramp
down to stop and enter into energy saving zone.
4.
VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency (PWM) of 2 kHz to 16 kHz for ratings
up to 90 KW and 2 to 4 kHz up to 250KW. The carrier frequency shall be varied in
steps of 2kHz.
5.
To smoothen voltage peaks, to bridge commutating dips and to reduce the Harmonics
on power line, 3 Phase line commutating reactor should be provided at the inverter
input side to meet the EN 61000-3-2 standard.
6.
The VFD should have three command and data sets to switch through different modes
of applications.
7.
The VFD shall have built-in Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter upto 90 KW to
meet EMC standard EN 55011. External RFI filter may be supplier for VFDs 110 kW
and above.
8.
Drive shall free programmable logic function blocks (gates) which can be interlocked
with control inputs, set points and actual values for application specific controls.
9.
Drive to have 3 Skip Frequency to avoid mechanical resonance.
10.
Drive to have 3 different programmable OFF Commands.
11.
Drive to incorporate Compound braking to achieve a smoother braking of the monitor

compared to DC braking.
12.
It should be possible for the Drives to be mounted on either side without any clearance.
13.
Provide automatic restart after an inverter fault trip. Flexibility to be available in the
drive to have max 10 attempts. This feature can be defeated if auto restart is disabled.
14.
Provide flying restart feature. This feature will allow a motor unit which has been shut
down or has fault tripped, but is still rotating, to be restarted without first stopping the
motor at zero speed. The VFD shall catch the motor at the speed which it is actually
rotating and then re-accelerate to the speed called for by the speed reference signal.
15.
Provide Load Torque Monitoring feature in the Drive enable to detect mechanical
failure or overload of mechanical transmission line (e.g. Belt failure).
Page 12 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

16.
The VFD shall be programmable for automatic, manual or remote reset for any fault
condition.
17.
All VFDs shall be provided with by-pass starters to run the equipment in case of VFD
failure. The type of by-pass starter shall be selected as per Load requirement and in
accordance with the Local Authority / Specification requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
B.
Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections
before VFC installation.
D.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work
E.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating
handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by
bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For
controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply
with requirements for concrete base specified in
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Page 13 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFC on roofs with tops at uniform height and with
disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless
otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight,
structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.
1.
2.
Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
Structural-steel channels are specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
D.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."
E.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
F.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.
G.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in
Section 262813 "Fuses."
H.
Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors are installed.
I.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven
equipment.
J.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
C.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1.
2.
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.
Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions
for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
Page 14 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.4
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.5
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.
Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control
sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B.

C.
Perform tests and

representative].
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1.
2.
E.
inspections[ with
the
assistance of
factory-authorized
service
Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.

Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed
Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare
reports:
Page 15 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
8.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F.
VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,
and observations made after remedial action.
3.6
A.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.7
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event
recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior
to Substantial Completion.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
C.
Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.
D.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges
E.
Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.8
A.
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into
service.
Page 16 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial
Completion.
Page 17 of 17
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
The generator supplier appointed by the MEP Contractor will be responsible for the detailed
design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and demonstration to the Engineer and/or to
the client, of the full generator installation including:
1.
Generator (Engine and Alternator assembly)
2.
Attenuators
3.
Acoustic Louvres
4.
Room Acoustic Treatment
5.
Exhaust Pipework
6.
Exhaust Ducting
7.
Fuel Pipeline
8.
Fuel Fill point and enclosure
9.
Day Tank
10.
Bulk Tank
11.
Fuel transfer pumps
12.
Batteries for starting and controls
The system shall consist of generator set(s), which include all controls, protection, wiring, and
accessories for automatic start-stop operation.
Page 1 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
The electric power generating system shall have a site capability of Prime rating for
standby application as indicated on drawings, 0.80 power factor, 400 volts, Wye
connected, three phase, 50 hertz. Additional capacity of 10% overload for 1 hour in 8
hours of continuous operation to be provided. This power shall be applied for STANDBY
operation.
D.
A written confirmation from the manufacturers is required to be submitted for all

installations in meters (intake or exhaust) are satisfactory for peak performance of engines
and attenuators.
E.
Any deviation from the specification shall be brought to engineers notice along with the
technical justification for consideration by the consultant at tender stage.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle

Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders
Engine lubricating oil capacity
Engine coolant capacity without radiator

Engine coolant capacity with radiator
Coolant pump external resistance (maximum)
Coolant pump flow at maximum resistance
At rated voltage:
Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for:

50% load
75% load
100% load
110% load
Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D)

Time constants, armature short circuit (TA)
Reactance, sub transient - direct axis (X"D),

Reactance, transient - saturated (X'D)
Page 2 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD)

Reactance, negative sequence (X2)
Reactance, zero sequence (X0)
Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical
Performance - Based on SAE J1349 standard conditions of 100 kPa (29.61 in Hg)
and 25C (77F); also at conditions of ISO 3046/1, DIN 6271 and BS 5514. Fuel
rates are based on ISO 3046 and on fuel oil of 35 degrees API (16C or 60F) gravity, having a LHV of 42780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29C-(85F) and
weighing 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).
Power rating at 0.8 power factor

kVA rating as per drawings
Fuel consumption at standard conditions for:
50 % load
75 % load
100% load
110% load
Combustion air inlet flow rate
Exhaust gas, flow rate
Stack temperature
Exhaust system backpressure (maximum)
Heat rejection to: coolant

After cooler
exhaust
atmosphere from engine
atmosphere from generator
Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including switchgear, transfer switch, vibration isolators, and day tank.
Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overall generator set measurements,

mounting location, and interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling and drain
lines.
Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel outline drawings published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC) format for controls and switchgear
showing interconnected points and logic diagrams for use by contractor and owner.
Warranty Statements - Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.
Service - Location and description of supplier's parts and service facility including parts in-
Page 3 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

ventory and number of qualified generator set service personnel.

B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
A.
Submittals shall include but not be limited to.
1.
1.5
A.
Include plans and elevations for engine-generator set and other components specified.
Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank.
Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain.
Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and
interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for EPS equipment and functional
relationship between all electrical components.
Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet

identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant
component design and performance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The complete power generation system including engine generator. Generator control panel shall
be supplied by same manufacturer and their authorized dealer who has been regularly engaged
in supply of complete Diesel Generator Power System products. All components shall have been
designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility and prototype tested to
prove integrated design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated,
assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacture does not waive any
requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be individually listed as part
of compliance statement.
Page 4 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged
engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
The generator set(s) shall include the capability of automatically controlling generator set
operation. After starting, the unit(s) will attain rated speed and voltage, and accept rated
load. The engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output
voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Manual
adjustment of generator speed and voltage shall be provided. Proper derating factor to be
applied on proposed / generator set to achieve ambient site conditions.
B.
The operating environment of the power generating system shall be:
C.
1.
Altitude:
500 m
2.
Max
Ambient
Temperature
50 C
3.
Fuel Type:
Type 2 Diesel
4.
RH
100%
The power generating system shall conform to the following performance criteria:
1.
Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated generator
set kW/kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all engine-mounted
parasitic and external loads such as radiator fans, pumps etc
2.
Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard conditions of 100
kPa and 27C (29.53 in Hg, 81F); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and API 7B-
Page 5 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

11C also apply.
2.2
A.
3.
Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on No. 2
diesel fuel having 35 degree API (16C, 60F) specific gravity.
4.
Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having a low heating
value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29C-(85F) and
weighing 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).
5.
Start Time and Load Acceptance From instant of receiving start-up signal, engines
shall start, achieve rated voltage and frequency, and be capable of accepting pull
load within 10 seconds.
6.
Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528

requirements.
7.
Performance, System
8.
The power generating system shall satisfy the following performance criteria at site
conditions
9.
Total of Power Capability (kVA rating) as indicated on drawings, Prime rated

Frequency -50 Hz
10.
3 Phase Volts 400 Volts
11.
Average Power Factor 0.80
12.
Steady state speed band shall be +/- 0.50 %.
13.
Voltage Transient response: within +/- 10% of rated voltage against application of
50% rated kVA.
14.
The contractor will review all loads indicated on the design drawings as being
connected to the generator and ensure that a suitable generator is offered at the
time of tender of at least the rating rated indicated on the design drawings.
ENGINE
The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, PRIME POWER RATED, 1500
RPM, four cycle design with DRY exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United
States, Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I ozone
depleting substances (ODS).
Page 6 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Engine Equipment
1.
C.
D.
E.
The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge,
lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature
gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable.
Lubrication System
1.
The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is integral with
the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The system shall incorporate
full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter
clogging.
2.
The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle. Systems
where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not acceptable.
Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the
crown and piston pin.
3.
The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and have a
nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or shifting of the filtration
media.
Diesel Fuel System
1.
The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter, transfer
pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The transfer pump shall deliver fuel
under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder.
2.
The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously controlled
by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals from the
engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to alter the
volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand.
3.
The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern for
efficient combustion.
Primary Fuel Filter
Page 7 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
F.
Fuel/Water Separator
1.
G.
I.
A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water damage.
Fuel Cooler
1.
H.
In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter
between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large contaminants.
Fuel shall be piped from the filter/water separators to the intake of the engine fuel
pump, and then to the engine. Excess fuel shall be piped through the fuel cooler
and returned to the fuel tank with less than 60 kPa (8.7 PSI) restriction. The fuel
cooler shall be capable of exchanging heat rejected at full load with the cooling
medium, including 10% reserve to accommodate fouling.
Fuel transfer Pump
1.
A duty-standby diesel electric fuel transfer pump system is to be provided adjacent to

the bulk fuel tank. It shall deliver fuel from the bulk storage vessel to the day tank.
The diesel pump will be self-priming with fuel automatically fed from the bulk tank.
2.
Local IP55 Auto start/Manual start selector switches will be provided on the control
panel directly adjacent to the pumpset.
Fuel Tank (Day Tank)
1.
A free floor standing double-skinned steel fuel tank of capacity for 8-hour full load
operation shall be provided. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections;
float switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A man hole, manual
shutoff valve on the fuel line to the engine, connections for fuel return, vent, fuel fill
and a tank drain with valve shall also be included.
2.
Since each generator set is to accommodate its own fuel transfer pumps, then a
common day tank is to be provided for both sets.
Page 8 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

J.
K.
FUEL LEVEL INDICATORS

1.
On the bulk fuel tank, provide two fuel level indicators and provide one on each
day tank.
2.
Provide flange mounted, magnetic roller type, stainless steel over-tank level
indicators complete with 4-20mA monitoring output to the BMS/BECMS.
3.
Provide suitable DN100 flanges on tanks to accommodate each indicator.
4.
The level indicator will be to Engineers approval manufactured by Kubler of

Switzerland or equal and approved.
Electronic Unit Injection

1.
L.
Governor
1.
M.
A unit fuel injector shall be mounted in each cylinder head, with external feeder
lines requiring less than 5-bar (75-PSI) fuel pressure. Injection timing and duration
shall be electronically controlled with injection pressure accomplished by a piston
pump driven from the engine camshaft.
The engine governor shall control engine speed and transient load response within
commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances.
Engine Control
1.
The engine controller shall be of Electronic Programmable type and shall control
engine speed while optimizing both steady state and transient engine performance.
The controller will monitor all significant engine parameters, and adjust engine
performance according to speed, altitude, temperature, and engine condition. It
shall incorporate revisable control software capable of reconfiguring engine
operation to desired performance levels.
2.
The engine control shall be configured to avoid interruption of power whenever

possible. In the event of system faults, which do not require immediate shutdown,
the engine shall be programmed to continue operation at power levels sufficient to
remain within performance limits. It shall display real
Page 9 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
N.
time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation and provide accurate
service information in the event of a malfunction.
Cooling System
1.
2.
O.
Radiator, Engine Mounted
1.
P.
The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the engine. Air shall be
drawn from the engine side and exhausted through the radiator core.
Inlet Air System
1.
R.
Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere
through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be sized to cool the engine
continuously while operating at full rated load and at site conditions. It shall be a
folded core design consisting of individually replaceable core assemblies sealed
between the top and bottom tank and which can be replaced individually at the job
site.
Blower Fan
1.
Q.
The engine jacket water-cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with
provision for filling, expansion, and deaeration. The engine shall drive the cooling
pump. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect external
cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved. Jacket water heater with
thermostatic control to be provided to maintain optimum engine temperature to
facilitate hot start up & load acceptance.
The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element requiring
replacement no more frequently than 250 operating hours or once each year. If
external ducting is required, maximum restriction to the combustion air inlet shall be
6.7 kPa.
Turbo Charging
Page 10 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.3
Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases and
direct - connected to a compressor supplying engine combustion air.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A.
The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly and
silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for minimum
restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa.
B.
Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth being
transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to accommodate thermal
growth. Support dampers and springs shall be included where necessary to isolate
vibration.
C.
Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water traps installed at the
lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended to avoid nuisance fumes and odors, and
outlets cut at 45 to minimize noise.
D.
Exhaust piping shall be insulated with 50mm rock wool and aluminum cladded.
E.
Appropriate disposal system of crank case fume out of the generator shall be installed.
F.
SILENCER
1.
G.
EXHAUST THIMBLE
1.
H.
An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates
the building. Bird guard and water ingress protection shall be installed at the end of
exhaust pipe.
ELECTRICAL STARTING SYSTEM

1.
I.
The silencer shall be residential grade with noise attenuation not less than 25dBA.
The engine starting system shall include 24-volt DC starting motor(s), starter relay,
and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. The system
shall be capable of starting a properly equipped engine within 10 seconds at
ambient temperatures greater than 22C (70F).
JACKET WATER HEATER

1.
Jacket water heater(s) shall be provided to maintain coolant temperature of 32C

(90F) while the engine is idle. Heaters shall accept 240 AC single-phase power
Page 11 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

and include thermostatic controls. Hoses to and from the heater shall be industrial
quality, which exhibit long life in operational environments. Manual shutoff valves
shall be incorporated to isolate the heater during servicing.
J.
K.
2.4
A.
BATTERIES
1.
Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set
manufacturer. They shall be lead acid type with thru-partition connectors, and
housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for venting. Battery
shall be rated for 6 start attempts.
2.
Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from
spark sources, in a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and
maintenance. Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set
manufacturer.
ALTERNATOR
1.
The alternator(s) shall be rated for Prime service at rating indicated on drawings,
0.80 PF, 400 V, three phase, wire, 50 Hz, 1500 rpm.
2.
The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load of 300% rated

current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of continuous load current for 2
minutes with field set for normal rated load excitation.
3.
It shall exhibit less than 5% waveform deviation at no load.
4.
Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver.
5.
Alternator is to have stabilized temperature band between the alternator's 75% and
100% continuous load rating.
6.
Alternator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2 Section 4, with all
I2R losses corrected to 115C.
ALTERNATOR
WINDINGS - LOW VOLTAGE
1.
The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy based
material applied to each layer of magnet wire. The field shall be prototyped tested
for two hours at 150% of rated speed at 70C, and production tested at 125% of
Page 12 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

rated speed.
B.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1.
C.
SPACE HEATER
1.
D.
G.
The alternator exciter shall be brush less with the circuit consisting of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft.
Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage
spikes.
EXCITER - PERMANENT MAGNET

1.
F.
Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240volt AC single phase space heaters to

minimize condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable
of easily mounting in the assembled alternator.
EXCITATION
1.
E.
The alternator shall be of class IP 22 designed to operate in a sheltered drip-proof

environment.
The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive excitation current from a pilot
exciter mounted on the rotor shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of
rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition.
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
1.
Voltage regulator shall be Digital Programmable type. As installed, the voltage

regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the following standards:
2.
International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
3.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
4.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
VOLTAGE REGULATOR DIGITAL

1.
The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable
operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall be capable of sensing
true RMS in three phases of alternator output voltage, or operating in single phase
sensing mode. It shall exhibit the following operational characteristics:
2.
Alternator output voltage maintained within +/- 0.25% at steady state conditions.
Page 13 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
Alternator output voltage maintained within +/- 0.25% of rated value for any load
variation between no load and full load.
4.
Alternator output voltage drift no more than +/-0.25% of rated value at constant
temperature.
5.
Alternator output voltage drift no more than +/- 0.5% of rated value within a 40
change over ambient temperature range of -40C to 70C.
6.
Response time less than 20 milliseconds.
7.
Voltage buildup with alternator output as low as 6 volts.
8.
At full throttle engine starting, output voltage overshoot no more than 5% of its rated
value, with respect to the volts/Hz curve.
Meets ISO 8325-3 class G2
specifications.
9.
Power dissipation 55 W at 15 amps; <100 mAat rest.
10.
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) of less than 50.
11.
Electronic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) suppressed to MIL

STD 461C Part 9 and VDE 875 level N.
12.
Maintain stable voltage control with 20% total harmonic distortion.
13.
The regulator shall include the following features:
14.
Voltage level rheostat to provide alternator output voltage adjustment of -10% to

+10% of nominal. This shall be in addition to a programmable output voltage level
of -25% to +10%.
15.
Automatic gain adjustment to provide output voltage compensation for changes in

load or frequency.
16.
Manual gain adjustment 0 - 10% to provide compensation for line losses between
alternator output terminals and the load.
17.
Reactive droop adjustment programmable to allow paralleling without interconnect

wiring between alternators, with 10% minimum droop at full load and 0.8 PF.
18.
It shall allow system parameter setup and monitoring, and provide fault alarm and
shutdown information through a keyed LCD display. A PC-based user interface shall
be available to allow viewing and modifying operating parameters in a windowed
Page 14 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

environment. The regulator shall be factory preset but field programmable for:
voltage output
voltage, minimum
voltage droop/crosscurrent adjustment
voltage gain (IR compensation)
voltage gain, internal
current, output
field current variation
sensing, single or three phase
dual voltage/frequency slopes
slope intersect (knee) frequency
under frequency set point
over/under voltage trip
over/under voltage trip time
Alarms and fault shutdowns shall include:
Under/over voltage
Over excitation
Loss of Excitation
Rotating Diode failure
19.
rotection shall be provided for the regulator against long term overcurrent
conditions. Alternator output shall shut off when output is shorted, or excitation
current exceeds normal for 15 seconds. The regulator shall not be damaged or
result in unsafe operation when subjected to open or shorted input due to sensing
loss, or sensing source shorted to ground or adjacent conductor.
20.
The regulator shall be capable of operating while mounted within the alternator
Page 15 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

assembly, or 300m (985 ft) from the alternator. It shall have provision for remote
voltage level control, using 16 gauge-shielded wire.
H.
21.
The regulator module sealed in a waterproof and airtight shock resistant plastic
housing and shall withstand:
22.
Operating temperatures between -40C to 70C.
23.
Shock tolerance to 20 g's
24.
Vibration of 4.5 g's (peak) between frequencies of 18 to 2000 Hz in three

perpendicular planes, and mechanical shock of 15 g's in all three planes.
25.
Salt spray resistant as described by MIL STD-810C, Method 509.1 and ASTMB117.
26.
Pressure sealed to withstand 35 kPa (5 PSI).
27.
The regulator shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of the engine-alternator set.
MOUNTING
1.
I.
MOUNTING BASE - PACKAGE GENERATOR SET

1.
J.
The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the enginegenerator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the
engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and
minimize resonant linear vibration, and to achieve 99.7% isolation.
The base shall be constructed of formed steel. The base arrangement shall
incorporate a common interior width for furnishing dedicated stub up areas for
mechanical and electrical connections. Steel cross members shall support genset
and add rigidity to base with vibration isolators installed between generator set and
supports. The base shall have provisions at each corner for overhead lifting. End
caps shall be added to the base for the addition of either a weatherproof or sound
attenuated enclosure.
VIBRATION ISOLATOR SPRING TYPE

1.
Factory supplied steel spring isolators shall be installed between the generator set
based and the mounting surface. The isolators shall be bottled to the foundation
and have a waffled or ribbed pad on their bottom surface. The pads should be
resistant to oil, water, antifreeze, diesel fuel and cleaning compounds.
Page 16 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

K.
DAY TANK INTERPHASING

1.
L.
CONTROLS, PROTECTION, AND MONITORING

1.
M.
Necessary fuel transfer pump & piping to feed D.G Set day fuel tank to be
provided. The tank shall incorporate pipe connections, Fuel transfer pump, float
switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact wired to an indicating light
on the generator set control cubicle. A manual shutoff valve on the engine supply
line and a drain valve shall be included.
The controls, protection, and monitoring systems of the generator set and its
operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All
subsystem components, interfaces, and logic shall be compatible with engine
mounted devices.
CONTROLS - GENERATOR SET MOUNTED

1.
The generator set control panel shall control, protect, meter and annunciate all
functions necessary to confirm the operational status of the generator set. It shall be
designed and built by the engine - generator manufacturer, mounted on the
generator with options of facing each side or rear and incorporate 100% solid-state
microprocessor based control circuitry, with circuitry, keypad controls, and digital
metering. Annunciation shall include individual alarm lights, which will allow fault
identification while retaining a view of generator operating parameters, and a
silencable audible alarm. Fault condition set points shall be verified without
exposing the generator set to the actual condition.
2.
Engine governing and over speed fault circuitry shall utilize individual circuitry to
assure speed control protection. Governor, voltage regulator, or complete panel
shall be capable of mounting remotely, and shall be compatible with controls of
various manufacturers. Circuitry shall be sealed in a dust tight and watertight
module with sealed wire entries into the enclosure. Internal terminal strips shall be
both crimped and soldered to assure circuit integrity. Panel module shall comply
with IP 64 and NEMA 4 for environmental protection, while the total panel shall
qualify for IEC 144, IP 22 and NEMA 12. Panel functions shall be identified by
ISO labels.
3.
As minimum the generator set mounted control panel shall have following features:
Phase selector switch
Voltage adjust rheostat
Page 17 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

Speed adjust rheostat Auto / Manual start stop control
Engine control switch for off/reset, auto start, manual start & stop
Panel Light
Alarm Module
Cycle cranking
Cool down timer
Interface module with Potential Free contacts for remote alarms
Safety shut down protection and LED indication for:
Low oil pressure
High coolant temperature
Overcrank
Overspeed
Over / Under frequency
Over current
Reverse Power (Not required for single genset application)
Over / Under Voltage
Digital display for:
Ammeter
Voltmeter
Frequency meter
Power Factor meter (average total & per phase)
kW meter (total & per phase)
kVA meter (total)
Page 18 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

N.
KVAR meter (total)
kWh meter (total)
KVARh meter (total)
% rated power
Coolant temperature
Oil pressure
Service hours
Engine R.P.M.
System DC volts
System diagnostic code
4.
This information will be relayed to the BECMS. This work package should include for
cabling and interfacing associated with same and ATS operation during mains
failure.
ENGINE MONITORING DEVICES

1.
O.
Backlit LCD to sequentially rotate display of operating hours (reprogrammable),

engine RPM, battery DC volts, oil pressure, and jacket water temperature. A
momentary switch shall be provided to continuously display a selected operating
parameter. The display shall provide specific codes for fault shutdowns, cycle
programming, and diagnostic codes for trouble shooting. Set points shall be
programmable through a front mounted keypad, and sensor operation confirmed by
a verification procedure. Engine monitoring signals provided by pulse widthmodulating (PWM) lubricating oil pressure and coolant temperature sensors and
communicated directly to the panel control module. The safety logic shall alarm or
shut the engine down if the signal is lost.
CONTROLS AND SWITCHGEAR

1.
Alternator voltage level rheostat and frequency control shall be mounted on the
panel face. The engine start-stop switch shall be door mounted and include
positions for off/reset, run/start, stop, and automatic mode. Start-stop logic shall
have provisions for cycle cranking programmable from 5 to
Page 19 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

P.
2.
60 second cycles, for total crank time of 5 to 120 seconds. Cool down operation
shall be programmable from 0 to 30 minutes, with a signal to allow removal of the
load from the generator set during cool down.
3.
Control Panel shall be equipped with switchgear panel mounted up as per local
authority requirement and conforming to BS 7698.
SHUT DOWN / ANNUNCIATION

1.
Q.
SAFETY DEVICES
1.
R.
ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, and all controls,
annunciation, and monitors labeled with ISO symbols.
SERVICE
1.
2.5
The generator set shall shut down and red-flashing LEDs shall signal operational
faults of over crank, over speed, high water temperature, and low oil pressure.
High water temperature, low coolant level, and low oil pressure shall be
programmable for shutdown or alarm. A minimum of three (3) spare fault inputs
shall be available which can be programmed for alarm or shutdown, with 0-250
second time delay. There shall be a lamp test switch pad accessible from the front
of the panel.
Complete viewing and programming of panel functions shall be possible from the
panel face. Features shall include a fault history log, engine alarm and shutdown
set points, password protection, spare input programming, hour meter
programming, voltmeter/ammeter programming, and AC calibration.exhaust system
shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly and silently with minimum
restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and
in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa.
BATTERY CHARGER
1.
An engine panel mounted battery charger shall be provided to

charge Engine starting Batteries. Short circuit protection to be
provided to withstand starting in rush current.
Page 20 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.6
SERVICE MANUALS AND PART BOOKS
A.
The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish one copy each of the manuals and
books listed below for each unit under this contract:
B.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - with description and illustration of all switchgear controls and
indicators and engine and generator controls.
C.
PARTS BOOKS - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and components, except
standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.).
D.
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS - on the complete system that cover daily,

weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance requirements and include a complete
lubrication chart.
E.
ROUTINE TEST PROCEDURES - for all electronic & electrical circuits and for the generator.
F.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART - covering the complete generator set showing description of

trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.
G.
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST - showing all consumables anticipated to be required during
routine maintenance and test.
H.
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS - showing function of all electrical components.
2.7
NOISE AND VIBRATION CRITERIA
A.
Proposed equipment sound pressure data shall be provided by the manufacturer for the
consideration of the Engineer. The generator installation package shall include for all sound
insulation required for the room, including wall acoustic panels, acoustic louvers, exhaust duct
attenuators to ensure a maximum noise level of 75 db (A) maximum measured at 1000mm from
the outside face of the external wall around the room.
B.
Suitable attenuator arrangements shall be designed and installed by the generator installation
package specialist supplier to reduce noise level for radiator discharge and air intake. Any open
areas shall be suitably treated.
2.8
A.
SYNCHRONISING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Provide a complete digital power control and distribution system to automatically start and
parallel 3 generator sets to perform such operations as load shedding and load adding. The
control equipment shall be enclosed within one unit and be fully compatible with the
manufacturers make and model of generator set.
Page 21 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
The synchronizing control equipment shall comply with the following standards:
BS 4999
BS EN 60034
NFPA 70
NFPA 110
C.
CONSTRUCTION
D.
1.
Control equipment shall be contained within a rigid, freestanding IP40 metal enclosed
structure with front and rear access with removable lifting eyes supplied for lifting
purposes. Front doors shall be supplied with a lockable handle. All door locks shall be
keyed alike to operate from a single key, with one key supplied for each lock. The frame
work shall be constructed of steel sheet metal. The frame work and all other sheet metal
components of the system shall be primed with a rust-inhibiting primer and finished with
satin finish grey enamel.
2.
All control components are to be totally isolated from power-carrying components by metal
or insulating barriers. All components and surfaces operating at more than 50 volts should
be shielded to prevent inadvertent contact.
3.
All control wiring is to be 105 degree C, 600 volt rated and sized as required for safe,
reliable operation. Each wire, device and functional component shall be identified by
permanent identification.
4.
All fuses shall be installed in DIN-rail mounted safety type fuse holders, with an integral
fuse blown indicating lamps. Terminal blocks are to be provided for all field connections
on DIN-rail mounted devices.
BUSBAR
1.
E.
The busbar shall be of rectangular section and made of hard drawn high purity / high
conductivity copper, the entire conductors and joint lengths shall be tinned. All busbar
conductors shall be totally enclosed in Class B insulating polyester film material. The
busbar shall have a maximum current density of 1000 Amps per square inch. The bus shall
have a minimum bracing level not less than 100,000 Amps. The neutral and earth
conductors shall be of the same material and dimension as the phase busbars.
SITE CONDITIONS
1.
The operating environment of the synchronizing control equipment shall be:
Page 22 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
G.
Altitude: 500 meters
Max Ambient Temperature: 46 C
Humidity: 95% non-condensing
CONTROLLER POWER
1.
Power for the controller shall be via the generator set 24V DC starting batteries. A solid
state no break best battery selector system shall be provided so that control voltage is
available as long as any battery bank in the system is available. The control equipment on
each generator set in the system shall continually monitor the battery system for low and
high DC voltage and shall run a battery load test every time the generator is started.
Necessary equipment shall be installed to prevent brownout situations during the engine
crank cycle.
2.
The synchronizing control equipment control panel shall include for the following functions
and messages:
3.
Low DC voltage battery voltage less than 24V DC except during engine cranking.
4.
High DC voltage battery voltage greater than 32V DC
5.
Weak battery battery voltage less than 14.4V DC for more than 2 seconds during engine
cranking.
6.
The master control station battery shall also include battery and charger failure testing and
indication.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, GENERAL

1.
SYSTEM PLC (change to independent microprocessor based synchronizing controller 1

per genset).
2.
The system control logic such as load adding and load shedding sequence shall be
performed via the programmable logic controller (PLC). The PLC shall be a DIN-rail
mounted device; the PLC shall have the following features.
3.
On-line Changes PLC to have the facility to be interconnected to a PC and control

sequences may be modified without shutting down the system.
Page 23 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
I.
J.
4.
EEPROM Programmed Storage PLC programme shall be stored in a non-volatile EEPROM

memory, with additional battery backup of the PLC RAM for storing system configuration
settings.
5.
LED Status Indicators PLC and Input/Output blocks shall include LED status indicators for
use in viewing system status and diagnosis of failures.
6.
I/O Block Surge Suppressors Inputs and Outputs to the PLC are connected via integral
surge suppressors to provide protection against over voltage damage to the system and
provide greater reliability.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
1.
Protective functions for the synchronizing control equipment shall be provided via the
generator set controls and include over and under bus voltage, under frequency,
over load and phase sequence protection. Whenever the control equipment is
closed to the generator set the above protective functions shall be available.
2.
Power software shall be provided to allow fast, consistent settings for all system
protective functions and also to allow them to be adjusted through the system
operator panels. In a fault condition the system shall display the fault name and
code and log the fault and time occurrence. The service manual and power software
shall provide procedures and service codes based on the fault code.
The synchronizing control equipment shall allow for the following operations:
Loss of Normal Power
Failure of a Unit to Start or Synchronize
Bus Overload
Load Demand Mode
Return of Normal Power
Test with Load Mode
Test without Load Mode
A TFT touch screen full color display, with minimum resolution of 800 x 600, operator
Page 24 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

interface panel is to be provided to allow the operator to monitor and control the on site
power system.
K.
1.
The operator panel should include the following functions and screens:
Main Menu
One Line Diagram
System Control
System Data Logging
Genset Status Summary
Load Control
Trend Charts
Alarm Status
Service Manuals
Service Information
AC Metering
Transfer Control
Bus Protection and Setup
Event Data Log
Control interfaces shall be allowed for interconnection to external equipment these shall
include:
Load Add and Load Shed Relays
Paralleling Breaker Control Relays
Bus Voltage Connection
Page 25 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

System Remote Start Command
L.
The control equipment shall be provided with a suitable network for local or remote control
and monitoring functions. An internet connection shall also be provided to allow for access
via the web.
M.
The synchronizing control equipment shall have built-in security to protect against any
configuration changes by unauthorized personnel. A four digit security code is required for
access to the configuration menus. The level of configuration menu shall be as follows:
N.
Monitor with limited control (no security code) Access to all Menu Screens, Event
Data Log etc.
Operator/Administrator (Level One) Access to system points.
Technician (Level Two) Allows access to all functions.
Quality Assurance
1.
O.
Production Tests
1.
P.
The complete synchronizing control equipment shall be fully compatible with the
make and model of generator supplied by the manufacturer. All components shall
have been designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility
and prototype tested to prove integrated design capability. The complete system
shall have been factory fabricated, assembled, and production tested. The naming
of a specific manufacture does not waive any requirements of this specification.
Any exceptions or variations must be individually listed as part of compliance
statement.
The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the synchronizing
control equipment. A certified report of these tests shall be available when
requested.
Drawings/Schematics
Page 26 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
Q.
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the synchronizing control
equipment must conform to a common format.
Submittals
1.
Submittals shall include but not be limited to.
Technical Data Manufacturer produced synchronizing control equipment

specification or data sheet including relevant component design and performance
data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
C.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions and with NFPA 110.
IDENTIFICATION
Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main
service location.
Page 27 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.4
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.

1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical and mechanical test listed in the first two subparagraphs as specified in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
Verify the unit is clean.
Electrical and Mechanical Tests

1)
Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with IEEE 43.

a)
b)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Machines larger than 200 horsepower. Test duration shall be 10

minutes. Calculate polarization index.
Machines 200 horsepower or less. Test duration shall be one minute.
Calculate the dielectric-absorption ratio.
Test protective relay devices.

Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by
the application.
Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature,
overspeed, and other protection features as applicable.
Conduct performance test in accordance with NFPA 110.
Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator.
Page 28 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.
3.
NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for fullcharging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity
under both conditions.
Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floatcharging conditions.
System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for
air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg.
Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at fullrated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.
Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.
Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and
decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage at 25 percent and
100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
E.
Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
F.
Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
Calibration Services, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make
calibration records available for examination on request.
G.
Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
H.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.
I.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
J.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Page 29 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

K.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
L.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
M.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after final
acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection
while running with maximum load. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after
date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and
connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 18 months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include
quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include
routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for
proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.
Page 30 of 30
Engine Generators
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 263323.11 - CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
The Central Battery System shall compile of individual Static Inverters sited at various locations as
indicated on the drawing
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes the following central battery and power conversion equipment rated 600 V and
less for emergency lighting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Electrical Construction.
Rectifier
Mechanical Construction.
Final Sub Circuit Monitoring
Batteries
General Monitoring
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct digital control.
B.
IBC: International Building Code.
C.
Interruptible: As used in the Section Text, an off-line, passive-standby or line-interactive, inverteronly unit, with an intentional interruption of power to the load until an internal transfer switch
picks up and transfers the load to the unit's inverter and internal battery source on loss of the
"normal" source, and then retransfers to the "normal" source when it is restored. Transfer time
can be "slow" (up to approximately 1 second) or "fast" (2-4 ms or 40-50 ms, depending on
manufacturer).
D.
Division 08 Section 263323.11
Page 1 of 11
Central Battery Equipment For Emergency

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for
remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
F.
NiCd: Nickel cadmium.
G.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
H.
PC: Personal computer.
I.
PWM: Pulse-width modulated.
J.
TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion (also listed as "THD" in catalog data by
manufacturers).
K.
THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.
L.
Uninterruptible: As used in the Section Text, an on-line, double-conversion (rectifier/inverter) unit,

with no interruption of power to the load on interruption and restoration of the "normal" source.
M.
UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
N.
VRLA: Valve-regulated lead acid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
Seismic Performance: Central battery equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated central battery equipment shall be tested
and certified by an NRTL as meeting ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements.
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
The system shall be a network of individual Static Inverters sited in approved locations with
the following speciation
Input Voltage = 220 / 230 / 240 or 415 V. A.C. 50 Hz Sine Wave
Output Voltage = 220 / 230 / 240 or 415 V. D.C. 50 Hz Sine Wave
Page 2 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.3
RECTIFIER
Full Wave Controlled Thyristor / Diode Bridge

Output Regulation (Adjustable)
2.25 V Cell + 1%
Full Wave Controlled Thyristor / Diode Bridge
Output Regulation (Adjustable)
2.25 V Cell + 1%
Output Ripple Content (Voltage)
Less than 1%
Current Walk In
2 seconds to maximum
Equalising / Boost Charge / Indication Automatic / Manual
Input Power Factor
0.9 1
Charge Current Factor
C 10
Charger and Controls
Mains Supply:
Input Control:
Fusegear:
Terminals:
Contactor:
Charger:
Temperature
Compensation:
Boost Control:
Test Push-button:
Inverter
Output voltage:
Frequency:
Voltage Regulation :
Isolation :
Total Harmonic Distortion :
Power Factor :
230 + 10% VAC single phase.50hz

MCB to BS EN60898 or BS EN60947-2
HRC type BS88
DIN rail mounted near to cable entry
Standard contactors comply with the requirements of BS
5424 or BS EN60947.
Constant voltage, current-limited type with electronic solid
state controller. Voltage is controlled to within 2% of setting
at up to 10% mains supply variations
Fitted as standard on all units with lead acid cells. The charger
voltage is automatically adjusted with reference to ambient
temperature to optimise charging and battery life
A key-operated manual boost /commissioning switch is fitted
To units with vented batteries
Simulates mains failure
Pre settable in the range 220 to 240 VDC. Unless otherwise advised,
the output will be set at 230VAC. The voltage tolerance is 2% on
loads of 0 100% of system rating.
50 or 60hz. + 0.01%. Standard setting 50hz.
Waveform: Sinusoidal
Static 2%, dynamic 6%.
Static 2%, dynamic 6%.
Less than 3% into a linear load
Will supply load in the 0.3 lag-0.3 lead range
Page 3 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

Overload :
Start-up Time :
Noise Level :
Efficiency :
Protection :
Low Voltage shut down
Inhibit:
Technology
200% for 10 seconds, 125% for 20 minutes without reduction in output voltage
Standard 30mS. Soft start up to 10 seconds if required
Less than 55dBA at 1 metre.
85-89%.
DC input and DC output MCBs
DC input reverse polarity protection
Short circuit protection
Pre-charge protection fuse.
Reverse-fed mains proof
The inverter module(s) automatically shut down when the battery discharges to a pre-set level. Re-set is following a combination of the
restoration of the mains supply and an increase in battery voltage
above the disconnect threshold level.
Residual current drain when the disconnect circuit has operated is less
than 1mA per module.
An inhibit switch to control the inverter is fitted on a user control PCB
in the cubicle
Pulse width modulation with high frequency switching.
Environmental Conditions
0
Ambient Temperature (Nominal) 15 25 C
0
Extreme Temperature
0 40 C
Humidity
40 60%
Noise Level at 1 metre
55 DBA
Altitude without extra ventilation 2500 m

Manufacture Standard
BS 5266 and EN 50171
Display Panel:
Composite fascia with LCD voltmeter and LED indication of power on, float
mode, current limit, maintained lights, boost mode (when fitted)), inverter running, battery
discharged, charge fail and system fault.
All incoming and outgoing Terminals shall be Din Rail mounted. All load circuits shall be double pole
MCB protected
Page 4 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
The Central Battery Inverter cabinet shall be sheet steel, powder coated paintwork RAL 9002,
Grey in colour. The cabinet shall be IP 21 with hinged front door for complete access. The
display panel shall be mounted flush in the cabinet facia. If the batteries cannot be
accommodated in the inverter enclosure then they shall be installed in a separate adjacent
enclosure to the same specification as the inverter cabinet.
FINAL SUB CIRCUIT MONITORING

The Central Battery System design shall incorporate sub circuit monitoring of all final circuits as
indicated. When a normal lighting circuit fails the dedicated emergency fittings shall be powered
from the inverter supply. The inverter supply shall be either the incoming mains supply to the
inverter cabinet or the inverted battery supply in the case of cabinet mains failure. In the event
that the mains power supply is still available to the battery, the mains power feed will serve to the
emergency lights. Likewise if the generator supply is available at the emergency lighting panel
then the emergency lighting will be fed off the standby generator. This facility ensures that the
batteries are only used on a full mains failure and in the event that the standby generator supply
is not available.
BATTERIES
A.
The Batteries shall be maintenance free sealed lead acid, gas recombination type with a minimum
design life of 10 years. They shall have extremely low gas generation, low self-discharge and
have permanently sealed pressure release vents.
B.
Care should be taken to store/install these batteries in areas, which are free of prolonged
extreme temperatures. The Batteries shall be sized to power the complete system for 3 hours
following mains failure at 100% light output of all emergency lamps.
C.
The battery cubicle will contain a mains/standby generator auto-transfer switch arrangement.
2.7
CENTRAL MONITORING
A.
A Central Monitoring Control Panel shall be installed with each inverter system. The Central
Monitoring Control Panels shall be networked back to a Main Monitoring control Panel to provide
a global view of the complete system.
B.
The individual Central Monitoring Panel shall address each exit and emergency fitting and label
each fitting with details in English text as follows:
Page 5 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

1) Location details
2) Lamp type and Number
3) Failure information
4) Isolate / De-Isolate
5) Automatic test / Manual test
C.
The facility of constant monitoring shall be available. Any lamp, luminaire or sub-circuit failure
shall be immediately reported to the local monitoring panel and onward to all network panels
and PC. This facility enables immediate response to fitting or / and area failures. This facility
should not rely on automatic or manual tests for failure indication.
D.
It shall be possible to programme automatic testing of fittings individually, by group or complete

system. All failures shall be indicated globally on the secure network. The programming of the
addressable fitting shall be by a window-based programme, which is site programmable. Each
local panel shall hold its own programme in a non-volatile memory and act as a stand-alone
system in the event of network failure.
E.
A full graphics software package will be provided on the dedicated monitoring PC. Graphics will
be developed from the MEP contractors approved electronic layout and schematic drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store central battery equipment according to NECA 411.
B.
Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive central battery equipment, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, structural support,
ventilation, temperature, humidity and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Page 6 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before installation
begins.
C.
Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
D.
Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
E.
3.2
HARMONIC ANALYSIS STUDY
A.
Perform a harmonic analysis study to identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated
harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze
operating scenarios, including recommendations for central battery equipment input filtering to
limit TDD and THD(V) to specified levels.
B.
Prepare a harmonic analysis study and report

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.
3.3
complying with IEEE 399 and with
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of central battery equipment with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Install central battery equipment and accessories according to NECA 411.
C.
Wall-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Install central battery equipment on walls with tops at
uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished
floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structuralsteel channels bolted to wall. For units not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D.
Suspended-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Suspend central battery equipment from structural
ceiling components using hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes
of units to be supported. Provide support devices complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems."
Page 7 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Floor-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Install central battery equipment on 4-inch nominalthickness concrete base.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
F.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for
G.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
I.
Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters[ and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions
where unenclosed wiring method may be used for low-voltage control and alarm wiring].
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1.
2.
3.
Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for
Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
J.
Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
K.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
3.4
A.
CONNECTIONS
Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits
according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.
Page 8 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
1.
C.
3.5
Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes and

bonding connections to metallic piping systems as indicated; comply with NFPA 70.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between central battery equipment and remote devices. Comply with requirements
in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
3.6
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify central battery equipment, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.7
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.
Label central battery equipment with engraved nameplates.
Label each separate cabinet, for multicabinet units.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for central battery equipment,
including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and
cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of central battery equipment units.
A.
Testing Agency: A qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.

C.
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
Page 9 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
Inspect and Test Each Component:

a.
b.
c.
E.
Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and

adjust components and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for all external branch circuit, feeder, control, and alarm
wiring connected to central battery equipment element and component.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inspect central battery equipment, wiring, components, connections, and equipment

installation.
Test insulation resistance for all external branch circuit, feeder, control, and alarm wiring
connected to central battery equipment element and component.
Verify that input voltages and frequencies at central battery equipment locations are within
voltage and frequency limits specified in Part 2. If outside this range, notify Design
Engineer before closing input OCPDs.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in manufacturer's
written instructions and in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification, including specifically
those for batteries, battery chargers, and UPS, regardless of the type of central battery
equipment provided. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Perform a load-duration test at rated voltage and rated output current to verify the correct
functional operation of the unit under full-load stable operating conditions for the minimum
time limits required by UL 924. Monitor and record ambient temperature and temperatures
within the unit.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of central battery equipment.
Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
central battery equipment 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Page 10 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
Central battery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies central battery
equipment and describes all test results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations made after remedial action.
H.
Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event
recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to
Substantial Completion.
I.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, and other adjustable parts.
J.
Adjust the trip settings of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous-trip
elements; install fuses if not factory installed.
K.
Set the automatic system test parameters.
3.8
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace central battery equipment whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids
prior to Substantial Completion.
3.9
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain central battery equipment, and to use and reprogram
microprocessor-based control, monitoring, and display functions.
END OF SECTION 263323.11
Page 11 of 11

Lighting
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 263353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
This Specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a
continuous duty, three phase uninterruptible power system. This system shall utilize "true on-line"
transistor based pulse width modulated (PWM) inverters incorporating Isolated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) technology. The inverter is to be a microprocessor controlled, solid-state device
within the uninterruptible power system. The uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to
as the UPS, shall provide high quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads.
C.
The UPS shall consist of a rectifier/charger, battery, inverter, protective devices, static transfer
switch, synchronizing and phase lock circuitry, and controls required to provide regulated,
uninterrupted, conditioned power from the UPS modules to the critical load.
D.
The UPS will be provided with remote monitoring software so that all of the display content on
the set-mounted control panel can be monitored in a central PC within the building control room.
E.
The UPS shall include all mechanical and electrical devices that will automatically provide
continuity of electrical power within the defined limits without interruption upon failure or
degradation of the commercial power source. Continuity of conditioned electric power shall be
maintained for the defined period of time by the battery system. Upon return of the utility power
source, the UPS shall automatically assume the load, while simultaneously recharging the
batteries.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Three-phase, on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Surge suppression.
Input harmonics reduction.
Rectifier-charger.
Inverter.
Static bypass transfer switch.
Page 1 of 20
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Project:

Works:
Title:

f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
1.3
Battery and battery disconnect device.

[Internal] [External] maintenance bypass/isolation switch.
Output isolation transformer.
Remote UPS monitoring provisions.
Battery monitoring.
Remote monitoring.
<Insert required major features>.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C.
D.
E.
THD: Total harmonic distortion.
F.
1.4
A.
The UPS shall be designed to operate as a double conversion system in the following modes:
B.
Normal: The critical AC load is supplied continuously by the inverter. The rectifier/charger
derives power from a utility AC source and supplies DC power to the inverter while
simultaneously float charging a battery system. The inverter converts the DC power into clean
and regulated AC power that is then supplied to the critical load through the static transfer
switch.
C.
Emergency: Upon failure or degradation of the utility AC power, the critical AC load supplied
by the inverter will draw its power from the batteries. There shall be no interruption of power
switching from utility AC power to batteries or while switching from batteries back to utility AC
power upon its restoration. While the battery powers the UPS, indication for actual battery
backup time shall be provided.
D.
Recharge: Upon restoration of utility AC power, even if the batteries are completely discharged,
the UPS will restart. The rectifier/charger shall "walk-in" and gradually assumes the inverter and
battery recharge loads. If the bypass source is within acceptable limits, the UPS will retransfer
the critical load back to the inverter.
Page 2 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Bypass: When the inverter overload capacity is exceeded, the static transfer switch shall perform
a transfer of the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption in power to the
critical load.
F.
Modular system: Each UPS system will be designed as a modular configuration such that the
load requirement is met by n equally sized modules. A further module will be provided in each
system as an on-line standby hence n+1. A control panel is to be provided with the system to
ensure all output waveforms are precisely synchronized. Each module will be easily removed
(electrically and physically) from the system in the event of failure.
G.
Maintenance Bypass: If for some reason all of the UPS modules have to be taken out of service
for maintenance or repair, the UPS shall be provided with an internal maintenance bypass
switch to allow the system to be bypassed. Bypass isolation shall be complete; all serviceable
components are to be isolated: i.e. over-current protective devices, rectifier, inverter, static switch
and transformers.
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair
or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranted Cycle Life for Valve-Regulated, Lead-Calcium Batteries: Equal to or greater

than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding
to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F:
Discharge Rate
8 hours
30 minutes
15 minutes
2.
Discharge Duration
8 hours
30 minutes
45 seconds
Discharge End Voltage Cycle Life

1.67
6 cycles
1.67
20 cycles
1.67
120 cycles
Warranted Cycle Life for Premium Valve-Regulated, Lead-calcium Batteries: Equal to or

greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures
corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77
deg F:
Discharge Rate
8 hours
30 minutes
15 minutes
Discharge Duration
8 hours
30 minutes
1.5 minutes
Page 3 of 20
Discharge End Voltage Cycle Life

1.67
40 cycles
1.67
125 cycles
1.67
750 cycles
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
B.
Discharge Rate
Discharge Duration
8 hours
1 hour
15 minutes
8 hours
1 hour
45 seconds
A.
Discharge End
Voltage
1.75
1.75
1.67
Cycle Life
40 cycles
80 cycles
2700 cycles
Special UPS Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or
replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within special warranty period.
1.
1.6
Warranted Cycle Life for Flooded Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in
manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based
on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F:
Special Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
SYSTEM RATINGS
Input / Output Voltages: Specification for the UPS shall be:
1.
2.
3.
Primary input: 400-415V , three-phase, (plus ground)

Bypass (Reserve) input: 400-415V, 3-wire, three-phase, (plus ground)
UPS Output: 400-415V VAC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BATTERIES
A.
Batteries shall be of the valve regulated lead acid type, with adequate multi-cell batteries to meet
the DC voltage levels of the UPS.
B.
Storage battery plants shall be used to provide the system with a stored energy source. The
batteries shall be heavy-duty industrial type designed for UPS service, and be of the valve
regulated lead-acid (VRLA) type, high impact resistant plastic encased. The battery cabinet shall
"line-up-and match" (i.e. be of similar size, paint color, and design) the UPS electronics
enclosure. The capacity rating shall be sufficient to supply the direct current to the inverter
operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 volts per cell. The
batteries shall be operated in floating mode under normal operating conditions
C.
Batteries will be provided with discharge protection devices to ensure they are not totally
discharged.
Page 4 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.2
RECTIFIER/ CHARGER
A.
The rectifier section of the power converter module shall utilize fast acting Silicon Controlled
Rectifiers (SCR's) Thyristor Only. This device shall be a twelve-pulse, phase-controlled, solid-state
device. It shall be capable of receiving utility input and rectifying it to produce Direct Current
(DC) power at levels sufficient enough to supply the load via the inverter, and recharge the
battery.
B.
Input Protective Devices: The rectifier/charger shall include protection against primary power
surges, including for lightning transients and under or over voltage conditions. This protection is
provided via Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Microprocessor Control of the rectifier/charger.
C.
Input Protective Devices: The rectifier/charger shall include protection against primary power
surges, including for lightning transients and under or over voltage conditions. This protection is
provided via Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Microprocessor Control of the rectifier/charger.
D.
Filtering: Sufficient filtering of the rectifier/charger output shall be provided to prevent damage
to the battery. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 2% RMS.Voltage variation shall not exceed 1%
at any load condition 0 -100%.
E.
In-Rush Limiting: The rectifier/charger shall be equipped with a "walk-in" feature. When the
primary power is applied to the rectifier/charger, the current surge shall be limited to 25% of
the full rated output current and shall gradually increase to full load rating within 10 seconds.
F.
Rectifier/Charger Capacity: The rectifier/charger shall have sufficient capacity to supply full
load current to the inverter while recharging a fully discharged battery. Battery charge current
shall be adjustable up to 10% of rectifier maximum output current at any UPS load condition.
G.
Automatic Restart: Upon restoration of utility AC power after a power outage, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, "walk-in", and gradually assume the inverter and
battery recharge loads.
H.
Rectifier/Charger Input Current Limit: The rectifier/charger shall have an "on generator"
function, which when activated by an external dry contact opening (user supplied), shall reduce
the battery charge current limit to a level that ensures that the UPS will draw current equivalent
to 100% load or less.
Page 5 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

I.
Rectifier/Charger Battery Test: The rectifier/charger will have facility to run diagnostic tests of
the batteries by briefly placing them under load. This test shall be accomplished by reducing
the output voltage of the rectifier/charger. This test is to be set by the factory to occur on a predetermined timescale. The rectifier shall remain on and in the circuit should the battery fail to
meet criteria. If any fault is detected an alarm will flash on the diagnostic panel. Measurements
taken will be compared with the diagnostic algorithm in the microprocessor to confirm the
integrity of the battery.
J.
Input:
K.
1.
Nominal Voltage 400-415V VAC, 3 Phase (plus ground)
2.
Voltage Limit: 20% from nominal voltage (-15% for battery recharge)
3.
Frequency: 57 - 63 Hz
4.
Operation Current Inrush: "Walk-in" from 25% maximum to 100% full load rating in
10 seconds
5.
Power Factor: 0.82 minimum at full load, nominal conditions
Output:
1.
Nominal Voltage: 415 VAC "Float " Operation: 2.27 VDC per cell
2.
Regulation: 1% maximum for input voltage and DC variations
3.
Temperature Compensation: 0.13 float volts per cell per C
4.
Ripple Voltage: Less than 2% RMS voltage, with inverter fully loaded and battery
disconnected
5.
Nominal Current: Sufficient to operate inverter at full rated load for any of the above
voltages and to concurrently recharge the battery set within 10-times the discharge time
period to 90% full charge.
6.
Overload Current: 125% of nominal current
7.
Battery AC current ripple: <1% nominal
8.
Protection: Electronic current limiting, input breaker, and input fuses
Page 6 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
INVERTER
The inverter section of the power converter module shall utilize Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistors
(IGBT's). This solid state device that incorporates pulse width modulation (PWM) technology will
be capable of accepting the output of the rectifier/ charger or the battery system voltage and
delivering AC power within specified
limits to the critical load bus. The inverter shall be microprocessor controlled and include all
necessary timing logic and control circuits.
B.
Inverter Start-Up: The inverter shall automatically startup when a start command is generated and
shall be stable and ready to deliver power to the load within 2 seconds.
C.
Inverter Protection: Inverter IGBT's shall be protected by fast acting, current limiting fuses and
current limiting circuits. The inverter shall be capable of running indefinitely with the batteries
disconnected. For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control
electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors when the inverters capacity is
exceeded. Simultaneously, the static transfer switch shall transfer the load to utility power without
interruption to maintain continuous power to the critical load.
D.
Inverter Oscillator: The inverter shall contain an oscillator capable of operating and maintaining
the output frequency of the inverter within specified limits. The inverter oscillator shall be capable
of frequency synchronization and phase locking to the utility power source frequency. When
operating as a slave to the utility power and a failure occurs in the slaving signal, the inverter
oscillator shall automatically revert to a free running state and maintain the specified limits. The
oscillator shall not drift more than 0.1% while operating at maximum rated operating
temperature.
E.
Inverter Isolation Transformer: A YN dry type power isolation transformer shall be provided for
the inverter AC output. The transformer shall have a minimum K rating of 30. The transformer
shall have a single primary winding and not be a single point of failure. The transformer shall
have insulation of class "H" and not exceed the temperature limit of the insulation class of
material when operating at full load at maximum ambient temperature.
F.
Inverter DC Protection: The inverter shall be automatically protected at the following DC voltage
levels, which shall be independently adjustable for UPS application flexibility
1.
2.
DC Over voltage Shutdown = 2.40 V/cell

DC Under voltage Shutdown = 1.65 V/cell
G.
The DC under voltage shutdown shall be automatically increased when the backup time is longer
than one hour to 1.75 V/cell to avoid deep discharge to the battery due to light load.
H.
Inverter DC Protection: The inverter shall be automatically protected at the following DC voltage
Page 7 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

levels, which shall be independently adjustable for UPS application flexibility.

1.
2.
DC Over voltage Shutdown = 2.40 V/cell

DC Under voltage Shutdown = 1.65 V/cell
I.
The DC under voltage shutdown shall be automatically increased when the backup time is longer
than one hour to 1.75 V/cell to avoid deep discharge to the battery due to light load.
J.
Static Transistorized (IGBT) Inverter : Power Rating: UPS output ratings are shown at 0.8-pf
lagging. Other higher power factor loads can be supported.
1.
2.
3.
Output Regulation:
Balanced Loads: 1% balanced load - Phase Angle 120 1
Unbalanced Loads: 3% 100% unbalanced load - Phase Angle 120 3
K.
Output Waveform: Sinusoidal
L.
Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to utility line over frequency range of 0.75% or
optionally 1.5%, 3%, 6%; free running 0.05%. Slew rate =1.0 Hz/Sec
1.
2.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
Output Dynamic Response: < 5% maximum deviation, recovering to within 2% of

nominal during a sudden 100% load application or removal in less than 20ms.
Overload Rating: 150% for 1 minute, 125% for 10 minutes
STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

An internally mounted static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral
part of the UPS module. The static switch shall be naturally commutated high speed devices
(SCR's) rated to conduct full load current continuously while on inverter or bypass power (reserve
source). The reserve portion of the static switch shall be designed to avoid back feed into the
utility supply. Failure of one SCR shall not affect the operation of the UPS and the failure shall be
shown on the LCD display. Over current protection in the bypass mode will be through fuses.
MAINTENANCE BYPASS
The static switch shall automatically and successfully transfer the critical load from the inverter to
the bypass source (reserve) under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
DC voltage out-of-limits failure

Inverter failure
Critical load current exceeds inverter overload rating
Page 8 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

4.
5.
B.
2.6
A.
Reserve Transfer shall be automatically inhibited, whenever bypass source parameters are
outside predetermined (adjustable) limits, or UPS output and bypass are not synchronized and
phase locked.
Retransfer
The static switch shall automatically and successfully retransfer the critical load from the bypass
source to the inverter under the following conditions:
1.
2.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
2.9
Over-temperature develops within the inverter

Manual command is given
Inverter output voltage returns to within specified limits.

Critical load current reduces to within inverter overload rating.
Separate Bypass Feed

The UPS shall be capable of being supplied with a separate bypass feed. This feed eliminates
the single point of failure of the primary input by offering two (2) separate paths for the power
flow. This feature also allows two or more UPS modules to be installed in an isolated redundant
configuration.
Synchronizing Equipment
The static switch shall include all necessary logic circuitry for fully automatic frequency
synchronization and phase locking of the UPS inverter output to the bypass/reserve power
source.
Static Transfer Switch
A.
Power Rating: Static switch is continuous duty power rated.
B.
Overload Ratings:
1.
10 Minutes 125%
2.
1 Minute 150%
3.
30 cycles 1000%
4.
5 cycles 1500%
Page 9 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.10
Transfer Characteristics
A.
Transfer time from inverter: Less than 0.5ms to utility power when both sources are in phase lock,
and vice versa. Automatic 5 second delay before allowing retransfer from utility power to
inverter after transferring from inverter to utility power.
B.
Transfer time from inverter to utility when both sources are not in phase lock: 20 ms (To prevent
damage by phase reversal to the load.)
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
Maintenance Bypass Switch

Bypass switching shall allow the critical load to be fed from the bypass/reserve power source,
while providing isolation of the static switch during maintenance. Provision for testing of the UPS
operation without affecting or disconnecting the critical load shall be provided.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current revision of
the following documents. Where conflict arises between these documents and statements made
herein, the statements in this specification shall prevail.
1.
CE Mark as per the following EU directives 73/23, 93/68, 89/226, 92/31 and
93/68.
2.
IEC/EN 62040-1-1
3.
EN 50091-2
4.
IEC/EN 62040-3
Wiring
Wiring practices, materials and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
BS7671, NFPA 70 and other applicable codes and standards. The internal neutral sizing of the
UPS shall be 1.7 times the line capacity.
Page 10 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.14
MECHANICAL STANDARDS
2.15
Cabinet
A.
2.16
A.
2.17
The UPS unit, comprised of the rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch, and maintenance
bypass switchgear shall be housed in free standing NEMA type 1 enclosures. Cabinet doors and
covers shall be removable for expedient servicing, adjustments, and installation. The UPS cabinet
shall be structurally adequate, have castors for ease of maintenance and installation, and have
provisions for forklift handling. The cabinets shall be front and top access only for service.
Thermal Design
Forced redundant air-cooling shall be provided to ensure that all components are operated
within specification with air entry at the base and exit at the rear. The enclosure shall be
mounted with 4 inches (100 mm) of free space at the back for ventilation.
Serviceability
A.
The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Printed circuit assemblies shall be
plug-in. The main control printed circuit and boards shall be interchangeable across the entire
product range.
B.
Each UPS module will be connected to the incoming ways outgoing feeder arrangement via
plug-in arrangements allow easy removal of the module in the event of module failure.
2.18
A.
2.19
A.
Finish
The UPS and battery cabinets shall be cleaned, primed and painted to an agreed RAL colour/
charcoal black.
MONITORING AND CONTROLS
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
The UPS system shall incorporate the necessary controls, instruments and indicators to
allow the operator to monitor the system status and performance, as well as take any
appropriate action.
Circuit Breakers: Rectifier AC input, UPS inverter output.
Switches: Bypass AC input, Maintenance Bypass input, Bypass AC Output
Inverter Start: Inverter start push-button to permit inverter start operation.
Page 11 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.20
A.
2.21
A.
5.
Inverter Stop: Inverter stop push-button to stop inverter operation. The control feature shall
employ a safety feature to prevent inadvertent operation yet still allow rapid shutdown in
the event of an emergency. This shall be achieved by the requirement to depress the stop
button for two seconds before the inverter stops. During this time the audible alarm shall
sound.
6.
Audible Alarm Silence: Cancels internal audible alarm until a new alarm occurs. A red LED
shall indicate alarm and alarm accepted conditions.
7.
Emergency Power Off (EPO): Electronically shuts down the rectifier, inverter, static-switch
and opens the battery contactor.
8.
Mimic Panel: The UPS shall have a Mimic Panel with Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) to
indicate the following modes of operation and conditions:
i.
Rectifier normal operation Green
ii.
Rectifier normal operation Green
iii.
Battery normal operation Green
iv.
Load/static switch normal operation Green
v.
Rectifier/charger alarm Green-flashing
vi.
Battery alarm Green flashing
vii.
Inverter alarm Green-flashing
viii.
Reserve supply alarm Green-flashing
Power History
Accesses all alarms and all UPS operating parameters ten seconds before and one second after
the inverter stops.
Rectifier
Selects module to display alarms, voltage, and total DC current.
Page 12 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.22
A.
2.23
A.
2.24
A.
2.25
A.
2.26
Battery
Selects module to display alarms, voltage and battery current with polarity. When the battery
supplies the inverter, the unit shall display autonomy time remaining. A change in load shall
cause the autonomy indicator to instantaneously indicate the new autonomy time at the new
load.
Inverter
Selects module to display alarms, voltage, phase to neutral and frequency measurements.
Reserve Supply
Selects module to display alarms, voltage, phase to neutral and frequency measurements.
Load/Static Switch
Selects module to display alarms, current per phase, frequency measurements, percentage load
capacity per phase and the peak factor (IPK/IRMS) of each phase of the load current. It shall be
possible to display the total time the load has been supplied by the inverter and by reserve and
number of mains failures and the total duration of these failures.
Rectifier/Battery Alarms
A.
Primary supply fail Phase sequence error
B.
Battery fault Battery contactor open
C.
Shutdown imminent Battery discharging
D.
DC voltage high DC voltage low
E.
Input breaker open DC feedback fault
F.
Battery recharge inhibited Verify DC feedback
G.
Harmonic filter open Rectifier alarm
H.
PCB supply fault Rectifier blocked
Page 13 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.27
Inverter Alarms
A.
Inverter fault Out of synchronization
B.
Over temperature Bypass switch closed
C.
Shutdown imminent System test mode
D.
DC voltage high DC voltage low
E.
Desaturation PCB Supply Fault
F.
Inverter not running Inverter inhibited
G.
Inverter blocked Inverter voltage
H.
Inverter volts low Overload
I.
Stop due to overload Current limit
J.
Inverter static switch fault Inverter feedback fault
K.
Inverter freq. out of range 8% Verifying inverter frequency
L.
Inverter freq. out of range 1% Verifying battery contactor
2.28
Reserve, Load Alarms
A.
Load on reserve Load not supplied
B.
Inverter fault Bypass switch closed
C.
Reserve fault Reserve frequency fault
D.
Reserve voltage Reserve voltage
E.
Static switch fault Overload
F.
Output breaker open Reserve breaker open
G.
Phase sequence error Backfeed protection active
H.
Static switch blocked on inverter static switch fault
I.
Static switch blocked on reserve inhibited
Page 14 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.29
Power History
A.
All alarms and measurements that occur ten seconds before and one second after the inverter
stops shall be stored by the microprocessor. It shall be possible to display all the above in
increments of 0.1 seconds. The information shall be scanned at a rate of 100 ms, giving a total
of 110 samples for a given period.
B.
Automatic Battery Checking: The charging status of the battery shall be automatically monitored
and if out of preset limits the condition shall be shown on the LCD. The monitor shall detect an
open battery cell, shorted cell, or a deteriorated cell.
C.
Battery Temperature Compensation: The rectifier charger shall automatically adjust float voltage
0.13% per C.
2.30
Remote Monitoring and Control
A.
RS-232-C Asynchronous Serial Communications: Digital bi-directional communications shall be

possible between one or more remote computers, terminals, or modem and the UPS via an RS232-C port. The UPS RS-232-C output shall be via a DB9 plug connector connected to a multicom adapter for two independent interfaces (capable of Interfacing with optional On-line
Statistical Monitoring Software) that assist with diagnosis/review of critical fault conditions and
can initiate remote communications, reporting disturbances of operation.
B.
IBM AS/400 Interface: Volts free relay contacts shall be incorporated conforming to the
requirements of the IBM AS/400 computer. UPS to computer interfaces via internal relays. This
interface shall be via DB9 socket and be capable of simultaneous indication of the following four
critical conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.31
A.
UPS On
Utility Failure
Bypass Active
Battery Low
Remote Alarm Interface

The UPS shall have the capability to remotely transmit alarm functions to a remote alarm
annunciator panel and will be capable of annunciating the following six conditions to the
optional display panel or a customer's Building Automation System:
1.
2.
3.
System Normal
Primary Supply Failure
Inverter Failure
Page 15 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

4.
5.
6.
2.32
A.
Remote Alarm Unit (RAU)

A separate alarm unit shall be provided and shall include at least the following monitoring and
alarm functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.33
Shutdown Imminent
Reserve to Load Activated
General Alarm Condition Occurred
System normal
Inverter fault
UPS alarm
LED test
Shutdown imminent
Alarm mute
Mains failure
ON/OFF switch
Load on reserve
Harmonic Filter
A.
The UPS system shall be provided with an input harmonic filter to reduce input total harmonic
current distortion and limit upstream harmonic distortion to less than 3% (THD<3%) and prove
this at commissioning stage using a full load test.
B.
The input power factor is also improved from 0.82 to > 0.90, under nominal operating
conditions.
2.34
SNMP Connectivity (Manage UPSNET)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
This adapter shall provide the ability to manage the UPS via the following methods:
WEB monitoring
Full Featured SNMP
Telnet
Event Email options and SNMP Traps
Out-of-Band Accessibility
Page 16 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.35
UPS Remote Monitoring Software
A.
An SNMP software package shall be provided for the windows environment that utilizes the
onboard serial communications port SNMP for remote monitoring within the Control Room of the
building. The operating condition of the UPS and analog values for Frequency, Current, Voltage,
PF and THD will be available for graphical real-time display respective to each functional unit (or
module) of the UPS; the Input Power Line, the Rectifier, and the Inverter. The UPS Power History
and past operating conditions of the UPS will be logged to disk continuously. Over 50 Alarm
conditions are reported. The user language shall be English.
B.
The software shall be provided that uses the onboard RS232-C communications port (SNMP
RJ45 adaptor) to allow monitoring for power failures and low battery conditions broadcasting
such conditions to network users and perform an unattended, orderly shutdown after a user
defined time period. The on-screen power history graph gives network System Administrators the
ability to track power conditions over a 30 day, 24 hour period. Information is available on
longest outage, shortest outage, power status of the UPS and reasons why the server was shut
down. Scheduled shutdowns provide an on screen countdown timer showing when shutdown
will occur. Modem dial-out to phone or digital pager numbers can be power event driven by preselected parameters. This option can support multiple computers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.36
A.
ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
The UPS unit shall be capable of continuous operation under the following temperature
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
2.37
A.
NOVELL
UNIX
OS/2
Macintosh
VMS
Microsoft Windows v3.1
Windows 95/98/NT
-10C to 40C
Max temperature (8 hrs) = 40C
Note: optimum battery temperature = 25C
Relative Humidity
The UPS unit shall be capable of continuous operation with a relative humidity up to 95% noncondensing at 77F (25C).
Page 17 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.38
Altitude
A.
The UPS unit shall be capable of normal operation without de-rating at an altitude ranging from
0 to 5,000 feet (0 to 1,500 meters).
B.
Audible Noise Level
C.
Audible noise generated by the UPS shall not exceed 52 dBA (= 24 kVA), < 55 dBA (50 kVA),
< 62 dBA (80 kVA) when measured at 1 meter in front of the power converter using scale "A" of
a standard ASA sound level-measuring device.
2.39
A.
2.40
Grounding
The AC power neutral shall be electrically isolated from the chassis ground except for RFI filters.
Bonding of the neutral to the ground, if desired, shall not affect operation
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Before shipment, the manufacturer shall completely test the system to factory standards to assure
compliance with the specification.
B.
Each subassembly shall undergo thorough testing prior to installation in the system. The total
system shall be exposed to a functional load test and shall be subjected to a minimum of 8 hours
"burn-in" test prior to shipment.
C.
A complete factory test report shall be available for each unit and submission made to the
Engineers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Factory Testing
A.
Before shipment, the manufacturer shall completely test the system to factory standards to assure
compliance with the specification.
B.
Each subassembly shall undergo thorough testing prior to installation in the system. The total
system shall be exposed to a functional load test and shall be subjected to a minimum of 8 hours
"burn-in" test prior to shipment.
C.
A complete factory test report shall be available for each unit and submission made to the
Engineers.
Page 18 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.2
Site Start-Up
A.
The manufacturer's field service representative shall provide site start-up and testing during
normal working hours. Individual scheduling requirements can usually be met with 10 working
days advance notice. Site testing shall consist of a complete test of the UPS and accessories by
the UPS manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
B.
Commissioning must be performed by manufacturers approved service representative for

warranty to apply.
C.
Site Testing shall consist of:

1.
2.
3.
Demonstration of compliance with specification

Sequence of operation including emergency cases
Actual load test to confirm following :
a) Back up time Contractor to provide load bank for demonstration of same

b) Sequence of load transfer
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
From normal power to UPS

UPS to generator
Generator to normal power
Any other tests to Engineers requirement.
UPS Limited Warranty

The UPS warranty shall be in effect for 12 months after project handover. The warranty shall
cover all parts and labour for units commissioned by manufacturers approved service
representative
BATTERY LIMITED WARRANTY

The battery manufacturers standard warranty shall be passed through to the end user.
QUALITY
All materials, parts, and components used shall be new and of the highest grade.
Page 19 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.6
A.
System Reliability
The UPS MTBF shall not be less than 50,000 hours for the inverter and 200,000 hours for the
load.
Page 20 of 20
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 263533 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section includes [power] [automatic power] factor correction equipment rated 600 V and
less.
Seismic Performance: Power factor correction equipment shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be
fully operational after the seismic event
B.
The equipment shall be housed in a metal enclosure with an IP 31 protection degree. The
capacitor bank shall have protection against direct contact when a door is opened.
According to the reactive power and the ambient temperature the capacitor bank should be
forced cooling.
C.
The fan shall be controlled by a thermal probe.
D.
Each panel shall be fitted with an earth terminal in the form of a 10 mm diameter threaded
bolt and fitted with two nuts and washers.
E.
DESIGN DATA:
1.
IEC standard
2.
Protection degree
3.
Insulation level
4.
Withstand 60Hs, 1 minute
5.
Short circuit level for 1 second
6.
Gland plated
7.
Incoming cable entry
: 61921 & 60439 1

: IP 21D, Indoor type
: 0.66 kV
: 2.5 kV
: 25 kA
: Un-drilled
: Bottom
Page 1 of 9
Power Factor Correction Equipment
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RATING PLATE
Brass or stainless steel rating plate to be fixed to the capacitor bank giving as a minimum the
following information:
1. Manufacturer
2. Serial number and manufacturing year
3. Rated total output in kilovars (kVAr)
4. Rated voltage in volts
5. Rated frequency in hertz
IEC 61921 standard compliance
2.2
A.
2.3
COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
Self-stick shall be used to identify each components fitted in the capacitor banks (capacitors,
contactors, power factor controller, fuses, reactors [if any]).
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS
A.
The active filter should work on the principle of measurement of harmonic currents and
generate actively a harmonic spectrum in opposite phase to the measured distorting harmonic
current thereby canceling the original harmonics. The Active Filter should be able to filter out
non-zero sequence harmonics or triplen harmonics.
B.
The rating of the Active Filters should be so selected that the Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion
at the point of common coupling is below levels specified under G5/4 Engineering
Recommendations on Planning levels for Harmonic Voltage Distortion
C.
The active filter shall be of parallel configuration and should filter with closed/open loop
control. The active filter should not require special Current Transformers.
D.
The active filter shall monitor all three phases of the low voltage line current in real time by
means of a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
E.
The output of the DSP unit in combination with a micro-controller based system shall generate
a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to control power modules based on IGBT (Insulated
Gate Bipolar Transistor) technology which act as a current source.
F.
The PWM signal shall be of fixed switching frequency.
G.
The system shall be operated under closed loop control and shall have a maximum response
time of not more than 40 milliseconds. The control system shall be such that the active filter
cannot be overloaded
Page 2 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
Simultaneous filtering shall be provided for 20 individual harmonics that shall be individually
programmable per harmonic up to the 50th harmonic.
I.
The filtering efficiency shall be typically better than 97%.
J.
The operating power factor of the active filter shall be programmable over the range 0.7
inductive to 0.7 capacitive. Both fixed and dynamic reactive power compensation shall be
available for selection by the programmer.
K.
The active filter shall be protected against over current, short-circuit, thermal overload and
IGBT bridge abnormal operation.
L.
The Active Filters should be suitable for an ambient temperature of 50 deg C.
M.
The design of the active filters shall be such that the current rating of the filter system can be
increased by the addition of extra power modules.
N.
A GUI (Graphical User Interphase).should be offered on the front facia of the Active Filter
Panel that will allow direct control, programming and monitoring capability without using a
PC.
O.
It should be possible to select and deselect harmonics that need to be filtered. The degree of
the filtering should be selectable per harmonic frequency in amps or as a percentage of the
fundamental or total rms current.
P.
After the installation of the Active Filters and the Third harmonic Filters, harmonic
measurements shall be carried out by the vendor to prove that the Total harmonic voltage
distortion is within the limits confirmed by the vendor, at the time of award of the contract.
Q.
The capacitor bank should have a necessary hardware/software for remote communication
on Modbus etc.
2.4
CAPACITORS
A.
Shall be carefully chosen for suitability to planned installation, taking into account any
harmonics, sensitive equipment, ambient environmental concerns, etc.
B.
Shall be dry, self healing type with individual discharge resistors and be protected against
internal faults, over pressure, etc.
Shall be installed in an electrical distribution system having system voltage of 400 volts
(system highest voltage 440 volts) and shall be rated at 480 volts due to voltage rise caused
by connecting the active harmonic filters. The ambient temperature in the room will be
maintained at 40 C. If the ambient temperature in the room exceeds 40 C then the capacitor
bank and its components should be de rated to 550 volts.
C.
D.
The temperature category shall be 5D as per BS EN 60831, Part 1
Page 3 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Shall be completely leakage proof and of dry type construction without any filling of jelly,
wax, etc. Shall be of the self-healing type utilizing low loss metalized polypropylene film
dielectrics.
F.
The capacitor containers shall be of non metallic design from high temperature withstanding
material and shall not require an earth connection
G.
Each capacitor element shall have an internal HRC fuse combined with a secondary solid foil
electrode to ensure safe disconnection from the circuit at the end of its normal working life.
H.
A suitable device shall be provided to automatically disconnect the capacitor unit from the
supply if excessive pressure is generated inside the unit.
I.
Shall have permanently connected built in discharge resistors to ensure safe discharge of the
capacitors to less than 50 volts in 1 minute after switch off.
J.
The total losses including discharge resistors shall be less than 0.5 watt/kVAr.
K.
Shall be rated for a minimum of 150% continuous current overload and 118% continuous
voltage overload based on the rated voltage of the capacitors.
2.5
A.
POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER

The power factor controller shall be of the electronic type capable of switching capacitor
contactors in up to 12 steps.
B.
The technical specification should be as follows:
Connection type
: Line to line or Line to neutral
Connection features
: Insensitive to CT direction/Insensitive to phase rotation polarity
Voltage input
: 220 / 240 V
Voltage measurement
:
Frequency
: 50 Hz (+/- 1 Hz)
Current input
: CT ../5 A class 1
Step output contacts
: 12, volt free contact
Momentary no voltage function : Disconnection of all steps after voltage greater than 15 ms, automatic
reconnection.
C.
Step configuration programming : Fixed /Auto/Not used
D.
Information provided on LED Screen:
1. Cosine phi
2. Connected steps
3. Period before switching
Page 4 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

4. Step output status (capacitance loos survey)

5. Load and reactive current
6. Total voltage harmonic distortion
7. Voltage, temperature, Power (S,P,Q) (Apparent, Real, Reactive)
8. Current and Voltage up to 31st harmonic
9. Alarm and warning
10. Low power cosine phi
11. Hunting
12. Abnormal cosine phi
13. Overcompensation
14. Frequency not detected
15. Over current
16. Under voltage
17. Over voltage
18. Over temperature
19. Total voltage harmonic distortion
20. Capacitor overload
21. 2 relays programmable as alarm and/or fan control. To be interfaced with the BMS.
22. Power factor setting : Digital, 0.8 ind to 0.9 cap. To be interfaced with the BMS.
23. C/K setting : Automatic search or manual setting. To be interfaced with the BMS.
24. Accuracy class : 1.5%
25. Display : 7 segments + l.e.d.
2.1
CONTACTORS
A.
Contactors shall be used to switch capacitors in or out of service. They shall comply with IEC
60947 and shall have a rating suitable for the service required. The contactors should be
able to provide inrush limitation to reduce the magnitude of transient overvoltage to a safe
level.
B.
The contactors shall be LC1-D range suitable for capacitor switching.
C.
The pre-insertion resistances to limit the inrush current shall only be switched into circuit during
the contactor closing and opening cycle. When the main contacts are closed, the resistances
shall be disconnected. This limit the time the resistances are in circuit and the heat produced
to give a long working life.
D.
The electrical durability at nominal load shall be 300 000 operation cycles.
2.2
A.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. The capacitor bank shall have a suitably rated non auto MCCB or Isolator at the incomer.
It shall have a rotary front operating door mounted handle and should be interlocked with the
door to ensure that the capacitor bank is de-energised when the door is open. The incomer
shall be capable of being padlocked.
Page 5 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
B. Each stage of the capacitor bank shall also have a suitably rated circuit breaker for
overload protection. The circuit breaker shall be adjusted to trip if the RMS current of the
stage exceeds 150%.
C.
C. The circuit breaker shall be 3 pole, 600 volt. The current rating shall be at least 1.5 times
the full load current of the capacitor bank and have a mechanical endurance of a minimum
1000 operations.
2.3
REACTORS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
A.
Detuned reactors shall be used in case of harmonic pollution.

The detuned reactor shall be three phase iron core with cooper winding.
The reactor shall comply with IEC 60289.
Tolerance : +/-5%
Tolerance between phase : Lmax/Lmin <1.07
Tuning order : 2.7 (relative impedance : 14%)
Harmonic current spectrum for tuning order 4.3 :
l3
2%
l1
l5
69%
l1
l7
19%
l1
l11
6%
l1
Permissible overload fundamental current : 1.1 times the nominal current (l1).
Insulation level : 1.1 kV according to IEC 6076
Insulation Class : H
Test voltage (coil to core) : 3 kV 1 minute
Distance between terminals and earth : 20 mm
The 3 phase series reactors to be connected in series with each capacitor stage for harmonic
current suppression and to prevent resonance should be of iron cored type. The current rating
of the reactors should be increased suitably to take into account the effect of harmonics in the
network which could be generated by variable speed drives, dimmers, elevators, UPS
systems, fax machines, computers, fluorescent discharge lamps etc. The offered reactors
should undergo tests wherein the reactors should be subjected to harmonic currents generated
Page 6 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

by harmonic generating test equipment. The magnitude of these harmonic currents should
correspond to the harmonic current magnitude in the network.
B.
The combination of capacitors and reactors should be tuned below the lowest harmonic
present in the network. With the capacitors and suitable series reactors connected it should be
proved through submission of relevant calculations that the Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion
is within the limits as specified in G5/4 Engineering Recommendations on Planning levels for
Harmonic Voltage Distortion and the connection of non-linear loads to Transmission Systems.
C.
If the Total Harmonic Distortion limits are exceeded even with the use of the detuned harmonic
suppression capacitor banks, then appropriately rated Active Filters should be proposed in
conjunction with the detuned capacitor banks to limit the Total Harmonic Distortion to below
the specified limits in G5/4 Engineering Recommendations.
2.4
A.
2.5
TRANSFORMER 400/230 V 50 HZ - not required for =S= capacitor banks

A voltage transformer 400/230 V shall be used to feed the auxiliary supply.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
A.
The current transformer shall comply with IEC 6044 and shall be of 5 A output, class 1, 5 VA
minimum
B.
The current transformer will be supplied by the contractor.
2.6
CABLES
A.
Small wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated 750 V conductor and with core ferruled.
B.
The cross section shall be minimum 1 mm2.
C.
The colours used shall be in accordance with BS 6231
D.
Plastic clips shall be fitted at the end of the conductor to identify it.
2.7
A.
POWER CABLES
The power cable used shall be LSF insulated 1000V type.
Page 7 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in

Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete."
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring and control
data network through appropriate network interface unit.
E.
Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.

1.
D.
Tests and Inspections: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in the following Sections, except optional tests, in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
1.
2.
3.3
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
Current Transformers.
Capacitors and Reactors, Capacitors.
STARTUP SERVICE
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
Page 8 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.
3.
3.4
A.
Connect and run installed motors and equipment to verify the automatic switching of
the capacitors. Verification shall include automatic switching of the total capacity of
installed capacitors.
Provide sufficient inductive/reactive load banks, in combination with resistive load
banks, for the test.
DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, and maintain automatic power factor correction units.
Page 9 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Refer to single line diagrams in drawing package. For every transfer switch or changeover
contactor (CH.O.C.) referred to, provide an Automatic Transfer Switch as per the following
specifications.
B.
Furnish and install automatic transfer & bypass-isolation switch (ATS/BPS) system(s) each
rated at 415V and at 50kA on main boards and generally 35kA on SMDBs and MCCs of
amperage as shown on the single line diagrams. Each automatic transfer shall consist of
an inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor
controller to provide automatic operation. All automatic transfer & bypass-isolation switches
and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
SUMMARY
Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
C.
Codes & Standards
D.
Automatic transfer switches.
E.
Bypass/isolation switches.
F.
Nonautomatic transfer switches.
G.
Remote annunciation systems.
H.
Remote annunciation and control systems.
CODES & STANDARDS
A.
The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of:
B.
UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
Page 1 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction equipment; Automatic
Transfer Switching Equipment
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
E.
NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems
F.
IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
G.
NEMA Standard ICS10-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic Transfer Switches
H.
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General Requirements Transfers Switches
A.
Mechanically Held Transfer Switches
B.
By Pass Isolation Switch
C.
Microprocessor Controller
D.
Enclosure
E.
Controller Display and Keypad
F.
Voltage Frequency and Phase Rotation
G.
Time Delays
H.
Additional Features
I.
Withstand and Closing Ratings
Page 2 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.2
MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH
The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator
shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include
over current disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall
be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency. All
transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and
commonality of parts.The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages,
so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is
minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.All main contacts shall be silver composition.
Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high
withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of
operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 630 amps
and higher shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable
contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars.
Designs utilizing components of moulded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which
are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power
sources, are not acceptable.
Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans, the switch shall be provided
with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency
power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and
remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is
being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100
milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which do not overlap are not acceptable.
Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated
AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided.
2.3
BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH
A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either source and
permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. All
main contacts shall be manually driven.
Page 3 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper bus bar. The only field installed power
connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the bypass-isolation switch. All control
interwiring shall be provided with disconnect plugs.
Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction between the
functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed and operable without opening the enclosure
door. Designs requiring insertion of loose operating handles or opening of the enclosure door to
operate are not acceptable.
Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no interruption of power to the
load (make before break contacts). Designs which disconnect the load when bypassing are not
acceptable. The bypass handle shall have three operating modes: "Bypass to Normal,"
"Automatic," and "Bypass to Emergency." The operating speed of the bypass contacts shall be
the same as the associated transfer switch and shall be independent of the speed at which the
manual handle is operated. In the "Automatic" mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of the
power circuit so that they will not be subjected to fault currents to which the system may be
subjected.
The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: "Closed," "Test," and "Open." The
"Test" mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power system, including the automatic
transfer switches with no interruption of power to the load. The "Open" mode shall completely
isolate the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. When in the
"Open" mode, it shall be possible to completely withdraw the automatic transfer switch for
inspection or maintenance to conform to code requirements without removal of power conductors
or the use of any tools.
When the isolation switch is in the "Test" or "Open" mode, the bypass switch shall function as a
manual transfer switch.
Designs requiring operation of key interlocks for bypass isolation or ATSs which cannot be
completely withdrawn when isolated are not acceptable.
2.4
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER
The controllers sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for
maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an
optional serial communication module.
Page 4 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum application
flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall
be accurate to
1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to 0.2%. The panel shall be
capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to
+85 degrees C.
The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The
harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the
transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer
printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers.
The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer
switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket
for storage of the operators manuals.
All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring
connections.
The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as
follows:
EN 55011:1991
EN 50082-2:1995
EN 61000-4-2:1995
ENV 50140:1993
EN 61000-4-4:1995
EN 61000-4-5:1995
EN 61000-4-6:1996
Emission standard - Group 1, Class A

Generic immunity standard, from which:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity
Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity
Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity
Surge transient immunity
Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity
The controller will be connected to the BECMS to allow the BECMS to initiate lead transfer and to
also monitor its status/position and initiate engine start-up.
2.5
ENCLOSURE
The ATS shall be provided as NEMA standard enclosure specified in the section 618 of this specification unless otherwise shown on the layout drawings.
Page 5 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm industrial grade
type or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door controls shall be provided on a separate
removable plate, which can be supplied loose for open type units.
2.6
CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD

A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for
viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters
shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input
port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:
Nominal line voltage and frequency
Single or three phase sensing
Operating parameter protection
Transfer operating mode configuration
(Open transition, Closed transition or Delayed transition)
All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.
2.7
VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING

Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout and trip setting capabilities (values shown
as % of nominal unless otherwise specified):
Parameter
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Voltage unbalance
Sources
N&E, 3
N&E, 3
N&E
N&E
N&E
Dropout / Trip
70 to 98%
102 to 115%
85 to 98%
102 to 110%
5 to 20%
Pickup / Reset
85 to 100%
2% below trip
90 to 100%
2% below trip
1%below dropout
Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 0.5% over an operating temperature range of 20 C to 60 C.
Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the
display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access.
The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered
unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).
Page 6 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of
voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.
2.8
TIME DELAYS
An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal
source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to
extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply.
A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for
controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to
normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode
function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.
A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from
0 to 60 minutes.
A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5
minute time delay in any of the following modes:
1. Prior to transfer only.
2. Prior to and after transfer.
3. Normal to emergency only.
4. Emergency to normal only.
5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.
The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional Closed Transition
and Delayed Transition operation:
1. 1 to 5 minute time delay on failure to synchronize normal and emergency sources prior to
closed transition transfer.
2. 0.1 to 9.99 second time delay on an extended parallel condition of both power
during closed transition operation.
sources
3. 0 to 5 minutes time delay for the load disconnects position for delayed transition operation.
Page 7 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended parallel time,
which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments.
All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device
connected to the serial communications port.
2.9
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset
modes. The test
position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on
either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.
A SPDT contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal.
The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach
proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal
source restores before the load is transferred.
Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed
when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source.
LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when
the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected
to the emergency source (red).
LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency
sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.
The following features shall be built-in to the controller, but capable of being activated through
keypad programming or the serial port only when required by the user.
Provide the ability to select commit/no commit to transfer to determine whether the load should
be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is
ready to accept the load.
Page 8 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to
emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer
to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.
An Inphase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that
motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external
control of power sources. The inphase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer.
The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer
switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device.
Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser
shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user
shall be able to:
1. Enable or disable the routine.
2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3. Set the start time,
-
time of day
day of week
week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)
Set the duration of the run.

At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the
generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies power to the real
time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information.
System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a System Status screen which shall be
readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the ESC key a maximum of two
times. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example:
Normal Failed
Load on Normal
TD Normal to Emergency
2 min15s
Page 9 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display coded system status
messages, which must be explained by references in the operators manual, are not permissible.
Self-Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which
may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed.
Data Logging The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events,
even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and
maintained in a non-volatile memory:
1. Event Logging
a. Data and time
b. Data and time
c. Data and time
d. Data and time
e. Data and time
f. Data and time
2. Statistical Data
a. Total number
b. Total number
c. Total number
d. Total number
and reason for transfer normal to emergency.

and reason for transfer emergency to normal.
and reason for engine start.
engine stopped.
emergency source available.
emergency source not available
of
of
of
of
transfers.
transfers due to source failure.
days controller is energized.
hours both normal and emergency sources are available.
Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed in the ATS controller to
enable serial communications. The serial communications shall be capable of a direct connect or
multi-drop configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless integration of existing or
new communication transfer devices. The communication will be directly integrated into the
BECMS.
2.10
WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS

The ATS/BPS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit
current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans.
The ATS/BPS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with
that standard's 1 and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. ATS/BPSs which are not tested and labeled
with 1 and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series, or specific breaker ratings only, are
not acceptable.
Page 10 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components
and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage,
frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements.
The manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements
of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand and
closing ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No
exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification.
The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001.
3.2
DEMONSTRATION
A.
[Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified
below.
B.
Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
Page 11 of 11
Transfer Switches
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes lightning protection system for ordinary structures.
B.
Section includes lightning protection system for the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Ordinary structures.
Down Conductors
Air terminations
Product requirements
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
A.
Include layouts of the lightning protection system, with details of the components to be
used in the installation.
Include raceway locations needed for the installation of conductors.
Details of air terminals, ground rods, ground rings, conductor supports, splices, and
terminations, including concealment requirements.
Include roof attachment details, coordinated with roof installation.
Calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of metal bodies.
Coordination Drawings: Lightning protection system Shop Drawings, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Lightning protection cabling attachments to roofing systems and accessories.

Lightning protection strike termination device attachment to roofing systems,
coordinated with the roofing system manufacturer.
Page 1 of 8
Lighting Protection for Structures
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
Lightning protection system components penetrating roofing and moisture protection

systems and system components, coordinated with the roofing system manufacturer.
B.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of roof adhesive for attaching the roof-mounted air terminal
assemblies, approved by the roofing-material manufacturer.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
CONDUCTORS FOR HORIZONTAL AIR TERMINATIONS

Use Horizontal air termination or down conductor. Minimum dimension BSEN 62305
(Part III) Form - Tape Material - Copper, annealed. Coverings PVC, Tinned Accessories:
Ridge Saddle; conductor clips, - metallic, non metallic; glazing bar holdfast; slate holdfast;
backplate holdfast; all accessories sized to suit conductors.
CONDUCTORS FOR SELF SUPPORTING AIR TERMINATIONS.
Use Air termination, vertical Minimum dimension BSEN 62305 (Part III) Form Rod; Strike
Pad Material- Copper, hard drawn. Coverings Tinned Accessories - Terminal base; ridge
saddle; rod brackets; rod to tape coupling.
CONDUCTOR JOINTS
First Conductor Form tape; material copper Dimensions TO BSEN 62305 (III) Lightning
protection system & BSEN 50164 for materials Second conductor Form rod; material
copper Dimensions To BSEN 62305 (III) table 4 minimum for lightning protection system Solid
joint -Brazed or welded, exo thermic Disconnecting test joint (compliance to BSEN 50164
for materials) Square clamp, oblong clamp, plate clamp or screw- down clamp (compliance to
BSEN 50164 for materials.
TAPE FIXING DEVICES

Secure bare copper tape to structure with fixing devices which avoid piercing tape and
ensure 3mm (minimum) clearance of tape from structure, at 450mm maximum, centres. Nonconducting material.
Page 2 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.5
BUILDING STRUCTURE EARTH ELECTRODES FOR LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A.
2.6
Standard - BSEN 62305 (III IV) Form Risk of Loss of life (R1), Risk of loss service (R2), Risk
of loss of cultural heritage (R3) and Risk of loss of economic value (R4) Use where indicated
on drawings and ensure full continuity through structural down conductors/tapes etc to
electrodes e.g. piles, ring beams etc.
EARTH ELECTRODE INPECTION FACILITIES
A.
2.7
Provide light weight inspection kit and lid for each connection between earth conductor and
associated earth electrode system. Install so that top is flush with finished ground or floor
level. Ensure enclosure provides adequate access for testing purposes. Provide pit Builders
work details for approval.
MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDS
A.
2.8
Provide main equipotential bonds in accordance with BS 7430 and BS 7671 to connect all
exposed metalwork to the lightning, protection system. Material - Insulated cable, single core
to BS 6004 joint compliance to BSEN 50164. Use no joints in main equipotential bonds
SUPPLEMENTARY EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDS
A.
2.9
Provide supplementary equipotential bonds to BS 7430 and BS 7671. Joints not allowed in
these bonds
DISSIMILAR METALS
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
Ensure, where dissimilar metals are used for system, that purpose made jointing materials are
used such that corrosion and deterioration of the electrical connection are not caused. Ensure
bonding connections to other metal parts of building are electrolytically compatible with those
metal parts. Use the guidance given in BS 7430 Table 8 when bonding dissimilar materials.
COPPER TAPE JOINTS

Provide waterproof protection at joints subject to moisture by using Denso Tape. Joint copper
tapes by brazing, using zinc-free brazing metal with melting point at least 600C or exothermic welding (If PVC coated, then 160 C, if hard drawn copper, then 250 C).
ALUMINIUM TAPE JOINTS
A. Provide waterproof protection at joints subject to moisture Joint aluminium tapes by welding to
BS EN 1011-4.
Page 3 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

B. Use high strength driving cap in contact with driven rod and couplings of compatible material
fully enclosing the rod threads. Interconnect electrodes using 25 x 3 mm bare copper tape. Provide light weight inspection fit, permanently labelled, for electrodes installed through cable
drawpit bases. Material, minimum size as BS 7430 Table 4 Molecularly bonded copper clad
steel rods to BS7430 or BSEN 62305 for soil resistively > 20 Accessories - Rod to tape clamp
or U-bolt clamp. Accessories sized to suit earth rod and connector. Compliance to BSEN
50164.
2.12
A.
2.13
For bolted connections use crimp type lugs compressed by automatic tool to achieve correct
pressure and crimp depth. Make connections between tape and equipment using high tensile
grade brass bolts with brass nuts, washers and locking devices. Use phosphor bronze bolts,
nuts and washers where connections are liable to corrosion. The connectors should comply to
BSEN 50164.
LIGHTNING ELECTRODES (Dedicated lightning protection earthing pits)
A.
Locate electrodes in undisturbed ground not less than 2m distant from building /structure
protected, and away from telecommunication and pilot cables and metallic fences.
B.
Drive rods vertically into ground with purpose designed electric hammer. (Where
impenetrable strata encountered at shallow depth, drive at 30 to horizontal).
C.
2.4m minimum depth below finished ground surface.
D.
Locate electrode just below finished ground level.
E.
Space around building perimeter as indicated on drawings and as required by BSEN 62305
(Part III).
F.
Install interconnecting or electrode tape 750mm below finished ground level, rising vertically
at each electrode. Connect groups of electrodes to main earth conductor via bolted link in
inspection pit as BSEN 62305 (Part III) for test purposes.
G.
Backfilling immediately surrounding the electrodes shall have low specific resistivity and good
water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.
H.
Where earth rods are to be installed through the base slab of a building, double flange
electrode seals shall be provided. As indicated, either the rods shall be driven or the seals
fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals handed to the building contractor for him to
Page 4 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven at a later date. Harmful ingress of water shall
be avoided when driving the rods.
2.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.15
A.
2.16
LIGHTNING ELECTRODES USING PILES

Standard BS7430 & BSEN 62305.
Provide connection bonds between RC columns and Pile Caps with copper PVC sheathed tape
as detailed on drawings.
Tape dimensions as indicated on drawings.
Provided EXOTHERMIC welded connections or clamps as indicated on detail drawings
AIR TERMINATIONS
The type and location of air terminations shall be as indicated. Fixing distance of the tape
clips must not exceed 1000m on the horizontal surface. Where indicated, metal framed or
metal clad-roofs or metal copings which form part of all of an air termination shall be bonded
across joints between constituent parts. Refer to the metal thickness table in the BSEN 62305
(Part III). The bonding may be carried out by the specialist-roofing contractor but where this is
not the case the bonds shall be made as indicated; no drilling of roofing or coping shall be
done without the approval of the consultant. Metalwork of structures, chimneys, pipes,
cowlings, plant, walkways, handrails and similar components of the building that are exposed
at or above roof level shall be bonded to the nearest air termination. Must also provide a
suitable size air-terminal as per the BSEN 52305 (Part III) where a signal aerial or aviation
light is mounted on the structure it shall be protected as indicated.
DOWN CONDUCTORS
A.
The type and location of down conductors shall be as indicated. No aluminium conductor
shall be buried in the ground. If Column rebar is used as a dedicated down conductor, please
ensure that the overall resistance along the re-bar length doesnt exceed 0.2 ohms. Where
rebar is used the contractor shall ensure that a minimum of two re bar in each column
designated as a down conductor is used. To ensure electrical continuity is maintained
consecutive rebars shall be overlapped at a distance equal to 20 times the diameter of the
rebar. The overlap will be secured using propriety U clamps or welded in accordance with BS
EN 62305.
B.
Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of a building and an earth
Page 5 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

electrode and conductors interconnecting pipe electrodes will be PVC sheathed.

C.
Conductors in other locations shall be sheathed unless otherwise indicated. Sheaths shall be of
PVC, extruded, shrunk-on or similarly applied the colour shall be as required by the consultant
(green/yellow). Where the profile of the building would cause an overhang or re-entrant loop
to be formed in a down conductor the consultant shall be informed.
D.
Metalwork, including pipe work, ductwork and cables, adjacent to down conductors shall be
bonded to them unless the distance between them provides adequate isolation. The distance
necessary to provide adequate isolation shall be as indicated
E.
Consultants approval of the type of clips, saddles and holdfasts to be used shall be obtained
before work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not exceed 500mm on the
vertical surface and 1000mm on the horizontal surface. No fixings shall be made into joints
in masonry
F.
Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials: For copper conductors, gun metal,
aluminium silicon bronze or naval brass; For aluminium conductors, aluminium, aluminium
alloy or stainless steel; For general areas inside buildings screws and nuts shall be of
cadmium electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside buildings, in plant rooms or other
locations as indicated they shall be of stainless steel.
G. No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be done
without the approval of the Engineer. Drilling and cutting of the outside fabric of the building
shall be carried out only after approval has been given by the Engineer All the incoming cables
to the building (Service entrants) must be protected with a suitable surge protector in compliance to the BSEN 62305 (Part III). Co-ordinated surge protectors shall also be applied in accordance to the risk value derived and the Lightning protection level employed as per the BSEN
62305 (Part II & Part IV).
2.17
SURGE PROTECTION
A.
In accordance with section 618:1400 and in accordance with BS EN 62305 surge

protection devices shall be provided to ensure that the buildings electrical systems are
protected against surges due to direct/indirect lightning strikes.
B.
The work required shall include all materials and labour and auxiliaries required to furnish
and install complete surge suppression for the protection of the building electrical and
electronics systems from the effects of line induced transient voltage surge and lightning
discharge (Refer to BSEN 62305 Part IV).
C.
All surge protection devices to be used shall be from the same manufacturer who supplies the
structural lightning protection.
Page 6 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
Surge protectors shall be manufactured for the specific type and voltage of the electrical
service and shall provide clamping for both normal (L-N) and common (LN-G) mode
protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install lightning protection components and systems according to [UL 96A] [NFPA 780].
B.
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid bends less
than 90 degrees and 8 inches in radius and narrow loops.
C.
Conceal conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of
building. Comply with requirements for [concealed installations in UL 96A] [concealed
systems in NFPA 780].
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.2
Roof penetrations required for down conductors and connections to structural-steel

framework shall be made using listed through-roof fitting and connector assemblies with
solid rods and appropriate roof flashings. Use materials approved by the roofing
manufacturer for the purpose. Conform to the methods and materials required at
roofing penetrations of the lightning protection components to ensure compatibility with
the roofing specifications and warranty.
Install conduit where necessary to comply with conductor concealment requirements.
Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's
written instructions.
Ground Ring Electrode: The conductor shall be not less than the main-size lightning conductor.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Aboveground concealed connections, and connections in earth or concrete, shall be done by

exothermic welds or by high-compression fittings listed for the purpose.
B.
Aboveground exposed connections shall be done using the following types of connectors,
listed and labeled for the purpose: [bolted connectors] [exothermic weld] [high compression]
[crimp].
C.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Page 7 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.3
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in
the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such
materials.
B.
Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.
3.4
A.

Special Inspections: a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:
1.
2.
B.
Perform inspections as required to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

Perform inspections to obtain an LPI certification.
Prepare test and inspection reports and certificates.
Page 8 of 8
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
General Requirements
2.
Description of required solution
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and
data cabling associated with system panels and devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B.
Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
C.
D.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
E.
LAN: Local area network.
F.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
G.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
Page 1 of 5
Communications Backbone Cabling
Project:

Works:
Title:

H.
1.4
Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at

entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
A.
The overall system requirements for the cabling infrastructure will follow that of a Telephone
cabling system primarily to develop and deploy ETISALAT FTTX (Fibre to Home), based on GPON
technology.
B.
Tenderers shall ensure that the equipment offered and installed is new and is the latest design at
time of installation and prices should take this into account.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
DESCRIPTION of REQUIRED SOLUTION

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing conduit and trunking system suitable for the
necessary cabling works to the approval of ETISALAT. The Contractor shall liaise with ETISALAT to
ensure that cable entry ducts and internal conduit/trunking tray installations are approved prior to
carrying out the installation work. All external cable ducts, manholes and draw-pits shall be of a
size and specification that is fully complying with latest ETISALAT regulations approved by
ETISALAT
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION

Cabling
1.
B.
All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements
as outlined in the EN 50174, National Electric Code (NEC) Articles 725, 760, 770, and
800 and the appropriate local codes.
Cable Pathway
1.
In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are not
available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, horizontal cabling with
cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry.
2.
Cable bundles shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure
and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals.
3.
Plenum rated cable ties shall be used in all appropriate areas.
Page 2 of 5
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
D.
4.
The contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers requirements for bending radius and
pulling tension of all data and voice cables.
5.
Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling
grid.
6.
Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or
any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.
Fire Stopping
1.
Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or
created by the contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the
contractor.
2.
Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner,
which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this
work.
3.
Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown
on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor's work.
4.
Any openings created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part
of this work.
Contractor Responsibility
1.
1.7
The contractor shall be responsible for damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a
result of his work. Repair of surfaces, including painting, shall be included as necessary.
WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING
A.
Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall be governed by
the provisions of this specification and the applicable drawings.
B.
Only cabling products approved by the ETISALAT for outside use shall be installed in Locations
external to the confines of the building.
Page 3 of 5
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
TELEPHONE OUTLETS
Flush-mounted modular faceplate
1.
Faceplates shall be available in single, duplex, quadplex, or sixplex arrangement in a

single gang configuration.
2.
Faceplate outlet openings shall be numbered on both sides for installation and
maintenance identification.
3.
Faceplates shall be in same finish as other accessories.
CATEGORY 6A UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLES

The cabling system must be designed and installed according to
1.
2.
3.
ISO 11801 Class E 2nd edition and also meet the following;
EN 50173 Class E 2nd edition
TIA/EIA 568B Cat 6 Addendum 1
B.
The cabling system must meet the Permanent Link and Channel performances defined in these
standards, or better.
C.
The cable shall be a high performance 4 pair Category 6A 23AWG Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP) with solid copper conductors, polyolefin insulated PVC or low-flammability sheath and
colour coded pairs. The pairs will be around X shaped filler. The cable must meet as per EN
50288-5/6. The flammability performance must meet IEC 60332-1 as a minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
WORKMANSHIP: Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike
manner. Wiring colour codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform
throughout the system. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform. Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining ETISALAT approval to the installation.
Page 4 of 5
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.2
PENETRATIONS OF WALLS FLOORS AND CEILINGS
A.
The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior consent of
the Engineer.
B.
Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been provided for
the Contractor such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor in compliance with applicable
code requirements and as directed by the Engineer.
C.
Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided for the
Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor as required by code and as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of on-site activities,
submit to Client for review by the Engineer, details of any special systems to be used.
Page 5 of 5
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.
Section Includes:
2.
Definitions
3.
Standards
4.
System Requirements
5.
Voice Alarm System Components
DEFINITIONS
A.
Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones,
with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker
alternative program signals.
B.
VU: Volume unit.
C.
Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be arranged for
selective switching between different channels.
1.4
STANDARDS
1.
NFPA 72
2.
EN54
3.
BS EN 60849
Page 1 of 12
Public Address Systems
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.5
4.
BS 5839 Part 1
5.
BS5839 Part 8
6.
Local Civil Defence Authority
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
The contractor is to develop the design from the principles laid out on the Engineers drawings.
B.
Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprehensive
documentation comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of
components, maintenance manuals etc for engineer's study and approval.
C.
The Voice Alarm / Evacuation system must be fully integrated with the Fire Alarm system and the
background music/public address system. The Voice Alarm system must communicate and accept
necessary information to activate alarms and warnings in the appropriate areas of the building
according to the level of alarm.
D.
The contractor and his specialist Voice Alarm Equipment supplier will be responsible for
developing the evacuation plan for the building and detailing this into a detailed cause and effect
schedule for the whole building in liaison with the Fire Alarm Specialist Equipment supplier, the
Engineer and with the local Civil Defence department.
E.
The contractor shall be required to train and instruct client's personnel in the correct use,
operation and supervision of the system preferably prior to the handing over of the project. The
contractor shall ensure that system training is carried out by an experienced system trainer direct
from the specialist equipment manufacturer.
F.
The contractor shall ensure that all system components offered shall be manufactured by one
manufacturer who shall also be on the local civil defence authority's list of approved
manufacturers for a minimum of 5 years. The Contractor shall be responsible for all submittals of
complete design information to local Civil Defense Authority and for obtaining all necessary
approval certificates prior to the commencement of the installation and upon completion.
G.
The contractor will install all components in compliance with approved manufacturer installation
methods and in compliance with standards described above.
Page 2 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.6
VOICE ALARM SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
The system shall be integrated with the fire detection system and the background music/public
address system. The integrated voice alarm system shall comprise of voice command centre (units
with facility to control the background music/public address system audio) as shown in the
contract schematics and distributed amplifiers, adopting the relevant standards of wiring (Class
B/Class AB). All loop cabling and any other components and accessories deemed necessary for
a safe, reliable and satisfactory system shall conform to the relevant and applicable requirements
and recommendations of NFPA 72, BS 5839 and EN 54.
B.
The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice communication
zones as indicated on the drawings and schematics. The system shall be configured to allow on
site modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to facilitate future
changes or alterations to the buildings.
C.
All distributed amplifier unit components and devices and all central amplifier racks shall be
connected to two-wire loop circuits with each component adhering to the relevant standards of
wiring. Removal or disconnection of any component from the loop or short circuits on the loop,
shall not affect the functioning and performance of other components on the same loop and on
the system.
D.
The system racks shall be allocated addresses from the fire alarm panel at the time of system
power up as is the case with fire alarm devices. Interface units on the Fire Alarm System are to
be provided accordingly.
E.
Facility to introduce / change delay periods in operating speaker circuits, shall be possible to
program from the FACP without the need to change any hardware. All the programming related
to voice alarm speaker circuits shall either be provided through the FACP or a separate Voice
Alarm control panel.
F.
The distributed amplifier rack units shall house the amplifiers and batteries in locations
indicated. Speaker circuits from them shall be wired as shown in the typical schematics. The
distributed amplifier racks shall be mounted close to the broadcast zone they are to serve so that
the loudspeaker wiring is minimized. Each of these units shall house the power supply, battery
backup and full monitoring facilities. These units shall be modular in construction allowing for a
high degree of flexibility so that the performance can be closely matched to the requirements.
This unit shall meet the Voice Alarm Standards as detailed in NFPA 72 and BS 5839 Part 8.
These units shall have the facility to accept background music from the Audio Network Hub as
indicated and override this when required in case of fire.
G.
The Voice Command Unit for audio controls shall be designed to complement the fire alarm
control panel. It shall provide manual access to the voice alarm section of the system. The voice
command centre shall be adjacent to the fire alarm control panel unit. Interlinking between the
FACP and the Voice Alarm Command Unit shall adhere to the relevant standard of wiring.
Page 3 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

Silencing and sounding and the programming of the phased evacuation of the speaker circuits
shall all be set-up from the Voice Command control panel. Controls on the voice command unit
shall be available for up to 64 broadcast zones of the voice alarm. Standard configurations
shall allow for recorded Alert and Evacuate messages as well as an emergency microphone to
be operated in each area. In addition up to four other recorded messages shall be stored in this
unit.
H.
The distributed amplifier units and central racks shall be wired to the detection loops of the fire
alarm system. This shall be in addition to the voice command cable interlinking the voice
command centre for audio control of the distributed amplifier racks and also in addition to the
audio network cabling which will provide Background Music channels to the EVAC system.
I.
The Voice Evacuation system shall cover all normally accessible areas including car parks,
service areas, Back of House areas, public area, stairs etc.
J.
The system shall be capable of being used for everyday background music and public
announcement duties with the fire alarm initiated emergency announcements overriding all other
facilities.
K.
The Distributed Amplifier Rack Units shall include amplifiers for local areas. These units shall be
capable of complete standalone operation for the areas it is assigned should the
network/interface connections fail.
L.
In the event of a catastrophic failure occurring on any individual component within the
Distributed Amplifier Unit or the centralized racks, pre-recorded emergency alarm messages
shall still be available at the voice command audio control unit.
M.
Initiation of voice alarm shall take immediate priority and shall cancel all other PA operations.
N.
The voice alarm system shall be capable of broadcasting pre-recorded emergency alarm
messages and live speech in the event of fire detection system activating.
O.
The systems shall be capable of broadcasting up to four different pre-recorded messages to

different zones or group of zones simultaneously.
P.
Evacuate signal relates to a general evacuation message and alert message corresponds to
standby instructions.
Q.
In the event of mains AC failure, the system shall automatically switch to an integral fully
monitored DC power supply. This is sized to support the system for 24 hours in standby
conditions (quiescent) and for a further 30 minutes use at full load.
R.
In addition a FIRE DRILL and an ALL CLEAR message shall be incorporated into the operation.
Page 4 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

S.
A firemans microphone shall be fitted to the Voice Command Centre units. These shall allow
direct voice instructions to be transmitted to a single zone, selected zones or all zones.
T.
When a firemans microphone is operated, this shall override any automatic voice alarm signal
being transmitted to the zone selected. The Alert and Evacuate pre-recorded messages will be
maintained in other zones while live voice fire announcements are being broadcast to selected
loudspeaker zones.
U.
The Voice Evacuation system shall be capable of broadcasting up to 32 channels of high quality
background music simultaneously, announcements or information to all areas.
V.
The Volume Control and Source Selector shall be linked with Voice Command Centre over
CAT6 cable (daisy chain).This link shall be disabled automatically in case of Alarm.
W.
Where there are any other independent systems e.g. sound distribution system, audio-visual
presentation, a public address announcement shall override the transmission to selected zones
or all zones.
X.
Paging any zone shall not interrupt music in other zones.
Y.
Provide BMS monitoring of the Voice Alarm System. Provide necessary LON works and BAC net
interfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VOICE COMMAND CENTRE WITH AUDIO CONTROLS
A.
The Voice Command Unit will be a standalone DSP based voice alarm panel installed next to the
Fire Alarm Control Panel connected to the FACP with the wiring conforming to the relevant
standards. These units shall initiate the broadcast of live speech in the designated public areas
using manual controls. The use of these units shall be primarily for broadcast of fire messages and
other optional auxiliary messages which are site and application specific.
B.
There shall be an audible indication by an integral buzzer to announce a local Voice Command Unit
fault.
C.
The Voice Command Unit shall also have an Integral LCD TFT 3 Touch Screen, with fault display
capability.
D.
The user controls on the unit shall be key switch enabled to allow authorized use of system controls.
Page 5 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
A/B circuiting should be provided by the Command Unit. The Voice Command Unit shall have total
critical path surveillance up to 2000 event/fault log.
F.
The Voice Command Unit shall also have provision for TCP/IP Connectivity.
G.
The Voice Command Unit shall have an integral Fire Man microphone with Press to talk button for
Emergency Announcements by Authorized users. It shall also have an Emergency Button with
Cover for manual triggering of Evacuation. It shall be possible to connect 10 external all call
microphones for fire announcements.
H.
The Voice Command Unit shall be capable of storing 4 auxiliary messages (as mentioned below)
that can be initiated at this unit for broadcast on the secure fire alarm network with each message
of 45 second duration.
1.
Test
2.
All Clear
3.
Alert
4.
Evacuation
I.
All the Voice Command Units shall be IP 40 rated.
J.
The specialist supplier will include for providing sample messages in Arabic and English for the
engineer to review.
K.
The Unit shall have up to 4 hours of message storage capacity.
L.
The Unit shall Integrate Mixer, Matrix, Feedback Killer, Equalizer, Crossover and Limiter.
M.
The Unit shall also feature programmable Audio Inputs.
2.2
AMPLIFIER RACK UNITS
A.
The Distributed Rack Unit shall be mains powered with stand-by generator back-up and battery
backed unit and shall be normally installed near its loudspeaker circuit area. They shall amplify
audio signal for broadcast to its zones of loudspeakers. The audio signal shall be either live or
pre-recorded messages. The live speech shall be from the microphone and the pre-recorded
messages from voice command units memory, no external module or unit shall be used for
playing Messages.
B.
Each of Voice Command Units shall consist of 8 loudspeaker circuits with each channel powered
Page 6 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

from separate amplifier module, to secure the broadcast of messages. Amplification power in
each DAU will be up to 1000W. Multiple units will be provided to suit the zoning arrangement
indicated on the drawings.
C.
The amplification of audio shall be by means of amplifier modules installed in the Distributed
racks. There shall be a number of modules available with various power ratings to meet the
loudspeaker requirements. Their frequency bandwidth shall be 40Hz to 20Khz.
D.
The Distributed racks shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72/ BS5839 Part 8/EN 54. Each of
the distributed racks shall be given a label by the Fire Alarm Control Panel to identify its location
in the system. The label shall be automatically displayed along with any events related to the
distributed racks.
E.
The Distributed rack shall facilitate optional local live speech. The global speech shall be
broadcasted from the Voice Command Unit microphones via the audio loop to all the Distributed
racks and its loudspeaker circuits in the system.
F.
The Distributed racks shall be IP 40 rated.
G.
The Distributed racks shall be connected to the audio network system to allow broadcast of the
background music as a low priority task. This shall be done via the card installed in the Slave
Voice Controller units in these racks. The communication shall be over fiber or patch chord as per
the distance of the rack from the central rack.
H.
The Distributed Amplifier units to be located in back of house core areas shall be wall mounting
type.
I.
Central Amplifier Racks feeding to the basement area speakers will be mounted in 19 racks.
Provide exact size as necessary to accommodate the amplifiers, spare amplifiers, batteries, audio
network hubs etc.
J.
A spare amplifier must be provided in each rack in case of failure. Automatic changeover sealed
lead acid batteries will be provided in each DAU, to provide 24hour standby / 2 hour operation
reserve capacity.
K.
All the amplifiers shall be Class D Type.
2.3
PAGING CONSOLE
A.
This shall be supplied as a desk-mounted console and shall be installed as shown in the Layouts,
shall have the following features:
B.
The Paging Console shall have 96 Zone/ Zone Group Capacity. It shall also feature Evacuation,
Page 7 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

power and Fault indication facility.

C.
It shall have Touch Screen User interface (integrated fully Colored display) with zone buttons and
it shall also be able to monitor the Loudspeaker circuits via the Paging Microphone.
D.
This Screen shall display the zones, messages and speech levels. It shall also have preannouncement chime selection capability and Background Music Control; in short it shall provide
detailed system activity indication.
E.
It shall be connected to the Voice Control Unit via RJ45 Port, it shall also have POE capability.
F.
It shall be fed with 24V DC power.
2.4
SPEAKERS
A.
Ceiling Mounted Speakers to be EN54 or UL Listed.
B.
The speaker shall be either suitable for flush mounting to a false ceiling of any configuration or
for surface mounting if there is no false ceiling. It shall be equipped with multiple tapping
matching transformer to provide easy control of speaker sound volume. Supporting brackets to
mount the speaker onto false ceilings of different configurations shall be provided. The speaker
shall not have any screw fixing arrangement on its grill. The diameter of the speaker shall not be
more than 180mm.
C.
It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics:

1.
on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than 10 dB over the frequency range.
2.
80Hz to 18500 KHz (BS6840).
3.
Sensitivity not to be less than 90dB/W.
4.
Nominal input power to be at least 6W.
D.
The speakers shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link in ceramic terminal.
E.
Re-Entrant Horns
1.
The speaker shall be of medium power metal horn with a high degree of weather
protection making it suitable for most external applications. It shall be equipped with a
multiple tapping matching transformer to provide easy control of speaker sound volume.
Supporting brackets to mount the speaker onto different configurations shall be provided.
The speaker shall not have any screw fixing arrangement on its grill. The size of the
speaker shall not be more than 203mm (wide) x 203mm (height) x 229mm(deep).
Page 8 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

F.
G.

1.
on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than 10 dB over the frequency range
2.
150Hz to 14-20KHz
3.
Sensitivity not to be less than 103dB/W
4.
Nominal input power to be at least 25W.
H.
The speakers shall be with omni directional swivel bracket mounting and shall be IP67 protected.
I.
The horn speakers shall operate as detailed in the sequence of operation of the fire alarm
specifications.
J.
The specialist equipment supplier will review any car park layout drawings and provide a
suitable speaker to suit the spacings indicated and meet the sound levels and performance
required by the relevant sections of BS 5839 and NFPA 72.
K.
The speaker shall be constructed using a fire retardant material and include thermal fusible link in
ceramic terminal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B.
Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching
networks where required.
C.
Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable
marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system
wiring diagrams.
D.
Equipment Cabinets and Racks:
Page 9 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and arrange
controls symmetrically. Mount monitor panel above the amplifiers.
Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear
of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without disturbing
other items or connections.
Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is occupied by
panels.
E.
Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. Install in central
equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.
F.
Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.
G.
Floor-Mounted Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet covers. Secure
outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas.
H.
Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks to
loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG and conductors from microphone receptacles
to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG.
I.
Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where
exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
J.
Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settings
indicated on Drawings.
K.
Connect wiring according to Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" and

Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."
3.2
A.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PRELIMINARY TESTS
1.
Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional and
operation performance tests including test of each installed initiating and notification
appliance. Tests shall include the meggering of all system conductors to determine that
the system is free from grounded, shorted or open circuits. The megger test shall be
conducted prior to the installation of fire alarm equipment. If deficiencies are found
corrections shall be made and the system shall be retested to assure that it functions.
Page 10 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
C.
ACCEPTANCE TEST
1.
Provide the service of competent, factory trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of
the adjustments and commissioning of the system. Testing shall be in full accordance with
BS5839 Part 1 and Part 8 and NFPA 72.
2.
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short
circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.
3.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
4.
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
5.
Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal actuates.
6.
Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.
7.
Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.
8.
Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.
9.
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
10.
Test and confirm that all speaker circuits are monitored and interfaced with the Fire Alarm
System. Ensure appropriate message display on Fire Alarm panel and on the BMS.
11.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be tested on the
system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the Fire Panel and
the correct activation of the control points.
SYSTEM TESTING
1.
Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the
manufacturers manual.
2.
Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and trouble
indication.
3.
Test the operation of control module for proper response
4.
Test all primary power supplies.
5.
Test all secondary power supply
Page 11 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

3.3
A.
6.
Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire alarm panel.
7.
Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described in the
description of works and confirm whether the interfacing logic and sequence of operation is
as per the engineers approved program.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train, Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the public address system and equipment. Refer to Section 017900
"Demonstration and Training."
Page 12 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, digital video recorder, data
transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment.
B.
DEFINITIONS
C.
AGC: Automatic gain control.
D.
BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.
E.
B/W: Black and white.
F.
CCD: Charge-coupled device.
G.
FTP: File transfer protocol.
H.
IP: Internet protocol.
I.
LAN: Local area network.
J.
MPEG: Moving picture experts group.
K.
NTSC: National Television System Committee.
L.
M.
PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.
N.
RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.
Page 1 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

O.
TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.
P.
Q.
WAN: Wide area network.
1.3
A.
The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a IP Based
CCTV monitoring system as herein specified and as indicated on the drawings and as per local
authorities requirement
B.
All equipment and materials used should be standard components, regularly manufactured,
readily available within the UAE and regularly utilised in the manufacturers system. All
equipment and materials installed should have an adequate spares backup supply for up to a five
year period from the time of system commissioning.
C.
All systems and components should have been thoroughly tested and proven in the Gulf
environment.
D.
All systems and components supplied should be provided with the availability of a toll free 24
hour technical support phone number from the manufacturer. The phone number should allow for
immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the end user.
E.
The contractor should design, supply and test a complete integrated IP based CCTV and Digital
Video Management system for the video surveillance monitoring and recording.
F.
The complete system shall be supplied by a specialist Subcontractor having at least five years
experience in the installation and maintenance of similar systems.
G.
The video output of cameras shall be monitored at the Main Security Office.
H.
The intelligent keypad shall have the ability to select camera outputs and operate Pan, Tilt &
Zoom Control functions
I.
Sequencing of any group of cameras shall be possible on any monitor, with dwell times
adjustable for each camera which should be set depending on the importance of the area being
covered.
J.
The CCTV system should be supported from a UPS, the UPS and associated wiring & DBS outlets
to be provided as part of the security system. Exact size to be provided by the supplier.
Page 2 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

K.
The proposed equipment shall be as detailed in this document.
L.
The CCTV system should be capable of providing visual images from the cameras located
throughout the building to both the security control room and to any recipient who has the
necessary permissions to remotely view the CCTV coverage over an IP link. The cameras should
be connected to Hard Disc Digital Recorders for storing up to 60 days of video images at 25
frames per second (fps).
M.
The system should consist of but not limited to the following

1.
Fixed IP dome cameras
2.
Fixed IP box type cameras
3.
Fixed IP Weather proof Cameras
4.
PTZ IP dome cameras (high speed dome system
5.
Networkable Digital Video Multiplexer Recorder-transmitters (NVRs).
6.
All other related accessories and equipment including camera mounts, various camera
lenses, etc
7.
Accessories for interfacing with the building fire alarm system and access control system
8.
Video transmission control cabling and linking cables
9.
Power supplies as required to the various system components, although the principle source
of power should be 12 V DC through CAT 6 cables.
10.
Interfacing with security access control system
11.
Latest laser multi-user version system software
12.
Integration with BMS system
N.
The control room should have a custom built control desk to accommodate the NVR, LCD
Monitors and all related accessories.
O.
Video Quality
1.
All cameras should provide at least 2CIF video quality of half real time 12 frames per
second. Entry/Exits, Lobby and front desk cameras should provide 4CIF video quality of
Page 3 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

real time 25 frames per sec (PAL mode). NVRs should have hard disk capacity to retain all
camera recordings for a minimum of one month.
2.
It is required that the recorded Video clips will be available for display by using standard
MS-Windows viewer & all video streams transported on the Wide Area Network (WAN)
will be 256 AES Encrypted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.4
CAMERAS All cameras shall have the following minimum specifications:

1.
2.
1.5
The system should be an integrated CCTV control system based on an open protocol
communications network.
Cameras in external areas shall be provided with a weather proof enclosure.
Indoor fixed Colour Dome Camera
CCD Sensor
Mounting
Video Compression
Video Streaming
Resolution
Zoom
Min. Illumination
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Tours
Pan /Tilt Speed
Network Security
:
:
:
Supported Protocols
Video Buffer
Electronic shutter speed
:
:
1/4 Ex-view HAD Progressive scan CCD

Wall / Pendant mount
H.264 & Motion JPEG
simultaneous H.264 & MJPEG max at 30fps
704x576
35 x Optical (3.4 -119mm) & 12 x digital
0.5Lux (colour mode)
0.008 lux (B/W mode) at 30 IRE
100 preset positions
0.05 450/sec
Password protection, IP address filtering,
HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access
control, digest authentication.
IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPS, QoS Layer 3
DiffServ, FTP, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnP,
SNMPv1/v2c/v3(MIB-II), DNS,
DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP,
ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SOCKS
56Mb Pre & Post Alarm
1/30,000 1.5 sec
Page 4 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

Lens
Power
Operating temperature
1.6
:
:
:
3.4 119 mm, F1.4 4.2, auto focus

7 24 V DC, max 50 W
-40C ~ +50C
MONITORS
A.
The LCD monitors shall provide high quality colour pictures on 32" (diagonal) screens. The
monitor shall operate on 230 V, 50Hz, and shall have a dual loop facility. It shall have high
resistance to external electrical & magnetic interference.
B.
The horizontal resolution shall be more than 450 TV lines (at centre) and the signal to noise ratio
shall be more than 46 dB.
C.
The monitor shall incorporate two Y/C and two composite video inputs and audio capabilities
1.7
DIGITAL RECORDING & NETWORK MANAGEMENT
A.
The software should be unique and power a line of Digital Video Recorders (NVRs/DVRs), servers
and workstations. The software should be available on CD-R format and provide a complete and
comprehensive application for the operation and maintenance of the video surveillance system. It
should provide full live digital video and audio surveillance over a standard 100 Base-T network.
B.
The software should also be available preloaded in a workstation. This workstation should be a
preconfigured state-of-the-art PC ready to review and record video over the LAN and WAN with
proper registration.
C.
The software should offer network connectivity to other family components that share all video
and control data over the Ethernet and/or wireless wi-fi network. The number of network
connected components is only limited by the number of IP assigned addresses.
D.
The software, without any degradation to video quality, should, as a minimum, simultaneously
offer through a multiplexer:
1.
16-channel continuous video playback.
2.
16-channel video playback transmission to the network
3.
16-channel continuous video receiving from the network
4.
User selectable video archiving or pre-existing recording
Page 5 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
1.8
The OS of the software should be compatible with either Microsoft Windows XP, Windows2003
Server or VISTA (Professional versions).
1.
Network Setup: Standard network protocol type using IP addressing scheme.
2.
Site Authorisation: Workstation should be capable of being setup using remote recorder or
workstation GUI. Site name and authorisation can be established by User and Group.
Permissions can be assigned for all system functions.
3.
Macro Create and Edit: System macros should be capable of being added, edited and
deleted using the recorders cameras and detectors. In addition, within macros, alarms
can be sent and remote macros run.
4.
Alarm Setup: Recorder alarms should be capable of being established by adding

detectors and confirming motion detection on video. The triggering of the recorders
detectors is used to send alarms to remote units. In addition, detectors can be edited and
deleted.
5.
Device Settings: The servers cameras, microphones and sensors should be capable of
being named. Cameras can be setup as PTZ types and full descriptions can be assigned.
6.
Authorisation: The video from the recorders cameras should be capable of being enabled
to view the authorisation status symbol on the displayed video.
7.
The menu options for the OS should be in English (UK) (default), Arabic
VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFWARE (VMS)
Multi-screen Display
A.
Each client shall be able TO CONTROL up to 4 monitors allowing device tree, site plans, system
information and up to 64 video windows.
B.
Intuitive Device Tree and Favourites Stored Views.
C.
Video from individual cameras shall be able to be selected via tree structure, maps or via user
defined favourite Stored Views.
D.
Alarm monitoring.
Page 6 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
Events and alarms from connected devices including DVRs and cameras shall trigger messages,
output actions, site map location alerts well as displaying related live video.
Map Designer
A.
Included with VMS, Map Designer allows multi-level site maps with camera and device positions,
Import existing floor plans & images or create new ones.
B.
Camera icons show device location with direction of view.
C.
Multi-level, linked maps for large or complex sites.
D.
Click camera selection for display.
DVR Control
A.
Shall have Control of key functions to remotely view live and playback recorded video directly
back from the DVR.
PTZ/Dome Camera Control

A.
Control of connected cameras regardless of whether they are directly connected (eg IP cameras)
or via connected DVRs using the mouse or virtual joystick.
B.
Export of Video and still images.
C.
Shall be able to download VIDEO FROM the DVRs and exported to player software.
Network Video Recorder (NVR)

A.
VMS Shall include recording of IP video from IP cameras or networked DVRs. Expandable in
blocks of up to 32 IP video streams per NVR server, there shall not be any logical limit to the
number of IP video streams that can be recorded.
Page 7 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

Scheduled Recording
A.
Video from IP cameras or DVRs can be scheduled for individual days and hours to minimise
network traffic and prioritise recorded information.
Centralised Dvr Recording

A.
Live video streamed from a DVR SHALL ABLE to be recorded to mirror and extend local DVR
recording.
Steaming Server
A.
Re-encode and compress video for narrow bandwidths transmission and compact storage.
B.
The software should employ a compression algorithm based on:

1.
Optimised H264 and/or as a minimum MPEG4.
C.
User selectable resolution (quality of picture) not requiring a need to restart the application or the
digital video recorder. It should be selectable using a 4-position bar, from the main screen.
There should be 4 levels of resolution (Frame, Field, CIF and HCIF) with 2 levels of compression
comprising 8 quality levels in total, which should be accessible from the setup menu selections.
D.
The networked system platform should be comprised of:
A.
1.
The software platform
2.
Recorders
3.
Workstations.
The software installed in both recorders and workstations should be similar in:
1.
GUI, therefore an operator should only need to learn one interface for both control and
programming of the system.
2.
Functions, offering the ability to remotely configure most system components from any
recorder or workstation.
Page 8 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Authorisation rights setup should be performed using the Site Authorisation screen. Group rights
should be available to configure, by specific site. Rights should provide authority to perform all
system functions. The software should offer a full multi-user authorisation process as follows:
1.
User groups should be created once globally and should function in all components
connected to the network.
2.
Users should be created once globally and should be given rights to particular groups.
3.
Groups should be authorised and given specific access to each unit, permitting functionspecific profiles.
4.
Users created and authorised for each machine should be able to login to any recorder
and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that machine follow them.
5.
There should be no virtual limit on the number of Groups and Users that can be authorised
in the software.
6.
The system shall be expandable at a future date to allow extra video inputs or outputs to be
connected.
7.
The software should allow for each group to be authorised or denied access, per
component to:
a)
Login.
b)
Logout
c)
Setup
d)
Network setup and site name
e)
User and Group management
f)
Site Authorisation
g)
Auto-login
h)
Macro-Create and Edit
i)
Alarm setup
j)
Authorisation settings
k)
Device setup
l)
Auto record
m)
Manual setup and override
n)
Display time and date in 24hr format on all monitors (de-selectable)
o)
time synchronise all RS232 connected devices.
p)
Video sync loss on all inputs with indication on monitor 1 camera inputs lost
Page 9 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

q)
C.
D.
1.9
A.
Conduct a none volatile memory saving all settings after power failure
and on re-power auto re-establishing with video input 1 to output 1, 2
to 2, 3 to 3 etc.2
The main window should provide the following:

1.
The site and device tree depicting all recorders, servers and workstations connected to the
network.
2.
Within the site and device tree, each unit should be depicted with all connected devices
such as:
3.
Cameras connected, differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras.
4.
Microphones.
5.
A multi-screen display that allows for screen displays of:
6.
Single Camera
7.
Quad.
8.
Full screen of any of the above selected multi-screens should allow for the viewing of the
particular multi-screen in full screen mode by hiding the graphical user interface.
The keyboard shall have the ability to be connected anywhere on the system network via an IP
link and have control of any device, including the ability to connect to a telemetry receiver directly for programming
CABLES
From video server to network connection, cable shall be by composite cable incorporating 4-pair
UTP CAT 6 cable and 2-conductor 16 AWG stranded copper conductor with overall black
,flame-retardant PVC jacket (Siamese or round construction).
Page 10 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.10
A.
CONTROL CONSOLE
Provide custom-built control desks to be installed in all control rooms on capable of housing the
following equipment:
1.
CCTV Monitors.
2.
CCTV controls.
3.
Security panel.
4.
PA microphone.
5.
Fire network reporting terminal and printer.
6.
Fire-fighters telephone console.
7.
BMS system.
8.
General telephone.
9.
Work space for minimum two (2) people.
10.
Lift telephone console.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY
A.
Provide comprehensive service, Maintenance and warranty for the entire system for one year from
the date of issuing the Taking over Certificate.
B.
Include a list of services, in the proposal, which will be performed during this period.
C.
All of the system installation work shall be carried out / supervised by the specialist subcontractor. However, the necessary containment and electrical power to support the security system shall
be the responsibility of the MEP Contractor.
D.
Power supplies to the cameras to be taken from the common power supply (UPS) location to the
individual camera location by power supply cables.
Page 11 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

E.
The cables necessary for the security system shall be as recommended by the specialist supplier /
manufacturer.
F.
Provide necessary power to the control desk to feed all equipment. Power supplies to be from UPS
provided by the MEP contractor.
G.
CCTV cabling to be run separately in conduits and segregated from all power cabling.
H.
Also, the MEP Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main Contractor and the specialist supplier to
complete the installation successfully.
2.2
A.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
B.
Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that
they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day
and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
C.
Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article.

Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.
Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime
lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear
image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.
Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting
conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image.
Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet
away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the
filter in place.
Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.
Set sensitivity of motion detection.
Connect and verify responses to alarms.
Verify operation of control-station equipment.
Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has
been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice
of test schedule.
Page 12 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

D.
Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional
modes.
E.
Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Page 13 of 13
Video Surveillance
Project:

Works:
Title:

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Analogue Addressable Control Panel
2.
Point Type Smoke Sensor
3.
Point Type Heat Sensor
4.
Point Type Carbon Monoxide Sensor
5.
Point Type Multi Sensor
6.
Probe Type Duct Smoke Sensor
7.
Manual Call Point
8.
Sounder
9.
Interface Units
10.
Short Circuit Isolators
11.
Magnetic Door Holders.
STANDARDS
A.
BS5839
B.
EN54
C.
NFPA 72
D.
Local Civil Defence Authority
E.
Loss Prevention Certification Board
Page 1 of 12
Digital, Addressable Fire- Alarm System
Project:

Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROL PANEL
A.
The Fire Alarm panel will provide full addressability of all devices on the fire alarm system
and analogue addressability of all fire sensors. The Fire Alarm panels will be networkable
type and will be of the highest proven reliability. The panels will be modular with solid state,
microprocessor based electronics with plug-in modules.
B.
SYSTEM OPERATION
1.
Access to the panel control functions shall be password protected to four access levels.
2.
An alphanumeric keyboard will allow control and interrogation of the panel by an

authorised operator. The alphanumeric keyboard will normally be concealed.
3.
The Fire Alarm panel will determine the alarm decision of each sensor within the system
and will continually interrogate the sensors for correct functioning and for dirt build-up.
4.
The panel will compare sensed values against stored threshold values collected over a
period to enable compensation of pre-set thresholds over dirt build-up.
5.
The panel will indicate when individual sensors need cleaning.
6.
A history of all sensor recordings will be available on the panel such that the average
level of smoke obscuration that has been sensed can be seen over a period.
7.
The panel will decide when a fire alarm condition exists from the data it receives.
8.
A pre-alarm period where the alarm is limited to the fire alarm panel will allow security
personnel a two minute period to investigate a sensor operation prior to setting the
system into full alarm.
9.
Operation of two adjacent sensors will immediately set the system into alarm.
10.
Operation of a Manual Call Point will set the system into alarm.
11.
The first stage of alarm will limit the voice evacuation messaging to the area in which
the fire has been determined. A pre-alarm message may be sent to adjacent areas. The
fire alarm panel will activate the sequencing accordingly.
12.
All interface unit signals for fire safety systems will have facility to be re-set manually
and electronically from the fire alarm panel.
All interface unit signals for fire safety systems will have facility to be re-set manually
and electronically from the fire alarm panel.
C.
MOUNTING
Page 2 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
D.
APPEARANCE
1.
E.
F.
1.
LCD Visual display unit capable of displaying 16 lines 40 characters backlit display
(white on blue).
2.
Built-in full functional alphanumeric keyboard.
CAPACITY
I.
Integral sealed lead acid battery and charger, with 24 hour back up in the event of
supply mains failure.
CONTROLS
1.
Sound alarms, silence alarms and reset fire. These shall be enabled by a key switch.
2.
Cancel fault buzzer.
LED INDICATION
1.
J.
The panel will be networkable type with number of loops as indicated and as required
by contract Drawings. The minimum number of devices allowed per loop: 198 devices
of which 198 of the devices may be sensors.
BATTERIES
1.
H.
The panel will be all black or dark blue finish with minimal text on front panel.
USER INTERFACE
1.
G.
Within areas where there are finished (e.g. plastered walls), the fire alarm panels will
be recessed and the wiring to/from the panel will be concealed within the wall. Only
in designated riser closets or ELV rooms will the fire alarm panels be permitted to be
surface mounted. The contractor will establish this early. Note that the control room is
a finished area.
Fire, fault, warning and power on lamps for both AC and DC.
LCD CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS

1.
Menu driven function keys with password protection shall allow users to access and
display:
last 100 fire events,
last 255 system events,
current fault and warning logs,
Page 3 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.
K.
analysis of analogue sensor information,
interrogation of sensor cleanliness,
loop map connections,
enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unit channels,
fire plan configuration menus,
outstation labeling / label changes,
address allocation,
status of outstation,
status of all cards,
printer on, off, line feed and test facilities,
Address allocation including SAFE addressing.
All control buttons and keyboard shall be enclosed behind a lockable cover with a
glazed window portion for viewing the LCD display.
AUDIBLE ALARM
1.
2.2
Provide a local audible alarm on the panel with different tones for differing events.
POINT TYPE SMOKE SENSOR
A.
Provide detectors with an insect screen-protected, 360degree detection chamber with optimal
design to minimise buildup of dirt and dust. The smoke sensor will also include a heat sensor
in accordance with BS 5445 part 5 and EN 54-5
B.
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Two-Part construction
2.
Wiring termination base plate suitable to terminate wiring system specified and receive
plug-in sensor modules.
3.
Plug-in smoke sensor module.
4.
Disposable chamber.
5.
All electronic parts and circuitry will be contained in the sensor module.
Page 4 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

C.
6.
Semi-flush mounting kits will be provided for all sensors mounted onto suspended
ceiling systems / gypsum board ceilings.
7.
LED indicator for alarm / healthy / fault status indication.
Dimensions
1.
D.
Colour
1.
2.3
A.
86mm diameter x 48mm high
RAL 9010
POINT TYPE HEAT SENSOR

Provide detectors with fixed and rate-of-rise sensing elements.
DIMENSIONS
1.
B.
COLOUR
1.
2.4
RAL 9010
POINT TYPE CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
A.
Provide detectors with electrochemical cell to detect the build up of carbon monoxide.
B.
CONSTRUCTION
C.
1.
Two part construction
2.
plug-in sensor module.
3.
Plug-in carbon monoxide sensor module.
4.
Disposable chamber.
5.
6.
Semi-flush mounting kits will be provided for all sensors mounted onto suspended
ceiling systems / gypsum board ceilings.
7.
LED indicator for alarm/healthy/fault status indication.
DIMENSIONS
Page 5 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
D.
COLOUR
1.
2.5
86 mm diameter x 48 mm high
RAL 9010
POINT TYPE MULTI SENSOR
A.
Provide detectors with an insect screen-protected, 360 degree detection chamber with optimal
design to minimize build up of dirt and dust
B.
Supply and install an Analogue Addressable multi Sensor suitable for locating in a high
ambient temperature / high humidity area.
C.
The detector will be a point type detector with the following sensing elements.
D.
E.
Smoke
Heat
Carbon Monoxide
CONSTRUCTION
1.
Two-Part construction
2.
3.
Plug-in smoke/heat sensor module.
4.
Disposable chamber
5.
6.
SPACING
1.
F.
The specialist supplier of this device will determine its required spacing to provide full
coverage to the areas indicated. The contractor will allow for the number of devices
(including wiring to same) within his tender proposal.
AFFECT TO TRUE DETECTION

1.
Consider the affects of ambient smoke associated with car exhaust fumes. Provide
facility for the threshold setting of smoke detection to offset same.
Page 6 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

G.
2.
Consider the affects of sand and dirt build-up in a near-external environment. Provide
for facility for compensation against same.
3.
Consider the high humidity levels that are often experienced. Provide for compensation
against same.
4.
Demonstrate all of the above with system proposal.
DIMENSIONS
1.
H.
COLOUR
1.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
RAL 9010
PROBE TYPE DUCT SNOKE SENSOR

CONSTRUCTION
1.
Three-Part construction
2.
Detection probe, copper tube with sensor holes suited to duct size and as per
manufacturers recommendations.
3.
4.
Plug-in smoke sensor module.
5.
Disposable chamber
6.
7.
DIMENSIONS
1.
2.
Probe length to suit duct dimension and manufacturers recommendation
COLOUR
Page 7 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.7
A.
B.
MANUAL CALL POINTS

TYPE
1.
Break Glass to operate push button
2.
Addressable
MOUNTING
1.
C.
A.
TYPE
Fire Fault, warning and power on lamps
CONSTRUCTION
1.
F.
Red colour finish.
LED INDICATION
1.
E.
Surface on wall
APPEARANCE
1.
D.
Electronic banshee type complete with flashing xenon strobe
MOUNTING
1.
C.
IP55 unless located in air-conditioned area.
SOUNDER
1.
B.
Fire Fault, warning and power on lamps
IP RATING :
1.
2.8
Red colour finish
LED INDICATION
1.
E.
Semi-recessed in wall.
APPEARANCE :
1.
D.
RAL 9010
Toughened polycarbonate
SOUND LEVEL
Page 8 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

1.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
100dB at 1m
INTERFACE UNITS
Refer and study all MEP and ELV drawings prior to submitting the tender and provide
wherever necessary, addressable loop-powered interface units to:
1.
Openable motorized doors and windows to provide make-up air.
2.
Shutdown mechanical ventilation plant.
3.
Shutdown general exhaust fans.
4.
Startup smoke extract fans.
5.
Startup exhaust make up fans.
6.
Startup pressurization fans.
7.
Monitor all sprinkler valves.
8.
Monitor gas suppression systems (e.g within all electrical and IT Rooms).
9.
Monitor gas detectors.
10.
Automatically operate fire dampers.
MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
SHORT CIRCUIT ISOLATORS
Short circuit isolators will be addressable loop-powered devices to provide protection to
sections of the fire alarm cabling system where short circuits occur. The isolators will be
provided such that they isolate a maximum of six devices within the loop.
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A.
Supply and install magnetic door holders mounted at low level (nominally 300mm AFFL) on
corridor doors where indicated.
B.
Provide surface mounting back boxes where necessary to ensure proper positioning of
magnet in relation to the metallic holding plate on the door.
Page 9 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.13
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's

written requirements.
B.
Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and

requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
SYSTEM PRINTER
Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire-alarm system.
DEVICE GUARDS
Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector,
gong, or other device requiring protection.
1.
Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.
2.
Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,
humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before
installation begins.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
C.
3.2
A.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with
requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."
1.
Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be
replaced.
2.
Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,
debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage
instructions.
Page 10 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

B.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a.
Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation"
table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
b.
Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section
of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2.
System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3.
Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's
4.
Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
5.
Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's
6.
Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record
of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in
NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the
C.
Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added
or replaced devices and appliances.
D.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
F.
Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
G.
Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.3
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated
Page 11 of 12
Project:

Works:
Title:

service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or

defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation.
Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3.4
A.
1.
Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the
"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in
NFPA 72.
2.
Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3.
Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
Page 12 of 12
APPENDIX A
________________________________________________________________________
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
Project:

Works:
Title:

APPENDIX A
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The following list is the items of material and equipment manufacturers selected as the basis of design.
They have been selected for their compliance with the specification, performance and appearance. A
proposed manufacturer has been nominated in the case of major electrical systems whom had some
participation in the development of the design. This does not demonstrate a bias towards them but rather to
highlight the fact they supported the engineers in the design. The alternative manufacturers are equally
capable and approved in terms of meeting the specification of this project.
The Tenderer must base his tender offer on a fully specification-compliant system from one of the listed
manufacturers but may offer alternatives by completing the Schedule of Contractors Proposals at the time
of tender. Such alternatives must be equal in performance and appearance to those manufacturers and
systems listed and be in full compliance with the specifications. Technical literature, sufficient for the
engineer to evaluate the proposal along with the savings in cost for use of alternative materials /
manufacturer must be submitted along with the proposal at the time of tender.
Where no particular item is listed below, such materials and equipment shall be notified to the Engineer by
the tenderer during the tender period.
The project specification is open to materials sourced locally, regionally, Europe, North America and Asia.
It should be duly noted that for products sourced that products/material sourced for this project shall be
manufactured to the highest standards irrespective of the region and full ISO certification amongst other
certifications and compliances with international and BS standards must be fully in place.
Division 08 Appendix A
Page 1 of 9
Schedule of Materials and Eqipment
Project:

Works:
Title:

Description
Equal/Approved
Manufacturer
Standby Generators
Caterpillar
Cummins
FG Wilson
SMDO
Uninterruptible Power Supply

Liebert
APS
Merlin Gerin
Powerware
Eaton
Main Distribution Switchgear Components

Air Circuit Breakers, Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers, Miniature Circuit
Breakers, sub main distribution boards,
final circuit distribution boards, feeder
pillars etc.
Legrand
ABB
Schneider
Siemens
Eaton
Dorman Smith
Automatic Transfer Switch
Legrand
Asco
Schneider
Zenith
Eaton
ABB
Power Factor Correction & Filtering

Equipment
Legrand
ABB
Schneider
Eaton
Siemens
Dorman Smith
Variable Frequency Drives and soft

starters Medium Voltage and Low Voltage
Schneider
ABB
Danfoss
Schneider
Page 2 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

Description
Equal/Approved
Manufacturer
Siemens
Galvanised Cable Tray and Cable Ladder
OBO Betterman
Unistrut
Wibe
Wiremold
Galvanised Cable Trunking
OBO Betterman
Unistrut
Wibe
Wiremold
Supports and Fixings
OBO Betterman
Unistrut
Wibe
Wiremold
G.I. Conduit and backboxes
Barton (U.K.)
Fitter & Poulten (U.K.)
Hayes (U.K.)
PVC Conduit
Marshall-Tufflex
EGA
Mita
Flexible Metal Conduit
Unitube-KOPEX
Adaptaflex
Flexicon
Floorboxes
MK
Crabtree
Marshall
Ackermann
Page 3 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

Description
Equal/Approved
Manufacturer
Flexible Nylon Conduit
Unitube-KOPEX
Adaptaflex
Flexicon
Underground Cable Conduits
Cosmoplast
Hepworth
Power Cables
Ducab
Riyadh Cables
Oman Cable
Pirelli
Cable Glands, Connectors, Lugs etc.
BICC Components
CMP
Hawke
Fire Rated Power Cables
Ducab
AEI Cables
Drake Cables
Pyrotenax/Tyco
Pirelli
Fire Alarm & Emergency Lighting Cables
Pirelli FP200 Cable

AEI Cables
Drake Cables
Wiring Accessories Socket outlets, light

switches, isolators of less than or equal to
32A rating. (Back of house only, for front
of house refer to interior
designer/architects specification)
Legrand
MK
Crabtree
Clipsal
Page 4 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

Description
Equal/Approved
Manufacturer
Lighting Control System
Helvar
Lutron
Dynalite
Lighting Control Gear
Osram
Philips
Tridonic
Helvar
GE
Lamps
Osram
Philips
Sylvania
GE
Central battery emergency lighting system
Emergi-Lite
JSB
Inotech
Ceag
Earthing System
Furse
AN Wallis
Erico
Lightning Protection System
Furse
AN Wallis
Erico
Fire Alarm System
NAFFCO
Gent
Notifier
Simplex
Tyco
Page 5 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

Description
Equal/Approved
Manufacturer
Fire Barriers
Hawke Transit System

Specified Technologies
SCHEDULE OF ELECTRICAL SPARES

As discussed in previous sections the contractor shall handover spares parts upon project
completion. The extent of this list is difficult to fully specify at this stage until the material is
procured. This section of the specification is guidance only and the tendering contractor shall
ensure a spare parts list is included in their tender return which shall be based upon the
recommendation of their suppliers and in conjunction with the outline specification below.
The list provided by the contractor at the time of tendering can be a high level summary, which
will evolve into a more detailed schedule specific to the items procured at a later date.
For general systems the proposed quantity of spares is defined either in number or as a
percentage of overall quantity. For more enhanced engineering systems a general overview of
what should be required as a minimum is noted. The contractor shall provide a spare parts list for
these systems in conjunction with the recommendation of their equipment supplier for review at
the tender stage. This can be a high level of overview at the tendering stage.
The list below generally outlines the requirements for engineering services covered under this
design specification. For specialist engineering design services the contractor shall refer to the
relevant specialist designers design specifications for spares. If this information is not available
then the contractor shall provide proposed list of spares in conjunction with their specialist system
suppliers recommendation. A list of specialist engineering services not covered under this
specification includes but is not limited to the following:
-
Kitchen equipment
IT
Audio Visuals
Security systems
Swimming pool plant
Irrigation systems
Please not, the list to be proposed by the contractor for approval as part of their tender shall be
representative of the quantities to be provided after the defects liability/warranty period.
Replacement of failures during the defects liability period shall be sourced under the contractors
warranty unless the damage/failure can be proved to be consequential to accidental or
malicious damage.
Page 6 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:


-
10 No. MCB of each rating

10 No. RCD of each rating
5 No. MCCB of each rating up to and including 400A. 1 No. of each type above
400A.
5 No. EPO buttons of each type
5 No. isolator of each rating up to and including 400A. 1 No. of each type above
400A.
In terms of sundry items the contractor shall provide spares as per the specialist supplier
recommendations with respect to the following items but not limited to:
-
Spring mechanisms
Fuses
Connectors,
Indication lamps, colors as applicable
Instrumentation components
UPS
The items indicated below are a general overview only and not limited to. UPS technology is
always enhancing so the contractor shall propose a list of spares in conjunction with their
specialist suppliers recommendation. The project has a number of UPS of which differ in rating so
the contractor shall take this into account when developing the list of spares.
-
Fuses
Fans
SCR modules
IGBT modules
Inverter card
Capacitors
Converter control card
Inverter control card
Power supply card
Generators
The items indicated below are a general overview only and not limited to. The contractor shall
propose a list of spares in conjunction with their specialist suppliers recommendation. The project
has a number of generators of which differ in rating so the contractor shall take this into account
when developing the list of spares.
Page 7 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

Oil filter
Fuel filter
Air filter
Coil kit
Control Module
Control contact
Lube kit
Wiring Accessories
-
20 No. of all wiring accessory accessories including but not limited to socket outlets,
lighting switches (mains and intelligent), fused connection units, flex outlets, double pole
switches, data points etc.
The above shall also be applicable to RJ45 plug connectors.
General Lighting
-
20 No. of all lamp types specified (back of house)
Emergency Lighting
The items indicated below are a general overview only and not limited to. Central battery
technology is always enhancing so the contractor shall propose a list of spares in conjunction
with their specialist suppliers recommendation. The project has a number of central battery units
of which differ in rating so the contractor shall take this into account when developing the list of
spares.
5% off all lamp types specified
In terms of sundry items the contractor shall provide spares as per the specialist supplier
recommendations with respect to the following items but not limited to:
Chargers
Fuses
Convertors
Monitoring modules
Switching modules
Addressable ballasts
Fire alarm systems
-
10 No. of each detection device type

10 No. of each manual call point type
10 No. of each annunciator type (speaker, sounder, sounder/strobe)
Page 8 of 9
Project:

Works:
Title:

5 No. of each interface module type

10 No. of each end of line resistor type
In terms of sundry items the contractor shall discuss with their specialist supplier and propose a
list of additional recommended items.
Cable
-
1 No. 200m reel of 2.5/4.0/6.0mm single core LSF copper cable suitable for final
circuit wiring. One drum for each phase, earth and neutral.
1 No. 200m reel of fire alarm system cabling as per the supplier specification.
2 No. 200m reel of structured cable wiring as per IT consultants specification.
1 No. 200m reel of 2.5/4.0/6.0mm 3 Core PVC flex cable.
1 No. 200m reel of lighting control cable as per the specialist lighting consultants
specification.
SCHEDULE OF DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

The following distribution boards are to be included for in this tender. The tenderer is to review
the schedules against the layout drawings and provide sufficient outgoing breakers, circuit
wiring, RCDS etc to suit the layout requirements. The tenderer will co-ordinate same with layouts
for lighting, fire alarms, security systems, small power, mechanical services, power doors etc.
The tender will be based on fully corrected schedules incorporating all circuit requirements,
distribution board requirements, circuit breakers etc as described above.
Final arrangement of Distribution Boards will be in full compliance with LOCAL ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY regulations and provided with appropriately sized breakers and RCDs to suit LOCAL
ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY requirements. Wiring sizes will be included for to suit LOCAL
ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY requirements. All will be included for within the tender stage
proposals.
The contractor should allow for wiring small power circuits in ring configuration where 30A mcbs
are listed for these circuits.
For all wiring systems from distribution boards, the tenderer is to include for all necessary
containment systems such that multiple circuit runs of more than four circuits are contained in
trunking systems as opposed to conduit.
DB Mounting:
Generally all DBs and associated containment will be surface mounted.
Distribution Schedules included.
Page 9 of 9
APPENDIX B
________________________________________________________________________
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BUILDING SERVICES
Project:

Works:
Title:

APPENDIX B
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BUILDING SERVICES
O&M manuals shall be prepared in accordance to BSRIA application guide 1/87.1 Operating and maintenance manuals for
building services installations and shall include, but not be limited to, the following categories:
1.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. Introduction
1.1.2. Contractual and legal guides
1.1.3. Salient Features of the Project
1.1.4. Application
1.1.5. Operation & Maintenance
2.
BUILDING SERVICES
2.1.1. General
2.1.2. Integration Building Services
2.1.3. Sequence of Operation
2.1.4. HVAC Installations
2.1.4.1.1.
Introduction
2.1.4.1.2.
Description of the Installation
2.1.4.1.3.
Equipment Schedule
2.1.4.1.4.
Parts identification and recommended spares
2.1.4.1.5.
Commissioning data
2.1.4.1.6.
Instructions to the Operator
2.1.4.1.7.
Maintenance Schedules
2.1.4.1.8.
Method of Modifications / Alterations (when required in Future)
2.1.4.1.9.
Names and addresses of Manufacturers and their Local Agents
2.1.4.1.10.
Set of As-built Drawings
2.1.4.1.11.
Method to Handle Emergency (Power Failure / Plant Failure / FIRE etc.)
2.1.4.1.12.
Manufacturers Literature
2.1.5. Electrical Installations

2.1.5.1.1.
Introduction
2.1.5.1.2.
2.1.5.1.3.
Equipment Schedule
2.1.5.1.4.
2.1.5.1.5.
Commissioning data
Division 08 Appendix B
Page 1 of 3
Operation & Maintain acne Manual Building Services
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.1.5.1.6.
2.1.5.1.7.
2.1.5.1.8.
2.1.5.1.9.
2.1.5.1.10.
2.1.5.1.11.
2.1.5.1.12.
2.1.6. ELV Installations

2.1.6.1.1.
Introduction
2.1.6.1.2.
2.1.6.1.3.
Equipment Schedule
2.1.6.1.4.
2.1.6.1.5.
Commissioning data
2.1.6.1.6.
2.1.6.1.7.
2.1.6.1.8.
2.1.6.1.9.
2.1.6.1.10.
2.1.6.1.11.
2.1.6.1.12.
2.1.7. Building Management System Installations

2.1.7.1.1.
Introduction
2.1.7.1.2.
2.1.7.1.3.
Equipment Schedule
2.1.7.1.4.
2.1.7.1.5.
Commissioning data
2.1.7.1.6.
2.1.7.1.7.
2.1.7.1.8.
2.1.7.1.9.
2.1.7.1.10.
2.1.7.1.11.
2.1.7.1.12.
2.1.8. Plumbing & Fire Fighting Installations

2.1.8.1.1.
Introduction
Page 2 of 3
Project:

Works:
Title:

2.1.8.1.2.
2.1.8.1.3.
Equipment Schedule
2.1.8.1.4.
2.1.8.1.5.
Commissioning data
2.1.8.1.6.
2.1.8.1.7.
2.1.8.1.8.
2.1.8.1.9.
2.1.8.1.10.
2.1.8.1.11.
2.1.8.1.12.
Page 3 of 3
APPENDIX C
________________________________________________________________________
LIGHT EQUIPMENT
Project:

Works:
Title:

APPENDIX C LUMINAIRES
GENERAL
1. Provide luminaires to BS 4533 and ICEL 1001 for emergency luminaires. For luminaire types
refer to Schedule of Specified Manufacturers and Suppliers.
2. Fix luminaires to conduit boxes where the conduits are installed in the following situations:
a. Fixed on the surface.
b. Concealed within the structure.
c. Concealed within an inaccessible ceiling space.
d. Concealed with plaster, dry lined or similar wall finish
3. Fix luminaires independent of the conduit system where easy access to the conduit connection
point can be gained by removing either the luminaire or an adjacent ceiling panel.
4. Ensure that where luminaire fixings are independent of the conduit system the supports and
fixings are appropriate to the background and to the luminaire.
5. On demountable ceilings, fluorescent and discharge luminaires are to be supported from the
load bearing grid of the ceiling unless otherwise indicated.
6. Where conduit suspensions are required ensure that ball and socket type plates are used and
that suspension sets used in wet areas have a suitable finish.
WORKMANSHIP
1. Ensure that where luminaires are fixed direct to conduit boxes the final circuit connections are
adequately protected against heat transfer from the luminaire.
2. Ensure that installation method and termination of circuit wiring does not invalidate the IP rating
of the luminaire.
3. Where luminaires are mounted independently of the conduit system provide an appropriate
plug-in type ceiling rose and wire to the luminaire using 3 core 1.5 sq.mm butyl flexible cord.
4. Ensure that all luminaires and lamps are clean and properly aligned.
5. Fix a label at each luminaire which is connected to more than one circuit to read This
luminaire is connected to X number of circuits and is supplied from distribution board Ref. Y.
Isolate each circuit prior to working on the luminaire. Agree label location and format on site.
Division 08 Appedix C
Page 1 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

LAMPS
GENERAL
Supply lamps to be by the same manufacturer for each type with the wattage etc. as per the
Schedule of Luminaires.
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
The following is a list of the luminaires selected as the basis of design. They have been selected for
their compliance with the specification, their performance and their appearance.
The tenderer must provide his tender offer based on the principal luminaires specified but in
addition to doing so, may offer alternatives from the Equal and Approved manufacturers by
completing the Schedule of Contractors Proposals at the time of tender. Such alternative fittings
must be equal in performance, construction quality and appearance to the principal luminaire and
be in full compliance with the specification.
The principal fitting specified is underlined and precedes the words equal and approved from the
following manufacturers. Should no alternatives be offered, the Tenderer will be deemed to have
included for the principal luminaire for all types.
All luminaires shall be complete and functional in all regards, complete with fittings, supports and
fixings, accessories described in specification descriptions, control gear and / or transformers
where required, lamps and fluorescent tubes.
Area of use:
BOH Corridors
Mounting:
Ceiling recessed mounted
Dimension:
224mm
Construction:
Body in sand blasted, diecast aluminium with polycarbonate gear cover.
Reflector:
Anodised Aluminum reflector
Colour:
White Trim.
Control Gear:
EVG Tridonic PC PRO.
IP Rating:
IP20
Lamp:
2x26W CFL
Manufacturer/C
Thorn,Cruz 96108167 or equal and approved.
at. No
Page 2 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimension:
Construction:
Colour:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer/Cat.
No
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimension:
Construction:
Colour:
Reflector:
Control Gear:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer/C
at. No
Toilet
218mm
One piece precision moulded CFL.
Stainless steel.
IP44
2x26W CFL
Whitecroft Espirit ES226H+IP44 2H or equal and approved.
Toilet
105mm
Die cast Aluminium.
Aluminium grey.
Dichroic.
Electronic.
IP65
1x35W CFL
Onok 265 or equal and approved.
Page 3 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimension:
Construction:
Control Gear:
Reflector:
Lamp:
IP Rating:
Manufacturer/Cat
. No.:
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
Reflector:
Colour:
Control Gear:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No.:
Office/Fire Command room

Recessed mounted
597mm x 597mm
White painted body
Electronic dimmable control gear
Highly reflective mirrorbrite Aluminium,
4x14W T16 Lamp
IP20
Thorn - OMEGA 2 T5 ECO / OMEGA2 ECO 4X14 HFIX IS DMB L840 or
equal and approved.
Plant rooms/IT rooms

Surface, ceiling mounted
1600mm(L) x 147mm (W)
Canopy-Light grey polycarbonate
Polycarbonate with internal prisms.
Light grey
HF Tridonic PC PRO Lp
IP65
2x35W, T5 Lamp
THORN AQUAFORCE 96236928 or equal and approved.
Page 4 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimension:
Construction:
Control Gear:
Lamp:
IP Rating:
Manufacturer/C
at. No.:
External Terrace
Surface Mounted
285mm x 116mm
Polycarbonate,
Electronic
1x16W TC-DDEL
IP65
Thorn Cat. LOIRE LX / LOIRE LX 1X16W TC-DD HF CL1 WHI L840 or equal
and approved.
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimension:
Construction:
Control Gear:
Lamp:
IP Rating:
Manufacturer/C
at. No.:
Lift Shafts
Wall Mounted
390 mm x 142mm
Die Cast Aluminium.
Electronic Ballast.
2x8W T16
IP65
Thorn Voyager Bulkhead or equal and approved.
Area of use:
Mounting:
BOH corridor
Page 5 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

Dimension:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer/C
at. No
165*85mm(Length*Depth)
Stainless steel A4 brushed.
IP65
4x1W LED
Inotec SN804 or equal and approved
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
Electrical rooms/Storage rooms

Ceiling surface mounted
356 mm x136 mm x 79 mm
Polycarbonate white body, suitable for exterior and interior.
IP20
4x 1W LED.
Inotec - SN 2518 or equal and approved.
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Plant rooms
Ceiling surface mounted
356 mm x136 mm x 79 mm
Polycarbonate white body, suitable for exterior and interior.
IP65
1x 8W FL.
Inotec - SN 2518 or equal and approved.
Page 6 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

Cat. No
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
E5
FOH area-Toilets/Lockers
85mm.
Stainless steel or Powder coated.
IP40
4 x 1W LED
Inotec SN8141 or equal and approved.
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
Restaurants/Retails
85mm .
Stainless steel or Powder coated .
IP20.
4 x 1W LED
Inotec SN9104 or equal and approved.
Page 7 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

EX1
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
Front of House
Wall Mounted
400 mm x160 mm x 103 mm
Sheet Steel ball impact
IP20
LED
Inotec or equal and approved
EX2
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
Retail
Surface mounted
400 mm x160 mm x 103 mm
Polycarbonate body, suitable for exterior and interior.
IP20
LED
Page 8 of 9
Lumminaries
Project:

Works:
Title:

EX3
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
External
Surface mounted
400 mm x160 mm x 103 mm
Polycarbonate body, suitable for exterior and interior.
IP65
LED
EX4
Area of use:
Mounting:
Dimensions:
Construction:
IP Rating:
Lamp:
Manufacturer /
Cat. No
Front of House
Ceiling Recessed
400 mm x160 mm x 103 mm
Aluminium, with single or double side
IP65
LED
Page 9 of 9
Lumminaries
APPENDIX D
________________________________________________________________________
SPECIALIST LIGHTING LUMINARIES SCHEDULE
TENDER LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

Specialist Lighting Design
Project: West Beach Club, Dubai, UAE
Client: RSP / Nakheel
Area: Interior and Exterior Spaces
Date:
15th November 2014
First Issue
Fixture Reference
Product / Manufacturer and

Catalogue No.
Description
Cutout & Recessed Depth
Lamp
Location
Local Distributor Contact/Quote
SL-D1
Lucent, Prospex Focus 90 Fixed

Ceiling recessed fixed downlight fixture, with deep recessed LED engine and black baffle for low-glare and
Downlight, IP54; GenLED MR16
optimum visual comfort, to provide ambient lighting. Matt white trim finish. LED engine supplied with remote
Power3 LED 12W, for indoor
electronic DALI dimmable driver.
use / dry location
RD: 150mm,
CO: 73mm
GenLED MR16 Power3 LED lamp, 12W (System

Wattage 13.5W), above 1000lm, 22, 280mA,
3000K, CRI 80+, DALI DIM Remote electronic
driver (to be supplied with lamp)
Washrooms
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
skander@hudalighting.com
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
SL-D2

Ceiling recessed adjustable downlight fixture, with deep recessed LED engine and black baffle for low-glare
and optimum visual comfort, to highlight vertical surface of lockers and ablution wall and washing area. Matt
white trim finish. LED engine supplied with remote electronic DALI dimmable driver.
use / dry location
RD: 150mm,
CO: 73mm

Lockers at Washrooms and Ablution

areas
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
SL-D3

Ceiling recessed fixed downlight fixture, with deep recessed LED engine and black baffle for low-glare and
optimum visual comfort, to provide ambient lighting. Matt white trim finish. LED engine supplied with remote
electronic DALI dimmable driver.
use / dry location
RD: 150mm,
CO: 73mm

Showers in Washrooms and Exterior

Circulation
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
SL-D4

Ceiling recessed adjustable downlight fixture, with deep recessed LED engine and black baffle for low-glare
and optimum visual comfort, to highlight vertical surface of exterior lockers. Matt white trim finish. LED
engine supplied with remote electronic DALI dimmable driver.
use / dry location
RD: 150mm,
CO: 73mm

Exterior Circulation to highlight Lockers
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
LED, 24V 15W/m, 528lm/m, 2800K, CRI 85,

Remote electronic DALI dimmable driver
Cove Lighting in Atrium/Lobby at Ground

Floor and First Level
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
SL-L1
LEDLinear, VarioLED Flex

Fully opal encapsulated linear LED striplight fixture with homogeneous and dot free light emitting surface,
SKYLLA W824 SV, 15W/m, LED, located within ceiling coves. To be supplied complete by the manufacturer with mounting accessories as the
IP67
Contour Skylla SV, IP rated connectors and electronic DALI dimmable driver.
RD: 21mm plus mounting profile

(allowance should be made for
the light fixture's cables and
connectors),
CO: 10mm width (length varies)
plus mounting profile
SL-L2
LEDLinear, VarioLED Flex VENUS located concealed from direct view within architectural detail integrated within steps of feature staircase. To
W824 TV, 6W/m, LED, IP67 be supplied complete by the manufacturer with mounting accessories as the Contour Venus TV, IP rated
connectors and electronic DALI dimmable driver.

connectors),
LED, 24V 6W/m, 274lm/m, 2900K, CRI 85,

Integrated within steps of Feature

Staircase
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
N.A.
LED, 18.8W/m, 1250lm/m, 3000K, CRI 80,

Eletronic DALI dimmable control gear
Cove Lighting in Washrooms and Abluton

Rooms, and behind vanity mirrors in
Washrooms
OSRAM Middle East

Mohamed Mossad
m.mossad@osram.com
Tel.: 04 881 3767 Ext.156 / 050 459 4305
SL-L3
OSRAM, LINEARlight POWER

Flex Protect G2 LF06P2-P,
18.8W/m, LED, IP67
Linear LED striplight mounted in metal channel and clear cover located within ceiling coves of washrooms and
concealed from direct view recessed/integrated behind washroom's vanity mirror mounted in metal channel
and opal diffuser. To be supplied complete by the manufacturer with all connectors and accessories including
Connect System IP67 LP, Slim Track, clear cover / opal diffuser and remote electronic Optotronic DALI
dimmable driver.
Fixture Image
1 of 3

Date:
15th November 2014
First Issue
Fixture Reference
SL-XD1
SL-XL2
SL-XL3
SL-XL4

Catalogue No.
Description
Ceiling recessed high power LED downlight fixture with darklight reflector and frosted glass diffuser, to
ERCO, 81035.000, Lightcast illuminate service corridor open to landscape and parking area. Corrosion resistant cast aluminium and
Downlight with LED, 12W, IP65 double powder-coated silver finish. To be supplied complete with side mounted DALI dimmable electronic
control gear.
Lamp
Location
RD: 160mm,
CO: 125mm
LED, 12W, 1140lm, 3000K, SDCM<2, L80/B10

50,000h, CRI>90, Dimmable electronic control
gear and remote DALI converter
Open Service Corridor
ERCO
Deniz Uyaniker
d.uyaniker@erco.com
Tel.: 04 388 5451 Ext. 224 / 050 554 2790
length), 18 x48 optic, 3000K, LEDs within a 2

step MacAdam ellipse, L70 50,000h,
CRI 85, Remote dimmable power supply
Faade Lighting illuminating Feature

Louvres
ACDC: Chris Rimmer

crimmer@acdclighting.co.uk
Tel.: 04 361 7365 / 055 626 7553;
Huda Lighting: Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
Terrace edge detail integrated under

ballustrade upstand
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
ACDC, Blade, LED, Standard

Bright 100 Pitch, 25.15W/m,
IP68
Linear surface-mounted LED fixture with outstanding beam control, delivering an even wash of light using
micro louvre to minimise glare and shields LED from view, to illuminate facade feature louvers, located
concealed from direct view within detailed metal profile integrated to louvres. Advanced heat sink
technology. Standard finish. To be supplied complete by the manufacturer with all necessary accessories and
connectors, half flush bracket and DALI dimmable electronic control gear.
N.A.
LEDLinear, VarioLED Flex

PHOBOS W824 TV, 10W/m,
LED, IP67
located concealed from direct view within architectural detail under Terrace ballustrade to highlight edge of
Terrace and cast light onto floor. To be supplied complete by the manufacturer with mounting accessories as
the Contour Phobos TV, IP rated connectors and electronic DALI dimmable driver.

connectors),
LED, 24V 10W/m, 360lm/m, 2900K, CRI 85,


connectors),
LED, 24V 6W/m, 274lm/m, 2900K, CRI 85,

Integrated within Signage
Huda Lighting
Skander Dardour
Tel.: 04 341 1301 / 050 554 7790
RD: 365mm,
CO: 227mm
LED, 24W, 2280lm, 3000K, SDCM<2, L80/B10

50,000h, CRI>90, Dimmable electronic DALI
control gear
Feature Entrance Walls
ERCO
Deniz Uyaniker
d.uyaniker@erco.com
Tel.: 04 388 5451 Ext. 224 / 050 554 2790
LEDLinear, VarioLED Flex VENUS located concealed from direct view integrated within signage detail to highlight vertical surface. To be
W TV, 6W/m, LED, IP67
supplied complete by the manufacturer with mounting accessories as the Contour Venus TV, IP rated
connectors and electronic DALI dimmable driver.
In-ground recessed high power LED wallwasher fixture to illuminate the feature entrance walls, with darklight
reflector. Corrosion resistant stainless steel finish. To be supplied complete with DALI dimmable electronic
control gear.
LED, 25.15W/m: 30.18W 1488lm (1200mm

o
SL-XU1
ERCO, 33664.000, Tesis Inground luminaire with LED,

24W, IP68
Lighting Control
System
Lutron
DALI based Lighting Control Sytem, including daylight sensors, presence sensors, absence detection sensors, control panels, to provide a comprehensive lighting control for all spaces.
PIR For High Bay
Lutron
PIR Passive infra-red motion detector with 15m radius motion detection area at 14m height.
Overall Diameter : 102mm
NA
Fixture Image
Lutron: Adel Saweres

asaweres@lutron.com
Tel.: 04 299 1224 / 050 115 4091
Throughout.

asaweres@lutron.com
Tel.: 04 299 1224 / 050 115 4091
2 of 3

Date:
15th November 2014
First Issue
Fixture Reference

Catalogue No.
PIR
Lutron
PIR Passive infra-red motion / Vacancy detector with 7.9m radius Motion/Vacancy detection area at 3.7m
height.
PIR Wall Mounted
Lutron
Wall Mounted /Corner mounted PIR Passive infra-red motion detector with 18.3m coverage for wall mounted 110mm*46mm*34mm
and 16.9m coverage for corner mounted motion detection area at 2.1m height.
*W*D)
Daylight Sensor
Lutron
Day light sensor, Coverage as per manufacture recommendation.
Description
Lamp
Location
Overall Diameter : 90.7mm
NA
Throughout.

asaweres@lutron.com
Tel.: 04 299 1224 / 050 115 4091
NA
Throughout.

asaweres@lutron.com
Tel.: 04 299 1224 / 050 115 4091
NA
Day Light Areas.

asaweres@lutron.com
Tel.: 04 299 1224 / 050 115 4091
Overall Diameter : 41mm
(L
Fixture Image
Note: The Specialist Lighting layout drawings for the above mentioned project have been designed considering the above listed light fixtures. The Specialist Lighting consultant reserves the right to approve or reject any alternative light fixtures proposed by others (considering a maximum of 2 alternatives per fixture).
3 of 3
APPENDIX E
________________________________________________________________________
INSPECTION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING &

DEMONSTRATION / TRAINING
Project:

Works:
Title:

APPENDIX E INSPECTION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING & DEMONSTRATION /

TRAINING
INSPECTION OF COVERED WORK

Give the Engineer not less than twenty-four hours notice in writing when any part of the works
is ready for inspection prior to it being covered or hidden. The MEP Contractor to take necessary precautions and coordinate with the other trade contractors to ensure his service is free
from any possible damages. In case of any damages, the same shall be rectified at their cost &
time to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Uncover, by request and at no expense (Cost & Time) to the Employer, any work which has
been concealed without the written authority of the Engineer. Any Comment by the Engineer on
the inspection requests will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility with respect to the
accuracy of such installations, nor to provide suitable equipment as specified, provided that
any discrepancies, errors or omissions are not due to inaccurate information or particulars furnished in writing by the Engineer.
Any delay resulting from the above failure will be the MEP Contractor's Responsibility.
WORKS INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT
Give the Engineer seven days notice in writing when switchboards, distribution boards and the
like are ready for inspection so that such items can be inspected at works prior to dispatch. For
overseas inspection, sufficient days of notice to be served considering the Engineer / Clients
availability, immigration / legal procedures, travel plan etc., Any delay to the above inspections and the subsequent activities at site due to contractors (Main / Sub) failure.
TESTS ON SITE
GENERAL
Carry out all tests described within the relevant parts of the specification and as required by
applicable British Standards (or approved equivalent) associated with each system and submit
the results on typed test sheets to the Engineer for comment.
The MEP Contractor shall prepare detailed Testing & Commissioning procedures with associated check lists for all the systems including the required pre-testing & pre-commissioning
measures, and agree with the Engineer prior to commencement of any such works.
Ensure that all tests are witnessed by the Engineer unless otherwise agreed in accordance with
Inspection Test Plan. The Inspection Test Plan shall have the following categories as minimum
for agreement with the Engineer:
Hold Point (H), Notification Point (N), First Time Only (F), Acceptance Required (A), Self Inspec-
Division 08 Appendix E
Page 1 of 7
Inspection, Testing , Comissioning &

Demonstration / Training
Project:

Works:
Title:

tion (I), Random 10% Inspection (R10), Random 20% Inspection (R20), Random 50%
Inspection (R50), Surveillance / Monitoring (S) and Test Certificate (TC).
The above agreement shall be made to the following categories of works of various electrical
systems as minimum and may require to be amended to the satisfaction the Engineer and / or
Client. However, these agreements will not relieve the contractors from his responsibility of
completing the works in accordance with contract conditions and / or to the satisfaction of the
Engineer / Client.
o INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES & BOX OUTS
o INSTALLATION - PVC CONDUITS (TO BE BURIED)
o UNDERGROUND SLEEVES / DUCTS
o LIGHTNING PROTECTION BONDINGS - PILES & STRUCTURES
o EARTH PITS - INSTALLATION AND T&C
o CONCEALED CODUIT DROPS WITH BOXES
o SURFACE GI CONDUITING
o SURFACE GI CONDUIT DROPS WITH BOXES
o CABLE TRUNKING / TRAYS INSTALLATION
o WIRING TO LIGHT / POWER POINTS
o CABLING THROUGH TRAY / TRUNKING
o BUS RISER INSTALLATION
o EARTH / BONDING TAPES INSTALLATION
o INSTALLATION CONCEALED DB ENCLOSURES
o INSTALLATION DB COMPONENTS
o INSTALLATION OF SURFACE MOUNTED DB
o INSTALLATION OF SMDB
o INSTALLATION OF MDB & PFC
o ELV CABLING THROUGH CONTAINMENT
o PRECOMMISSIONING MEASURES PRIOR TO CEILING SUSPENSION (Insulation Resistance, Loop Impedance, Continuity etc.,)
o ELECTRICAL SERVICE DROPPERS
o PRECOMMISSIONING MEASURES PRIOR TO CEILING BOARDING (Physical Checks)
o FINAL FIX LIGHTS
o FA / EM COMPONENTS
o SMALL POWER ACCESSORIES
o ELV COMPONENTS
o T & C - LIGHTING
o T & C - SMALL POWER
o T & C - DB
o T & C - SMDB
o T & C - MDB
o T & C - PFC
o T & C - EMERGENCY LIGHTING
o T & C - FIRE ALARM
o T & C - ALL ELV INCL SECURITY, TEL & DATA
o T & C - EARTHING & LIGHTNING
o T & C - BMS INTERFACE
Page 2 of 7

Project:

Works:
Title:

o
o
T & C - BMS INTEGRATION

ANY OTHER SYSTEM NOT INCLUDED ABOVE
Test the following items, where relevant, in the sequence indicated:

Continuity of ring final circuit conductors
Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipotential bonding
Earth electrode resistance
Insulation resistance
Insulation of site built assemblies
Protection by electrical separation
Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during erection
Insulation of non-conducting floors
Polarity
Earth fault loop impedance
Operation of residual current devices
Carry out voltage tests on multi-core power cables as described in the relevant BS Specification.
Carry out fire alarm tests in conjunction with the public address/ background music system to
determine the audibility of the voice evacuation speakers in all areas of the building with doors
closed.
Carry out tests to determine correct operation of MCB'S & MCCB'S.
Refer to particular specification sections for further testing requirements of each system.
EQUIPMENT TESTS
Submit to the Engineer for comment, manufacturers' certificates of all applicable tests applied to
the equipment such as switchboards, distribution boards and the like which are carried out at
the manufacturer's works, prior to such equipment being dispatched to site. Generally all tests
will follow the applicable British Standard testing procedures applicable to the equipment / system type.
Page 3 of 7

Project:

Works:
Title:

FACTORY / SITE VISIT

The following items of equipment require a sample site or factory visit to witness testing prior to
approval of materials:
o
o
o
o
Low Voltage switchgear

Power Factor Correction
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Standby Generator
The selection of type (Site or Factory) will be by the Engineer.

The above visits will require at least one employee of the engineer, one employee from the client or other supervising body and a representative of the contractor. The MEP contractor will
include all costs associated with travel, food and accommodation for such visits and arrange
accordingly. The timely arrangement without affecting construction programme of works will be
the responsibility of the contractors.
COMMISSIONING
Carry out commissioning tests to determine that all equipment and systems are fully operational
and that all aspects function properly. The results of these tests are to be recorded in the manner
directed by the Engineer on 'Commissioning Test Sheets' and signed by the Contractor and a
representative of the Employer. Failure to obtain such signatures may result in further tests being
required.
Where equipment and systems are designed to be inter-active the commissioning tests must include a full demonstration of the related systems in normal and emergency operation.
Commissioning of the following equipment is to be carried out by the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Main switchboards in accordance with BS / IEC 60439

Emergency lighting equipment. In accordance with BS 5266
Power factor improvement equipment. In accordance with BS / IEC 60439
Fire alarm equipment in accordance with BS 5839 / NFPA.
Voice Annunciation, Public address and background music system in accordance
with BS 5839 Part 8
Structured cabling system in accordance with EIA/TIA 568.
All other systems as required by associated system BS or agreed International
Standard.
Allow sufficient time and indicate clearly within the building programme for commissioning, testing and witnessing of tests.
Page 4 of 7

Project:

Works:
Title:

RECORD OF TESTS COMMISSIONING AND INSPECTION

Compile a comprehensive record of all test results and inspection certificates into adequately
bound and indexed volumes to withstand continual usage comprising.
2.
3.
Manufacturers' test certificates.

Fire alarm test results in accordance with the model certificates for installation, commissioning,
testing and inspection described in BS 5839.
1.
2.
3.
Certificate of compliance for emergency lighting systems to BS 5266.

Inspection certificate of the form prescribed in the IEE Regulations.
Completion certificate of the form prescribed in the IEE Regulations.
Provide the employer with two copies of the test records on the practical completion date of the
contract.
TEST PROCEDURES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
TEST NO.1 CONTINUITY OF RING FINAL CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
Alternative 1
1.
2.
Test instrument - low reading ohmmeter to 3 decimal places.

Before conductors are connected to distribution board terminals record resistances of P, N
and c.p.c.
1.
2. Connect conductors to distribution board terminals and record resistances of P, N, and c.p.c.to
socket outlet nearest the mid-point of ring. The test lead resistance must be deducted from each
total reading.
Alternative 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test instrument - low reading ohmmeter to 3 decimal places.

Before conductors are connected to distribution board terminals record resistances of P, N
and c.p.c.
Connect together P, N, and c.p.c. at socket outlet nearest to mid-point of ring.
At distribution board, record resistance across P and N terminals.
At distribution board, record resistance across P and c.p.c. terminals.
TEST NO.2 CONTINUITY OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

1.
Test instrument for copper or al. c.p.c. ohmmeter.
2.
Record resistance of c.p.c. end to end. The test lead resistance must be deducted from reading obtained.
Page 5 of 7

Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
If c.p.c. is of the same C.S.A. and materials as the P or N, it is permissible to connect either P or N
conductor to c.p.c. at one extreme. Resistance of c.p.c. would then be 0.5 of the reading obtained.
4.
If c.p.c. is of a different C.S.A., but the same material, it is acceptable to proceed as above and then
apply the ratio formula.
Resistance of c.p.c. =
Reading x C.S.A. of P(or N)

C.S.A.(P or N) + C.S.A.(c.p.c.)
TEST NO.3 EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE

1.
2.
Test instrument - earth tester ET3 null balance.

Resistance required depends upon the use of earth electrode
TEST NO.4 INSULATION RESISTANCE

1.
2.
3.
Test instrument - 500V insulation tester.

With all fuse links in place and all switches closed, the insulation resistance to earth is to be not less
than 1 megohm.
All current using equipment should be disconnected.
TEST NO.5 INSULATION OF SITE-BUILT ASSEMBLIES

1.
Generally not applicable to assemblies of factory-built units with individual enclosures, e.g. switch
fuses, isolators, distribution boards. However, interconnecting cabling in this latter case must conform,
at least, to Test No. 4.
TEST NO.6 PROTECTION BY ELECTRICAL SEPARATION

1.
Ref. IEE Reg 613-11, deals with segregation of safety extra low voltage systems.
TEST NO.7 PROTECTION BY BARRIERS OF ENCLOSURES PROVIDED DURING ERECTION

1.
Ref. IEE Reg 613-12, deals generally with cases in which, under normal conditions, live parts are exposed.
TEST NO.8 INSULATION OF NON-CONDUCTING FLOORS AND WALLS

1.
2.
Test instrument - insulation tester with plate type contacts.

This will almost certainly be a specialist installation and test requirements will be specified by installer.
TEST NO.9 POLARITY (FIRST LIVE TEST)

1.
2.
Test instrument - voltmeter, Martindale tester or polar test device.

Check fuses and single pole control devices are connected in phase conductor.
Page 6 of 7

Project:

Works:
Title:

3.
4.
Check centre socket connected to phase conductor in E.S. lamp holders, etc.
Check socket outlets.
TEST NO.10 EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE (LINE/EARTH)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test instrument - proprietary EFLI tester.

Test at origin of supply, disconnect main equipotential bonding conductor.
Test at extremities of installation, connect main equipotential bonding conductor.
Check against design data.
Note 1 - where protective conductor is wholly or mainly conduit etc., effective value of c.p.c. is twice
3. minus 2. above
TEST NO.11 OPERATION OF RESIDUAL CURRENT AND FAULT VOLTAGE OPERATED DEVICES
1.
2.
Test instrument - proprietary tester with duration limiter.

The tester should indicate that the duration does not exceed 0.4 seconds or 5 seconds, whichever is
appropriate.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING TO CLIENT

Allow for sufficient time to demonstrate all systems to the clients personnel and train them sufficiently to
use and operate each system. The client will be deemed to employ adequately qualified staff (at least to
Diploma level in relevant subjects) to receive such training. The demonstration and training will include for
a formal meeting room seminar and hands-on workshop presentation of all system components and operating systems. The contractor will submit a demonstration and training schedule for approval to include for
multiple day training sessions as required.
Page 7 of 7

APPENDIX F
________________________________________________________________________
CALCULATIONS
Cable Calculation Report

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
Calculated in accordance with BS 7671

Active Source: Transformer-1
Circuit
Id No.: 1
Connected From: Transformer-1
Load Type: Main cable to Switchboard
Name:
To: MDB-01 / Main Panel Board
Design Current Ib (A): 1,990.9
Comments:
Protective Device
[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed, [m] = Max.
Overcurrent protection:
Schneider Masterpact NW ACB NW50 H2 MLogic 5.0A High

Rating In (A): 2500 [f]
Overload Setting Ir (A): 2500
[f]
Conductors
[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed, [d] = Double
Single-core, 90C thermosetting insulated, non-arm Al Table 4J1

Neutral:
600 mm [a]
118 - In enclosed trench 450 x 300 minimum
Configuration: Horizontal Flat Spaced
10 x 4 x 1c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
600 [f]
90
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
= 30.0
=1
Ca
Cg
= 1.00
= 1.00
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In
Min. Cable Capacity Iz
Actual Cable Rating It
[BS 7671, Table 4B1]
Sized For: Phase Current Carrying Capacity

=
=
=
=
1,990.9
2500
250.0
1,058.0
Load Current and Voltage Drop

Design Current Ib (A/PF)
3rd Harmonic Current (A)
Voltage Drop - This circuit (V/%)
Voltage Drop - From Source (V/%)
Earth Fault
Auto-sized for current-carrying capacity and voltage drop limits.
Overload Setting Ir = 2500
L1
1990.9 / 0.92
0.0
2.11 / 0.92
2.11 / 0.92
[Ir _> Ib]

[BS 7671, Appendix 4.5, Formula (1)]
[It _> Iz]
L2
1990.9 / 0.92
0.0
2.11 / 0.92
2.11 / 0.92
Circuit Protective Conductor (mm)
Earth Fault Loop Impedance ( )

Ze 0.00597
Z1 0.00163
Disconnection time (s)
From characteristic: 0.14
CPC Adiabatic check (mm 2 )
CPC Section = Separate 600
Z2 0.01279
L3
Neutral
1990.9 / 0.92
0.0
2.11 / 0.92
2.11 / 0.92
Separate 600 [f]
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02020
Max. Zs 0.02788
Maximum for circuit: 5.00
Separate 600 [f]
Total = 600.0
Min. Section = 45.51
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
11.43
Phase Fault
Phase Fault Current Max./Min. (kA)
Protective Device Breaking Capacity (kA)
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 38.681 / 38.681

Icu: 150
Ics: 150
CPD Energy Let-through (As): 15.79 x 10 6
Project: Transformer 1 West Beach Club.p17

Created using: v2014.0.0 BS 7671:2008 (2013) - Ted Jacob Engineering Group Inc
Load End:
30.610 / 25.132
Adiabatic Limit kS (As): 3,180.96 x 10 6

Page 1 of 14
Printed on: 11/18/2014

Copyright Amtech Group Ltd 2014

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 10
Connected From: MDB-01
Load Type: Distribution Board
Name:
To: SMDB-R17
Design Current Ib (A): 189.0
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX250F TM-D

Rating In (A): 250
[f]
[f]
Conductors
Multicore, 90C thermosetting, armoured *RUN TO 70C Cu

Neutral:
150 mm [a]
31 - On horizontal/vertical perforated tray
Arrangement: Horizontal Touching
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
150 [f]
60
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
No. of circuits per tray = 4
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In

[BS 7671, Table 4C4]

=
=
=
=
189.0
250
272.5
332.0

Earth Fault
L1
189.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.85 / 0.80
3.96 / 1.72
Not Subject to Simultaneous Overload
[Ir _> Ib]

[BS 7671, Appendix 4.5, Formula (3/4)]
[It _> Iz]
L2
189.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.85 / 0.80
3.96 / 1.72
L3
Neutral
189.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.85 / 0.80
3.96 / 1.72
Circuit Protective Conductor (mm) Armour 230 + Separate 25 [f]
Z2 0.02517
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.01007
CPC Section = Armour 92 + Separate 25
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.04888
Max. Zs 0.07667
Armour 230 + Separate 25 [f]
Total = 117.0
Min. Section = 5.13
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.72
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
15.424 / 8.515
Adiabatic Limit kS (As): 297.56 x 10 6

Page 2 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 11
Name:
To: SMDB-R18
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX160S TM-D

Rating In (A): 125
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
50 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
50 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
119.0
125
154.5
163.0

Earth Fault
L1
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.13 / 0.93
4.24 / 1.84
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
L3
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.13 / 0.93
4.24 / 1.84
Z2 0.02481
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.01876
Neutral
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.13 / 0.93
4.24 / 1.84
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.05665
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 61.0
Min. Section = 3.64
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.08
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
11.520 / 5.471

Page 3 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 12
Name:
To: SMDB-RE-04
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 200
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
60.0
200
202.9
251.0
L1

60.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.56 / 0.24
2.66 / 1.16
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
60.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.56 / 0.24
2.66 / 1.16
L3
Neutral
60.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.56 / 0.24
2.66 / 1.16
0.0
0.0
Z2 0.01410
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.00997
CPC Section = Armour 58.8 + Separate 50
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03974
Max. Zs 0.09583
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 5.08
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
5.81
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
16.315 / 8.839

Page 4 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 13
Load Type: Fixed equipment three phase and neutral
Name:
To: Load-2
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NS MCCB NS800 L MLogic 5.0A

Rating In (A): 800
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
300 mm [a]
2 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
10
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=1
Cg
= 0.88
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=

Voltage drop limit = 18.4 V (BS 7671:2008 (2013) App. 4)
800.0
800
454.5
510.0
L1

800.0 / 0.95
0.0
0.38 / 0.17
2.49 / 1.08
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
800.0 / 0.95
0.0
0.38 / 0.17
2.49 / 1.08
L3
Neutral
800.0 / 0.95
0.0
0.38 / 0.17
2.49 / 1.08
Z2 0.00112
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.00054
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02166
Max. Zs 0.08713
Total = 495.2
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
10.66
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 150
Ics: 150

Load End:
28.924 / 22.795

Page 5 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 14
Name:
To: Load-1
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 63
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
50 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
50 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
10.0
63
63.3
163.0

L1

10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.28 / 0.99
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.28 / 0.99
Z2 0.01572
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.01876
L3
Neutral
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.28 / 0.99
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.04883
Max. Zs 0.47070
Total = 86.0
Min. Section = 3.87
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.73
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
11.520 / 5.471

Page 6 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 2
Name:
To: SMDB - R09
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
150
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
113.0
160
172.7
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
4.00 / 1.74
6.11 / 2.65
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
4.00 / 1.74
6.11 / 2.65
L3
Neutral
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
4.00 / 1.74
6.11 / 2.65
Z2 0.05288
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.03738
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.10373
Max. Zs 0.15335
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 2.61
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.23
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
6.315 / 2.881

Page 7 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 3
Name:
To: SMDB-10
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
142
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
114.5
160
173.0
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
114.5 / 0.90
0.0
3.84 / 1.67
5.95 / 2.59
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
114.5 / 0.90
0.0
3.84 / 1.67
5.95 / 2.59
L3
Neutral
114.5 / 0.90
0.0
3.84 / 1.67
5.95 / 2.59
Z2 0.05006
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.03539
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.09898
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 2.71
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.33
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
6.618 / 3.031

Page 8 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 4
Name:
To: SMDB-R11
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
120
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
118.0
160
173.8
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.35 / 1.46
5.46 / 2.37
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.35 / 1.46
5.46 / 2.37
L3
Neutral
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.35 / 1.46
5.46 / 2.37
Z2 0.04230
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.02991
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08596
Max. Zs 0.15335
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 3.03
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.69
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
7.617 / 3.537

Page 9 of 14


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 5
Name:
To: SMDB-R12
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 125
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
120
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
119.0
125
154.5
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.38 / 1.47
5.49 / 2.38
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.38 / 1.47
5.49 / 2.38
L3
Neutral
119.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.38 / 1.47
5.49 / 2.38
Z2 0.04230
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.02991
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08596
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 3.03
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.69
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
7.617 / 3.537

Page 10 of 14

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 6
Name:
To: SMDB-R13
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
110
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
113.0
160
172.7
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.93 / 1.28
5.04 / 2.19
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.93 / 1.28
5.04 / 2.19
L3
Neutral
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.93 / 1.28
5.04 / 2.19
Z2 0.03878
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.02741
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08006
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 3.21
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.88
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
8.176 / 3.826

Page 11 of 14

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 7
Name:
To: SMDB-R14
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
100
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
118.0
160
173.8
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.79 / 1.21
4.90 / 2.13
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.79 / 1.21
4.90 / 2.13
L3
Neutral
118.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.79 / 1.21
4.90 / 2.13
Z2 0.03525
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.02492
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.07418
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 3.41
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
3.11
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
8.821 / 4.168

Page 12 of 14

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 8
Name:
To: SMDB-R15
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 200
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
92
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
141.0
200
215.8
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
141.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.10 / 1.35
5.21 / 2.26
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
141.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.10 / 1.35
5.21 / 2.26
L3
Neutral
141.0 / 0.90
0.0
3.10 / 1.35
5.21 / 2.26
Z2 0.04817
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.02293
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08335
Max. Zs 0.09583
Total = 83.8
Min. Section = 3.32
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.77
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
9.412 / 4.487

Page 13 of 14

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 9
Name:
To: SMDB-R16
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 250
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
150 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
150 [f]
60
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
203.0
250
275.8
332.0

Earth Fault
L1
203.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.00 / 0.87
4.10 / 1.78
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
203.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.00 / 0.87
4.10 / 1.78
L3
Neutral
203.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.00 / 0.87
4.10 / 1.78
Z2 0.01236
Ze 0.02020
Z1 0.01007
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03971
Max. Zs 0.07667
Total = 187.0
Min. Section = 5.08
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
5.82
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.610 / 25.132

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
15.424 / 8.515

Page 14 of 14
Switchboard Schedule
Project Reference: ProDesign
Job Number: 0208972
Engineer :
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Document No:
Issue Date :
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
V21.1
7/19/2013
Board Data
Name:
L1
L2
L3
Id No:
MDB-01
Model No:
Main Panel Board
Ze ():
0.0202
Total Connected Load (A):
2212.16
2212.16
2212.16
Board Rating (A):
Fault Rating (kA):
Total Diversified Load (A):
1990.95
1990.95
1990.95
Sep. CPC
mm 2
Length
m
Main Panel Board
Cables
Phase
L1,L2,L3
Id No:
Name
2
Load (A)
Diversified
Connected
Pf
3rd
Harmonic
(%)
Protective Device (A)

In
Ir
Type
RCD
mA
Cable
mm 2
Cores
Cable Type
113.0
0.90
0.00
160
160
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c
Multicore, 90C thermosetting,

armoured *RUN TO 70C Cu
50
150
0.90
0.00
160
160
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
142
0.90
0.00
160
160
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
120
0.90
0.00
125
125
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
120
0.90
0.00
160
160
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
110
0.90
0.00
160
160
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
100
0.90
0.00
200
200
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

25
92
113.0
L1,L2,L3
114.5
114.5
L1,L2,L3
118.0
118.0
L1,L2,L3
119.0
119.0
L1,L2,L3
113.0
113.0
L1,L2,L3
118.0
118.0
L1,L2,L3
141.0
141.0

Page 1 of 2

Switchboard Schedule
Project Reference: ProDesign
Job Number: 0208972
Engineer :
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Document No:
Issue Date :
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
V21.1
7/19/2013
Board Data
Name:
L1
L2
L3
Id No:
MDB-01
Model No:
Main Panel Board
Ze ():
0.0202
Total Connected Load (A):
2212.16
2212.16
2212.16
Board Rating (A):
Fault Rating (kA):
Total Diversified Load (A):
1990.95
1990.95
1990.95
Sep. CPC
mm 2
Length
m
Main Panel Board
Cables
Phase
L1,L2,L3
Id No:
Name
9
Load (A)
Diversified
Connected
203.0
Pf
0.90
3rd
Harmonic
(%)
0.00
Protective Device (A)

In
Ir
Type
RCD
mA
Cable
mm 2
Cores
Cable Type
250
250
MCCB
N/A
150
1 x 1 x 4c

95
60
0.90
0.00
250
250
MCCB
N/A
150
1 x 1 x 4c

25
60
0.90
0.00
125
125
MCCB
N/A
50
1 x 1 x 4c

25
40
0.90
0.00
200
200
MCCB
N/A
95
1 x 1 x 4c

50
40
0.95
0.00
800
800
MCCB
N/A
300
2 x 1 x 4c

240
10
1.00
0.00
63
63
MCCB
N/A
50
1 x 1 x 4c

50
40
203.0
L1,L2,L3
10
189.0
189.0
L1,L2,L3
11
119.0
119.0
L1,L2,L3
12
60.0
60.0
L1,L2,L3
13
800.0
800.0
L1,L2,L3
14
10.0
10.0

Page 2 of 2

Energy-based Discrimination
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
Circuit-breaker Protection Upstream

Id No: Upstream Circuit
Downstream Circuit
Protective Device Type: Upstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
Rating
(A)
Discrimination
Limit (kA)
Pscc
(kA)
Status
1
2

2500
160
36
6.3
Ok
1
3

2500
160
100
6.6
Ok
1
4

2500
160
36
7.6
Ok
1
5

2500
125
100
7.6
Ok
1
6

2500
160
100
8.2
Ok
1
7

2500
160
100
8.8
Ok
1
8

2500
200
36
9.4
Ok
1
9

2500
250
36
15.4
Ok
1
10

2500
250
36
15.4
Ok
1
11

2500
125
100
11.5
Ok
1
12

2500
200
36
16.3
Ok
1
14

2500
63
36
11.5
Ok
1
13

2500
800
40
28.9
Ok

Page 1 of 1

Time-Current Discrimination
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
Downstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
Schneider Masterpact NW ACB NW50 H2 MLogic 5.0A High 2500
10
11
12
14
13

Rating
(A)
160
160
160
125
160
160
200
250
250
125
200
63
800
Page 1 of 1
Characteristics
Overlap
From
To
Pscc
(kA)
Status
6.3
Ok
6.6
Ok
7.6
Ok
7.6
Ok
8.2
Ok
8.8
Ok
9.4
Ok
15.4
Ok
15.4
Ok
11.5
Ok
16.3
Ok
11.5
Ok
28.9
Ok


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 15
Connected From: Transformer-2
Name:
To: MDB-02 / Main Panel Board 2
Design Current Ib (A): 1,016.1
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 2500 [f]
[f]
Conductors
Single-core, 90C thermosetting insulated, non-arm Al Table 4J1

Neutral:
600 mm [a]
118 - In enclosed trench 450 x 300 minimum
Configuration: Horizontal Flat Spaced
10 x 4 x 1c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
600 [f]
90
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
= 30.0
=1
Ca
Cg
= 1.00
= 1.00
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In

=
=
=
=
1,016.1
2500
250.0
1,058.0

Earth Fault
L1
1016.1 / 0.91
0.0
1.09 / 0.48
1.09 / 0.48
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
1016.1 / 0.91
0.0
1.09 / 0.48
1.09 / 0.48

Ze 0.00277
Z1 0.00163
Z2 0.02223
L3
Neutral
1016.1 / 0.91
0.0
1.09 / 0.48
1.09 / 0.48
Separate 185 [a]
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02558
Max. Zs 0.02788
Separate 185 [a]
Total = 185.0
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
9.03
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 83.348 / 83.348

Icu: 150
Ics: 150
Project: Transformer 2, West Beach Club.p17

Load End:
53.147 / 38.503

Page 1 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 17
Name:
To: DB- SS
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX100H TM-D

Rating In (A): 32
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
6 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
6 [f]
15
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
4.5
32
32.1
45.0
L1

4.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.21 / 0.09
1.30 / 0.57
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
4.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.21 / 0.09
1.30 / 0.57
Z2 0.03153
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.05543
L3
Neutral
4.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.21 / 0.09
1.30 / 0.57
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.10815
Max. Zs 0.77367
Total = 20.4
Min. Section = 2.53
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.14
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
4.877 / 2.049

Page 2 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 18
Name:
To: SMDB-R-06
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
200
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
113.0
160
172.7
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.33 / 2.32
6.42 / 2.79
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.33 / 2.32
6.42 / 2.79
L3
Neutral
113.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.33 / 2.32
6.42 / 2.79
Z2 0.07050
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.04984
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.14399
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 1.92
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
1.60
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
5.129 / 2.237

Page 3 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 19
Name:
To: SMDB-R-07
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
188
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
121.0
160
174.4
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
121.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.39 / 2.34
6.48 / 2.82
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
121.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.39 / 2.34
6.48 / 2.82
L3
Neutral
121.0 / 0.90
0.0
5.39 / 2.34
6.48 / 2.82
Z2 0.05111
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.04685
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.12231
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 128.8
Min. Section = 2.26
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
1.89
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
5.435 / 2.374

Page 4 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 20
Name:
To: SMDB-R-08
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400S Micrologic 6.3 E-M

Rating In (A): 320
[f]
Overload Setting Ir (A): N/A
Earth fault protection: : 320A
Conductors

Neutral:
185 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
185 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
255.0
320
351.9
378.0
Overload Setting Ir = N/A
L1

255.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.43 / 0.62
2.52 / 1.10
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
255.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.43 / 0.62
2.52 / 1.10
L3
Neutral
255.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.43 / 0.62
2.52 / 1.10
Z2 0.00802
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.00570
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03906
Max. Zs 0.65337
Total = 197.0
Min. Section = 8.91
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
5.91
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
26.224 / 14.087

Page 5 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 21
Name:
To: SMDB-LL1
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 200
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
120 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
120 [f]
18
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
142.0
200
216.0
290.0

Earth Fault
L1
142.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.50 / 0.22
1.60 / 0.69
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
142.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.50 / 0.22
1.60 / 0.69
L3
Neutral
142.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.50 / 0.22
1.60 / 0.69
Z2 0.00449
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.00371
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03343
Max. Zs 0.09583
Total = 152.4
Min. Section = 5.47
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
6.91
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
33.872 / 19.051

Page 6 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 22
Name:
To: SMDB-RE-01
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 63
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
35 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
35 [f]
143
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
34.0
63
66.0
135.0
L1

34.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.76 / 1.20
3.85 / 1.68
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
34.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.76 / 1.20
3.85 / 1.68
Z2 0.12433
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.09160
L3
Neutral
34.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.76 / 1.20
3.85 / 1.68
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.23682
Max. Zs 0.47068
Total = 48.0
Min. Section = 1.17
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.98
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
2.947 / 1.243

Page 7 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 23
Name:
To: FP-3
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 40
[f]
[m]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
143
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
8.5
40
40.3
110.0
L1

8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
Z2 0.17214
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.12442
L3
Neutral
8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.31723
Max. Zs 0.61892
Total = 38.0
Min. Section = 0.88
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.73
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
2.190 / 0.919

Page 8 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 24
Name:
To: FP-4
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 40
[f]
[m]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
143
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
8.5
40
40.3
110.0
L1

8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
Z2 0.17214
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.12442
L3
Neutral
8.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.92 / 0.40
2.01 / 0.87
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.31723
Max. Zs 0.61892
Total = 38.0
Min. Section = 0.88
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.73
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
2.190 / 0.919

Page 9 of 16


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 25
Name:
To: LIFT
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 32
[f]
[m]
Conductors

Neutral:
10 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
10 [f]
143
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
15.8
32
33.3
62.0
L1

15.8 / 0.90
0.0
4.15 / 1.80
5.24 / 2.28
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
15.8 / 0.90
0.0
4.15 / 1.80
5.24 / 2.28
Z2 0.28169
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.31373
L3
Neutral
15.8 / 0.90
0.0
4.15 / 1.80
5.24 / 2.28
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.61564
Max. Zs 0.77362
Total = 23.2
Min. Section = 6.37
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.38
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100
Max. disconnection time (s) = (kS/I): 9.82

Load End:
0.880 / 0.367
Actual disconnection time (s) = 3.88

Page 10 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 26
Name:
To: EMDB1
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX630S Micrologic 6.3

Rating In (A): 630
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
240 mm [a]
2 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
240 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.72
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
418.4
630
437.5
445.0
L1

418.4 / 0.93
0.0
0.94 / 0.41
2.03 / 0.88
Earth Fault
Subject to Simultaneous Overload
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
418.4 / 0.93
0.0
0.94 / 0.41
2.03 / 0.88
L3
Neutral
418.4 / 0.93
0.0
0.94 / 0.41
2.03 / 0.88
Z2 0.00460
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.00243
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03261
Max. Zs 0.33189
Total = 471.2
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
7.08
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
36.759 / 22.303

Page 11 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 27
Load Type: Power Factor Correction
Name:
To: PFC-1
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 800
[f]
[f]
Conductors

2 x 1 x 3c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=1
Cg
= 0.88
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
412.4
800
234.3
510.0
L1

412.4 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.09 / 0.48
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
412.4 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.09 / 0.48
L3
Neutral
412.4 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.09 / 0.48
Z2 0.00469
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.00216
N/A
N/A
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03243
Max. Zs 0.08713
Total = 455.2
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
7.12
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 52.750

Icu: 150
Ics: 150

Load End:
37.427 / 36.499

Page 12 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 28
Name:
To: Load-3
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 63
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
50 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
50 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
10.0
63
63.3
163.0

L1

10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
1.26 / 0.55
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
1.26 / 0.55
Z2 0.01572
Ze 0.02558
Z1 0.01876
L3
Neutral
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
1.26 / 0.55
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.05844
Max. Zs 0.47071
Total = 86.0
Min. Section = 4.12
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
3.95
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 53.147 / 38.503

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
12.833 / 5.693

Page 13 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 30
Connected From: EMDB1
Name:
To: ESMDB-MECH
Comments:
Protective Device
Generic BS 88-2 Fuse System E

Rating In (A): 250
[a]
Conductors
Multicore, 90C thermosetting insulated, armoured LSF Cu Table 4E4

Neutral:
185 mm [a]
20 - Clipped direct on a wooden/masonry wall
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
185 [f]
260
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
= 30.0
=1
Ca
Cg
= 1.00
= 1.00
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
248.4
250
250.0
441.0

Earth Fault
L1
248.4 / 0.95
0.0
8.25 / 3.59
10.29 / 4.47
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
248.4 / 0.95
0.0
8.25 / 3.59
10.29 / 4.47

Ze 0.03261
Z1 0.03798
Z2 0.07167
L3
Neutral
248.4 / 0.95
0.0
8.25 / 3.59
10.29 / 4.47
Separate 95 [f]
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.14190
Max. Zs 0.15775
Separate 95 [f]
Total = 95.0
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
1.63
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 36.759 / 22.303

Icu: 80
Ics: 80

Load End:
6.162 / 2.709

Page 14 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 31
Name:
To: ESMD-LL1
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 125
[f]
[m]
Conductors
Multicore, 90C thermosetting insulated, armoured Cu Table 4E4

Neutral:
70 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
70 [f]
12
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
= 30.0
=1
Ca
Cg
= 1.00
= 1.00
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
106.5
125
125.0
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
106.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.37 / 0.16
2.41 / 1.05
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
106.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.37 / 0.16
2.41 / 1.05

Ze 0.03261
Z1 0.00419
CPC Section = Armour 42.1
Z2 0.01829
L3
Neutral
106.5 / 0.90
0.0
0.37 / 0.16
2.41 / 1.05
Armour 131 [f]
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.05241
Max. Zs 0.15334
Armour 131 [f]
Total = 42.1
Min. Section = 3.02
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.41
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 36.759 / 22.303

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
26.285 / 13.344

Page 15 of 16

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 32
Name:
To: ESMD-LL2
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 80
[f]
[m]

Conductors
Multicore, 90C thermosetting insulated, armoured Cu Table 4E4

Neutral:
50 mm [a]
30 - On horizontal/vertical unperforated tray
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
50 [f]
260
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
= 30.0
=1
Ca
Cg
= 1.00
= 1.00
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
64.4
80
80.0
187.0
L1

64.4 / 0.90
0.0
6.81 / 2.96
8.85 / 3.85
Earth Fault

[Ir _> Ib]
[It _> Iz]
L2
64.4 / 0.90
0.0
6.81 / 2.96
8.85 / 3.85

Ze 0.03261
Z1 0.13068
*
CPC Section = Armour 29
Z2 0.59436
L3
Neutral
64.4 / 0.90
0.0
6.81 / 2.96
8.85 / 3.85
0.0
0.0
Armour 90 [f]
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.75014
Max. Zs 2.61368
*
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
Armour 90 [f]
0.31
Total = 29.0
Min. Section = 0.81
*Calculated for Earth Fault protection
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 36.759 / 22.303

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
2.166 / 0.861

Page 16 of 16
Cable Schedule
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Engineer:
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
Document No:
V21.1
Created On:
7/19/2013
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
Length
(m)
CPC (mm2 ):
Separate
Integral
Volt Drop
%
Single-core, 90C thermosetting

insulated, non-arm Al Table 4J1
90
185
0

15
1 x 1 x 4c
95

MDB-02
SMDB-R-07
1 x 1 x 4c
95
20
MDB-02
SMDB-R-08
1 x 1 x 4c
21
MDB-02
SMDB-LL1
22
Id No:
Name:
Connected From:
Connected To:
Cores
15
Transformer-2
MDB-02
10 x 4 x 1c
600
17
MDB-02
DB- SS
1 x 1 x 4c
18
MDB-02
SMDB-R-06
19
Cable Type
01
Protective Device
Ir(A)
In(A)
Type
RCD
0.48
2500
2500
ACB
N/A
6
0
0.57
32
32
MCCB
N/A
200
50
0
2.79
160
160
MCCB
N/A

188
70
0
2.82
160
160
MCCB
N/A
185

40
95
0
1.10
N/A
320
MCCB
320000
mA
1 x 1 x 4c
120

18
70
0
0.69
200
200
MCCB
N/A
MDB-02
SMDB-RE-01
1 x 1 x 4c
35

143
16
0
1.68
63
63
MCCB
N/A
23
MDB-02
FP-3
1 x 1 x 4c
25

143
10
0
0.87
40
40
MCCB
N/A
24
MDB-02
FP-4
1 x 1 x 4c
25

143
10
0
0.87
40
40
MCCB
N/A
25
MDB-02
LIFT
1 x 1 x 4c
10

143
6
0
2.28
32
32
MCCB
N/A
26
MDB-02
EMDB1
2 x 1 x 4c
240

40
240
0
0.88
630
630
MCCB
630000
mA

CSA
(mm2 )
8/9/2013
Page 1 of 2

Cable Schedule
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Engineer:
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
Document No:
V21.1
Created On:
7/19/2013
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
Length
(m)
CPC (mm2 ):
Separate
Integral
Volt Drop
%

40
240
0
50

40
1 x 1 x 4c
185
EMDB1
ESMD-LL1
1 x 1 x 4c
70
Multicore, 90C thermosetting

insulated, armoured LSF Cu Table
4E4
insulated, armoured Cu Table 4E4
EMDB1
ESMD-LL2
1 x 1 x 4c
50

insulated, armoured Cu Table 4E4
Id No:
Name:
Connected From:
Connected To:
Cores
27
MDB-02
PFC-1
2 x 1 x 3c
300
28
MDB-02
Load-3
1 x 1 x 4c
30
EMDB1
ESMDB-MECH
31
32

CSA
(mm2 )
Cable Type
8/9/2013
01
Protective Device
Ir(A)
In(A)
Type
RCD
0.48
800
800
MCCB
N/A
50
0
0.55
63
63
MCCB
N/A
260
95
0
4.47
N/A
250
Fuse
N/A
12
0
0
1.05
125
125
MCCB
N/A
260
0
0
3.85
80
80
MCCB
80000m
A
Page 2 of 2

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Downstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
Rating
(A)
Discrimination
Limit (kA)
Pscc
(kA)
Status
15
17

2500
32
70
4.9
Ok
15
18

2500
160
100
5.1
Ok
15
19

2500
160
100
5.4
Ok
15
20

2500
320
No Data
26.2
No Data
15
21

2500
200
100
33.9
Ok
15
26

2500
630
100
36.8
Ok
15
28

2500
63
70
12.8
Ok
15
22

2500
63
100
2.9
Ok
15
23

2500
40
100
2.2
Ok
15
24

2500
40
100
2.2
Ok
26
31

630
125
100
26.3
Ok

Page 1 of 1

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
Downstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
15
17
15
18
15
19
15
20
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400S Micrologic 6.3 E-M 320
15
21
15
26
15
28
15
22
15
23
15
24
15
25
32
26
630
30
Generic BS 88-2 Fuse System E
250
26
630
31
125
26
630
32
80

Rating
(A)
32
160
160
200
630
63
63
40
40
Page 1 of 1
Characteristics
Overlap
From
To
Pscc
(kA)
Status
4.9
Ok
5.1
Ok
5.4
Ok
26.2
Ok
33.9
Ok
36.8
Ok
12.8
Ok
2.9
Ok
2.2
Ok
2.2
Ok
0.9
Ok
6.2
Ok
26.3
Ok
2.2
Ok


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 33
Name:
To: SMDB -LL2
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 200
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
120 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
120 [f]
14
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
152.0
200
218.2
290.0

Earth Fault
L1
152.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.42 / 0.18
2.36 / 1.03
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
152.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.42 / 0.18
2.36 / 1.03
L3
Neutral
152.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.42 / 0.18
2.36 / 1.03
Z2 0.00349
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00288
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02544
Max. Zs 0.09583
Total = 152.4
Min. Section = 6.07
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
9.08
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
24.593 / 16.843

Page 1 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 34
Name:
To: SMDB-R01
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400H Micrologic 6.3

Rating In (A): 400
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
300 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
315.0
400
439.0
510.0
L1

315.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.27 / 0.55
3.21 / 1.40
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
315.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.27 / 0.55
3.21 / 1.40
L3
Neutral
315.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.27 / 0.55
3.21 / 1.40
Z2 0.00870
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00433
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03128
Max. Zs 0.52273
Total = 197.6
Min. Section = 8.65
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
7.38
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
20.449 / 13.260

Page 2 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 35
Name:
To: SMDB-R02
Comments:
Protective Device
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400H Micrologic 6.3 E-M

Rating In (A): 320
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
240 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
240 [f]
66
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
242.0
320
348.9
445.0
L1

242.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.84 / 0.80
3.78 / 1.64
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
242.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.84 / 0.80
3.78 / 1.64
L3
Neutral
242.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.84 / 0.80
3.78 / 1.64
Z2 0.01134
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00800
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03810
Max. Zs 0.65341
Total = 235.6
Min. Section = 9.13
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
6.06
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
16.259 / 9.527

Page 3 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 36
Name:
To: SMDB-R03
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 400
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
300 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
33
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
316.0
400
439.2
510.0
L1

316.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.05 / 0.46
2.99 / 1.30
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
316.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.05 / 0.46
2.99 / 1.30
L3
Neutral
316.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.05 / 0.46
2.99 / 1.30
Z2 0.00503
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00357
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02841
Max. Zs 0.52273
Total = 277.6
Min. Section = 9.43
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
8.13
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
21.711 / 14.466

Page 4 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 37
Name:
To: SMDB-R04
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 160
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
95 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
95 [f]
23
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
126.0
160
175.6
251.0

Earth Fault
L1
126.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.69 / 0.30
2.63 / 1.14
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
126.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.69 / 0.30
2.63 / 1.14
L3
Neutral
126.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.69 / 0.30
2.63 / 1.14
Z2 0.00811
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00573
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03126
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 108.8
Min. Section = 4.63
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
7.39
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
20.730 / 12.526

Page 5 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 38
Name:
To: SMDB-R05
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 100
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
35 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
35 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
36.0
100
102.1
135.0
L1

36.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.82 / 0.36
2.76 / 1.20
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
36.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.82 / 0.36
2.76 / 1.20
Z2 0.03478
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.02562
L3
Neutral
36.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.82 / 0.36
2.76 / 1.20
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.07224
Max. Zs 0.23959
Total = 48.0
Min. Section = 3.48
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
3.20
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
9.136 / 4.151

Page 6 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 39
Name:
To: SMDB-R-02
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 40
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
10 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
10 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
25.0
40
42.5
62.0
L1

25.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.86 / 0.81
3.80 / 1.65
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
25.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.86 / 0.81
3.80 / 1.65
Z2 0.05786
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.08776
L3
Neutral
25.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.86 / 0.81
3.80 / 1.65
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.15536
Max. Zs 0.61892
Total = 27.2
Min. Section = 1.78
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
1.49
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
3.071 / 1.295

Page 7 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 40
Name:
To: SMDB-R-03
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 40
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
10 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
10 [f]
20
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
16.0
40
41.0
62.0
L1

16.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.59 / 0.26
2.53 / 1.10
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
16.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.59 / 0.26
2.53 / 1.10
Z2 0.02893
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.04388
L3
Neutral
16.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.59 / 0.26
2.53 / 1.10
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08354
Max. Zs 0.61892
Total = 27.2
Min. Section = 3.10
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.76
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
5.926 / 2.544

Page 8 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 41
Name:
To: SMDB-Mech
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 320
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
185 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
185 [f]
28
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
16.3
320
320.1
378.0
L1

16.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.06 / 0.03
2.00 / 0.87
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
16.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.06 / 0.03
2.00 / 0.87
L3
Neutral
16.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.06 / 0.03
2.00 / 0.87
0.0
0.0
Z2 0.00562
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00399
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02866
Max. Zs 0.65341
Total = 197.0
Min. Section = 9.57
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
8.06
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
21.865 / 14.254

Page 9 of 19


Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 42
Name:
To: SMDB-GYM
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 125
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
70 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
70 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
91.0
125
135.5
207.0
L1

91.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.11 / 0.48
3.06 / 1.33
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
91.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.11 / 0.48
3.06 / 1.33
L3
Neutral
91.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.11 / 0.48
3.06 / 1.33
0.0
0.0
Z2 0.01754
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.01311
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.04583
Max. Zs 0.15334
Total = 87.4
Min. Section = 3.97
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
5.04
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
14.196 / 7.224

Page 10 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 43
Name:
To: Feeder Pillar (FP-1)
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 63
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
42
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
33.0
63
65.8
110.0
L1

33.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.06 / 0.46
3.00 / 1.30
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
33.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.06 / 0.46
3.00 / 1.30
Z2 0.03836
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.03654
L3
Neutral
33.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.06 / 0.46
3.00 / 1.30
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.08625
Max. Zs 0.47070
Total = 44.0
Min. Section = 3.02
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.68
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
6.828 / 2.999

Page 11 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 44
Name:
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 32
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
4.0
32
32.1
110.0
L1

4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.12 / 0.05
2.06 / 0.90
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.12 / 0.05
2.06 / 0.90
Z2 0.06182
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.03480
L3
Neutral
4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.12 / 0.05
2.06 / 0.90
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.10736
Max. Zs 0.77362
Total = 34.0
Min. Section = 2.54
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
2.15
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
7.126 / 3.140

Page 12 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 45
Name:
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 32
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
138
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
4.7
32
32.1
110.0
L1

4.7 / 0.90
0.0
0.49 / 0.21
2.43 / 1.06
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
4.7 / 0.90
0.0
0.49 / 0.21
2.43 / 1.06
Z2 0.12604
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.12007
L3
Neutral
4.7 / 0.90
0.0
0.49 / 0.21
2.43 / 1.06
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.25596
Max. Zs 0.77362
Total = 44.0
Min. Section = 1.08
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.90
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
2.241 / 0.948

Page 13 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 46
Name:
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 32
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
25 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
25 [f]
235
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
4.0
32
32.1
110.0
L1

4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.71 / 0.31
2.65 / 1.15
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.71 / 0.31
2.65 / 1.15
Z2 0.36317
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.20446
L3
Neutral
4.0 / 0.90
0.0
0.71 / 0.31
2.65 / 1.15
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.57658
Max. Zs 0.77362
Total = 34.0
Min. Section = 6.61
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
0.40
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100
CPD Energy Let-through (As): 6,008.56

Load End:
1.332 / 0.560

Page 14 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 47
Name:
To: Swimming Pool Equipment
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 250
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
185 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
185 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
188.0
250
272.3
378.0

Earth Fault
L1
188.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.03 / 0.45
2.97 / 1.29
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
188.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.03 / 0.45
2.97 / 1.29
L3
Neutral
188.0 / 0.90
0.0
1.03 / 0.45
2.97 / 1.29
Z2 0.00802
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00570
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.03237
Max. Zs 0.07667
Total = 197.0
Min. Section = 5.54
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
7.13
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
19.381 / 11.906

Page 15 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 48
Name:
To: Fire Pump
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 400
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
300 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
120
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
182.0
400
413.4
510.0
L1

182.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.15 / 0.94
4.09 / 1.78
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
182.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.15 / 0.94
4.09 / 1.78
L3
Neutral
182.0 / 0.90
0.0
2.15 / 0.94
4.09 / 1.78
Z2 0.01828
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.01298
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.05019
Max. Zs 0.52273
Total = 277.6
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.60
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 70
Ics: 70

Load End:
12.161 / 6.713

Page 16 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 49
Name:
To: Jockey Pump
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 40
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
10 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
10 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
8.3
40
40.3
62.0
L1

8.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.61 / 0.26
2.55 / 1.11
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
8.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.61 / 0.26
2.55 / 1.11
Z2 0.05786
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.08776
L3
Neutral
8.3 / 0.90
0.0
0.61 / 0.26
2.55 / 1.11
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.15536
Max. Zs 1.04547
Total = 27.2
Min. Section = 1.73
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
1.49
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 100
Ics: 100

Load End:
3.071 / 1.295

Page 17 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 50
Load Type: Power Factor Correction
Name:
To: PFC-2
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 800
[f]
[f]
Conductors

2 x 1 x 3c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
300 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=1
Cg
= 0.88
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
690.2
800
392.2
510.0
L1

690.2 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.94 / 0.84
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
690.2 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.94 / 0.84
L3
Neutral
690.2 / 0.00
0.0
0.00 / 0.00
1.94 / 0.84
Z2 0.00469
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.00216
N/A
N/A
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.02693
Max. Zs 0.08713
Total = 455.2
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
8.58
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 30.105

Icu: 150
Ics: 150

Load End:
24.483 / 24.125

Page 18 of 19

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date :
8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Circuit
Id No.: 51
Name:
To: Load-4
Comments:
Protective Device

Rating In (A): 63
[f]
[f]
Conductors

Neutral:
50 mm [a]
1 x 1 x 4c
Size (mm2):
Length (m):
50 [f]
40
Rating Factors
Air Temperature (C)
Circuits In Group
No. of trays = 1
3rd Harmonics (%)
= 30.0
Ca
= 1.00
=4
Cg
= 0.77
= 0.00
Ch
= 1.00
Cable sizing (A)

Design Current Ib
Device Rating In


=
=
=
=
10.0
63
63.3
163.0

L1

10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.11 / 0.92
Earth Fault
[Ir _> Ib]

[It _> Iz]
L2
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.11 / 0.92
Z2 0.01572
Ze 0.02058
Z1 0.01876
L3
Neutral
10.0 / 1.00
0.0
0.17 / 0.07
2.11 / 0.92
0.0
0.0
--------[a] = Auto, [f] = Fixed
Zs 0.04954
Max. Zs 0.47070
Total = 86.0
Min. Section = 3.84
Earth Fault
Current (kA)
4.66
Phase Fault
Adiabatic Check:
Source End: 30.247 / 24.607

Icu: 36
Ics: 36

Load End:
11.463 / 5.442

Page 19 of 19
Cable Schedule
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Engineer:
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
Document No:
V21.1
Created On:
7/19/2013
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
Length
(m)
CPC (mm2 ):
Separate
Integral
Volt Drop
%

14
70
0
300

40
1 x 1 x 4c
240

MDB-03
SMDB-R03
1 x 1 x 4c
300
37
MDB-03
SMDB-R04
1 x 1 x 4c
38
MDB-03
SMDB-R05
39
Id No:
Name:
Connected From:
Connected To:
Cores
33
MDB-03
SMDB -LL2
1 x 1 x 4c
120
34
MDB-03
SMDB-R01
1 x 1 x 4c
35
MDB-03
SMDB-R02
36
Cable Type
01
Protective Device
Ir(A)
In(A)
Type
RCD
1.03
200
200
MCCB
N/A
70
0
1.40
400
400
MCCB
400000
mA
66
120
0
1.64
N/A
320
MCCB
320000
mA

33
150
0
1.30
400
400
MCCB
400000
mA
95

23
50
0
1.14
160
160
MCCB
N/A
1 x 1 x 4c
35

40
16
0
1.20
100
100
MCCB
N/A
MDB-03
SMDB-R-02
1 x 1 x 4c
10

40
10
0
1.65
40
40
MCCB
N/A
40
MDB-03
SMDB-R-03
1 x 1 x 4c
10

20
10
0
1.10
40
40
MCCB
N/A
41
MDB-03
SMDB-Mech
1 x 1 x 4c
185

28
95
0
0.87
N/A
320
MCCB
320000
mA
42
MDB-03
SMDB-GYM
1 x 1 x 4c
70

40
35
0
1.33
125
125
MCCB
N/A
43
MDB-03
Feeder Pillar (FP-1)
1 x 1 x 4c
25

42
16
0
1.30
63
63
MCCB
N/A

CSA
(mm2 )
8/9/2013
Page 1 of 2

Cable Schedule
Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Engineer:
knighttaylorq
Rev Date :
Document No:
V21.1
Created On:
7/19/2013
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
Length
(m)
CPC (mm2 ):
Separate
Integral
Volt Drop
%

40
6
0
25

138
1 x 1 x 4c
25

MDB-03
Swimming Pool Equipment
1 x 1 x 4c
185
48
MDB-03
Fire Pump
1 x 1 x 4c
49
MDB-03
Jockey Pump
50
51
Id No:
Name:
Connected From:
Connected To:
Cores
44
MDB-03
1 x 1 x 4c
25
45
MDB-03
1 x 1 x 4c
46
MDB-03
47
Cable Type
01
Protective Device
Ir(A)
In(A)
Type
RCD
0.90
32
32
MCCB
N/A
16
0
1.06
32
32
MCCB
N/A
235
6
0
1.15
32
32
MCCB
N/A

40
95
0
1.29
250
250
MCCB
N/A
300

120
150
0
1.78
400
400
MCCB
400000
mA
1 x 1 x 4c
10

40
10
0
1.11
40
40
MCCB
N/A
MDB-03
PFC-2
2 x 1 x 3c
300

40
240
0
0.84
800
800
MCCB
N/A
MDB-03
Load-4
1 x 1 x 4c
50

40
50
0
0.92
63
63
MCCB
N/A

CSA
(mm2 )
8/9/2013
Page 2 of 2

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01

Downstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
Rating
(A)
Discrimination
Limit (kA)
Pscc
(kA)
Status
53
33

2500
200
36
24.6
Ok
53
34

2500
400
70
20.4
Ok
53
35

2500
320
No Data
16.3
No Data
53
36

2500
400
70
21.7
Ok
53
37

2500
160
100
20.7
Ok
53
38

2500
100
100
9.1
Ok
53
39

2500
40
100
3.1
Ok
53
40

2500
40
100
5.9
Ok
53
41

2500
320
No Data
21.9
No Data
53
42

2500
125
100
14.2
Ok
53
43

2500
63
36
6.8
Ok
53
44

2500
32
100
7.1
Ok
53
45

2500
32
100
2.2
Ok
53
51

2500
63
36
11.5
Ok
53
47

2500
250
36
19.4
Ok
53
48

2500
400
70
12.2
Ok
53
49

2500
40
100
3.1
Ok
53
46

2500
32
100
1.3
Ok

Page 1 of 1

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
01
Downstream Circuit

Downstream Circuit
53
33
53
34
53
35
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400H Micrologic 6.3 E-M 320
53
36
53
37
53
38
53
39
53
40
53
41
Schneider Compact NSX MCCB NSX400H Micrologic 6.3 E-M 320
53
42
53
43
53
44
53
45
53
51
53
47
53
48
53
49

Rating
(A)
200
400
400
160
100
40
40
125
63
32
32
63
250
400
40
Page 1 of 2
Characteristics
Overlap
From
To
Pscc
(kA)
Status
24.6
Ok
20.4
Ok
16.3
Ok
21.7
Ok
20.7
Ok
9.1
Ok
3.1
Ok
5.9
Ok
21.9
Ok
14.2
Ok
6.8
Ok
7.1
Ok
2.2
Ok
11.5
Ok
19.4
Ok
12.2
Ok
3.1
Ok

Project Reference:
ProDesign
Job Number:
0208972
Document No:
V21.1
Created On :
7/19/2013
Rev Date : 8/9/2013
Created By :
knighttaylorq
Modified By:
knighttaylorq
Rev No:
53
46

32
Page 2 of 2
01
1.3
Ok

APPENDIX G
________________________________________________________________________
DB SCHEDULES
DETAILS OF CONNECTED LOAD/MAX. DEMAND
PROJECT: WEST BEACH CLUB
AREA:
OWNER :
MDB-01
FED FROM : 1500kVA DEWA TRANSFORMER
INCOMER
SP/
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
4P
PVC/
XLPE
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
2500
LOCATION : LV SWTCH ROOM
CONSULTANT : TED JACOB ENGINEERING GROUP - DUBAI BRANCH
RATING - AMPS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
SWA/
PVC
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
mm
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
BY DEWA
50
REF No: RSPA-West Beach Club\Elec\Calc\DB Sche
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
PANEL ID :
PALM JUMEIRAH
397.90
397.90
397.90
1193.70
1193.70
CONNECTED LOAD AFTER DIVERSITY PROPOSED TYPE &

- kW
No. OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.87
344.78
344.78
344.78
1034.33
1PH
(1)
3PH
(2)
3- LV/H
PH V CT
(3)
(4)
2500A 4P ACB INCOMER

PROVIDED FOR EMERGENCY
GENERATOR SUPPLY BY
DEWA
OUTGOING
SMDB-R09
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
150
1x1C 50
25.657
25.657
25.657
76.97
76.970
0.90
23.091
23.091
23.091
69.273
SMDB-R10
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
142
1x1C 50
25.767
25.767
25.767
77.30
77.300
0.90
23.190
23.190
23.190
69.570
SMDB-R11
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
130
1x1C 50
26.023
26.023
26.023
78.07
78.070
0.90
23.421
23.421
23.421
70.263
SMDB-R12
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
120
1x1C 50
26.370
26.370
26.370
79.11
79.110
0.90
23.733
23.733
23.733
71.199
SMDB-R13
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
110
1x1C 50
26.637
26.637
26.637
79.91
79.910
0.90
23.973
23.973
23.973
71.919
SMDB-R14
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
100
1x1C 50
26.047
26.047
26.047
78.14
78.140
0.90
23.442
23.442
23.442
70.326
SMDB-R15
TP
200A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF 1x4C 120
92
1x1C 70
31.153
31.153
31.153
93.46
93.460
0.90
28.038
28.038
28.038
84.114
SMDB-R16
TP
250A
50
FRT/SWA/LSF
1x4C 150
60
1x1C 95
44.653
44.653
44.653
133.96
133.960
0.90
40.188
40.188
40.188
120.564
SMDB-R17
TP
250A
50
60
1x1C 95
41.587
41.587
41.587
124.76
124.760
0.90
37.428
37.428
37.428
112.284
SMDB-R18
TP
250A
50
25
1x1C 95
43.673
43.673
43.673
131.02
131.020
0.90
39.306
39.306
39.306
117.918
SMDB-RE-04
TP
100A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
150
1x1C 25
13.667
13.667
13.667
41.00
41.000
0.90
12.300
12.300
12.300
36.900
SPARE
TP
200A
50
33.333
33.333
33.333
100.00
100.000
0.70
23.333
23.333
23.333
70.000
SPARE
TP
200A
50
33.333
33.333
33.333
100.00
100.000
0.70
23.333
23.333
23.333
70.000
SURGE
PROTECTION
TP
63A
50
CAPCITOR
BANK
TP
800A
50
1x4C 50
SURGE PROTECTION
1x1C 300
350kVAR 8 STEP AUTO PFC CAPACITOR BANK
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD PER PHASE

MAX. DEMAND (3 PH) :
1034.330 kW AT 0.87 DIVERSITY
397.900
397.900
397.900
1193.70
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD (3PH):
1193.70
344.777
344.777
344.777 1034.330
11
1193.70 kW
DATE:
2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
United Arab Emirates
W : www.tjeg.com
Type of Meter (Rating of incomer)
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 400A (4) LV CT
/ HV CT
AREA:
OWNER :
MDB-02
INCOMER
SP/
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
4P
PVC/
XLPE
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
2500
LOCATION : LV SWTCH ROOM
RATING - AMPS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
SWA/
PVC
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
mm
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
BY DEWA
50
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
PANEL ID :
PALM JUMEIRAH
359.45
356.80
355.22
1071.48
1139.48

- kW
No. OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.83
298.88
296.59
295.43
890.89
1PH
(1)
3PH
(2)
3- LV/H
PH V CT
(3)
(4)

GENERATOR SUPPLY BY
DEWA
OUTGOING
DB-SS
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 6
15
1x1C6
1.500
0.800
0.800
3.10
3.100
0.66
0.990
0.528
0.528
2.045
SMDB-R06
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
200
1x1C 50
25.517
25.517
25.517
76.55
76.550
0.90
22.965
22.965
22.965
68.895
SMDB-R07
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
188
1x1C 50
26.723
26.723
26.723
80.17
80.170
0.90
24.051
24.051
24.051
72.153
SMDB-R08
TP
300A
50
180
1x1C 95
56.090
56.090
56.090
168.27
168.270
0.90
50.481
50.481
50.481
151.443
SMDB-LL1
TP
200A
50
18
1x1C 70
31.279
31.379
30.899
93.56
93.557
0.89
27.733
27.822
27.396
82.951
SMDB-RE01
TP
63A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 35
205
1x1C 16
7.500
7.500
7.500
22.50
22.500
0.90
6.750
6.750
6.750
20.250
FP-3
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 35
143
1x1C16
2.423
2.134
1.046
5.60
5.603
0.66
1.604
1.413
0.693
3.710
FP-4
TP
32A
50
FRT/SWA/LSF
1x4C 35
150
1x1C16
1.058
1.190
1.216
3.46
3.464
0.63
0.667
0.751
0.767
2.185
LIFT-03
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
180
1x1C 10
3.333
3.333
3.333
10.00
10.000
0.80
2.667
2.667
2.667
8.000
EMDB-01
TP
630A
50
FIRE RATED
2x4C 240
12
1x1C 240
70.693
68.803
68.767
208.26
276.262
0.96
67.638
65.829
65.795
199.262
SPARE
TP
400A
50
66.667
66.667
66.667
200.00
200.000
0.70
46.667
46.667
46.667
140.000
SPARE
TP
400A
50
66.667
66.667
66.667
200.00
200.000
0.70
46.667
46.667
46.667
140.000
SURGE
PROTECTION
TP
63A
50
SURGE PROTECTION
CAPCITOR
BANK
TP
800A
50
1x1C 300
295.426
890.893

359.448
356.803
355.225
1071.48
1139.48
ACTUAL CONNECTED LOAD (3PH): 1071.475 kW
298.878
296.590
1139.475
kW
DATE:
2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
STAND BY
68.000 [kW]
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 400A (4) LV CT
/ HV CT
AREA : PALM JUMEIRAH
DB REF :
DB-SS
FED FROM :
MDB-02
INCOMER :
32A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : SUBSTATION
DATE:
LOAD DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
2.5
2.5
SUBSTATION
CONNECTED LOADS/POINTS
R1
10
02
Y1
10
SPARE
03
B1
10
SPARE
04
R2
10
SPARE
05
Y2
10
SPARE
06
B2
10
SPARE
07
R3
20
08
Y3
20
SPARE
09
B3
20
SPARE
10
R4
20
SPARE
11
Y4
20
SPARE
12
B4
20
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
EX.
FAN
LTG
01
4.0
RSPA-West Beach Club\Elec\Calc\DB Sche
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
2.05
AT DIVERSITY
1x4C 6 sqmm Cu. XLPE/SWA/LSF

1x1C6 sqmm Cu. ECC.
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D
10
LOAD PER CIRCUIT - W

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
70
700
200
200
200
200
200
SUBSTATION
4.0
13A
S/O
(1)
2014-11-19
200
400
200
200
200
200
200
0.66
TCL IN KW [3]
3.10
TCL IN WATTS
1500
800
800
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
525
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.8
320
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
2045
WH=WATER HEATER, EX.FAN=EXHAUST FAN, SH.S/O=SHAVER SOCKET, H/D=HAND DRYER, FCU=FAN COIL
UNIT
AREA:
PANEL ID :
SMDB-LL1
OWNER :
FED FROM :
MDB-01
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
RATING - AMPS
PVC/
XLPE
CABLE SIZE
MCCB
(A)
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
ISO
200A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
LOCATION : LV ROOM
NAKHEEL
Lengt
h of
Cable
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
PALM JUMEIRAH
CONNECTED LOAD - kW

CONNECTED LOAD AFTER DIVERSITY PROPOSED TYPE & No.
- kW
OF kWh METERS
LV/H
R - PH
Y - PH
B - PH TOTAL 1- PH 3- PH 3- PH
V CT
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
35
1x1C 70
31.28
31.38
30.90
93.56
0.90
27.71
27.79
27.45
82.95
REMARKS
OUTGOING
ERU-01
TP
63A
35
1x1C 16
6.367
6.367
6.367
19.100
1.00
6.367
6.367
6.367
19.100
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
CU-04
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
1.00
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
CU-05
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
3.583
3.583
3.583
10.750
1.00
3.583
3.583
3.583
10.750
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
EF-01
TP
63A
35
1x1C 16
7.533
7.533
7.533
22.600
1.00
7.533
7.533
7.533
22.600
DB-GF-L1
TP
40A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
1x1C10
3.705
3.406
2.926
10.037
0.72
2.679
2.463
2.116
7.258
DB-GF-P1
TP
40A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
1x1C10
4.800
5.200
5.200
15.200
0.75
3.592
3.891
3.891
11.373
SPARE
TP
32A
35
3.333
3.333
3.333
10.000
0.60
2.000
2.000
2.000
6.000
31.279
31.379
30.899
93.557
27.711
27.794
27.446
82.951

TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD (3PH): 93.557 kW
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
DB REF :
DB-GF-L1
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
100mA
[1]
40A 4P
100mA
[2]
SL
No.
[SHEET 1 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
LOCATION OF DB : LV ROOM
DATE:
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
2.5
2.5
STORE
70
02
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
52
03
B1
10
SPARE
04
R2
10
SPARE
05
Y2
10
06
B2
10
SPARE
07
R3
10
SPARE
08
Y3
10
SPARE
09
B3
10
SPARE
10
R4
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
16
12
11
Y4
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
14
12
12
B4
10
2.5
2.5
MALE TOILET
12
13
R5
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
14
Y5
10
2.5
2.5
DISABLED TOILET
12
15
B5
10
2.5
2.5
MALE TOILET
14
12
16
R6
10
2.5
2.5
ABLUTION+PRAYER ROOM
13
17
Y6
10
2.5
2.5
MALE TOILET
18
B6
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
210
468
200
200
52
416
200
200
200
200
2.4mt
40mt
5
12
12
192
168
72
18.8W/mt
141
72
168
12
180
18.8W/mt
752
12
TCL IN WATTS
NOTE : FOR CONTINUATION REFER SHEET 2 OF 2
2014-11-19
60
1123
2076
900
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
158
0.75
351
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.75
312
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.75
144
0.75
126
0.75
54
0.75
106
0.75
54
0.75
126
0.75
135
0.75
564
0.75
45
2894
UNIT
DB REF :DB-GF-LP
DB-GF-L1
[SHEET 2 OF 2]
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[3]
32A 4P
100mA
[4]
SL
No.
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
DATE:
2014-11-19
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
EX.
FAN
LTG
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D
SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
19
R7
10
2.5
2.5
TOILET LOBBY
20
Y7
10
2.5
2.5
DISABLED TOILET
12
21
B7
10
2.5
2.5
LOCKER AREA
16
12
22
R8
10
2.5
2.5
ABLUTION+PRAYER ROOM
13
23
Y8
10
2.5
2.5
FEMALE TOILET
24
B8
10
2.5
2.5
FEMALE TOILET
10
12
25
R9
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
14
12
26
Y9
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
16
12
27
B9
10
2.5
2.5
FEMALE TOILET
12
28
R10
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
42mt
29
Y10
10
2.5
2.5
CHANGING ROOM
30
B10
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
48mt
25.12W/mt
31
R11
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
27mt
25.12W/mt
32
Y11
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
33
B11
10
SPARE
34
R12
10
SPARE
35
Y12
10
36
B12
10
2.5
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
CORRIDOR
2.5
16mt
18.8W/mt
12
16mt
72
192
12
180
26
301
120
168
192
108
25.12W/mt
12
1055
18.8W/mt
141
1206
678
12
312
200
200
26
12
312
SPARE
7.26
AT DIVERSITY

1x1C10 sqmm Cu. ECC.
301
18.8W/mt
2.4mt
200
0.72
TCL IN KW [3]
10.04
TCL IN WATTS
3705
3406
2926
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
226
0.75
54
0.75
144
0.75
135
0.75
226
0.75
90
0.75
126
0.75
144
0.75
81
0.75
791
0.75
106
0.75
904.32
0.75
509
0.75
234
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.75
234
0.6
120
7258
UNIT
DB REF :
DB-GF-P1
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
30mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
32A 4P
30mA
[3]
SL
No.
[SHEET 1 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
DATE:
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
20
4.0
4.0
BOH CORRIDOR
02
Y1
20
4.0
4.0
MALE TOILET
03
B1
20
4.0
4.0
PRAYER ROOM+ABLUTION
04
R2
20
4.0
4.0
BOH CORRIDOR
200
05
Y2
20
4.0
4.0
CHANGING ROOM
200
06
B2
20
4.0
4.0
CORRIDOR
200
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
PRAYER ROOM+ABLUTION
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
CORRIDOR+STORE
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0
FEMALE TOILET
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
CHANGING ROOM
11
Y4
20
SPARE
12
B4
20
SPARE
13
R5
20
SPARE
14
Y5
20
SPARE
15
B5
20
SPARE
16
R6
20
SPARE
17
Y6
20
SPARE
18
B6
20
SPARE
200
1
1
200
1500
400
800
800
400
400
400
800
800
1500
200
1500
400
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
TCL IN WATTS
800
200
1
1500
200
2014-11-19
3800
4200
4200
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.8
640
0.8
1200
0.8
640
0.8
640
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
640
0.8
640
0.8
1200
0.8
320
0.8
400
0.8
400
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.8
400
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
9260
UNIT
DB REF :DB-GF-LP
DB-GF-P1
[SHEET 2 OF 2]
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A 4P
30mA
[4]
SL
No.
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
2014-11-19
Room / Area
EX.
FAN
LTG
19
R7
20
SPARE
20
Y7
20
SPARE
21
B7
20
SPARE
22
R8
20
SPARE
23
Y8
20
SPARE
24
B8
20
SPARE
FEEDER CABLE:
DATE:
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
11.06
AT DIVERSITY

13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
ISO
Watts/
Unit
500
500
500
500
500
500
0.73
TCL IN KW [3]
15.20
TCL IN WATTS
4800
5200
5200
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
11060
UNIT

FP-3
FED FROM :
MDB-02
INCOMER :
32A
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
25A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : EXTERNAL

TPN
2014-11-19
DATE:
REF. No:RSPA-West Beach Club\Elec\Calc\DB Sche
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
2
mm
ECC
Wire
Size
2
mm
Room / Area
TYP1 W TYP2 W TYP3 W TYP4 W TYP5 W TYP6 W TYP7 W TYP8 W TYP9 W SIGNAGE
26
13
4.4
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
15W/mt
R1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
14
Y1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
16
B1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
75
Y3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
78
B3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
R4
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
SPARE
14
Y5
10
SPARE
15
B5
10
SPARE
16
R6
10
SPARE
17
Y6
10
SPARE
18
B6
10
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
3.71
10
182
208
1
1
86
191
12
156
4
101
1125
1170
20
260
35
525
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
AT DIVERSITY
4.2
0.66
TCL IN KW [3]
5.60
TCL IN
WATTS
2423
2134
1046
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
127.4
0.7
146
0.7
60
0.7
133.42
0.7
109
0.7
71
0.7
787.5
0.7
819
0.7
182
0.6
315
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
REMARKS
TYP-1:BOLLARD LIGHT;TYP2:TREE UPLIGHT;TYP3:POOL LIGHT

SMALL;TYP4:POOL LIGHT LARGE;TYP5:POLE LIGHT;TYP6:TREE UPLIGHT
PALM;TYP7:FLOOD LIGHT;TYP8:WATER PROOF LED STRIP LIGHT;TYP9:WALL
LIGHT
DB REF :
3710
WH=WATER HEATER, EX.FAN=EXHAUST FAN, SH.S/O=SHAVER SOCKET, H/D=HAND DRYER,

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT

FP-4
FED FROM :
MDB-02
INCOMER :
32A TPN
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
25A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
2014-11-19
DATE:
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
2
mm
ECC
Wire
Size
2
mm
Room / Area
26
13
R1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
R2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
14
Y2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
12
B2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
12
R3
10
SPARE
Y3
10
SPARE
B3
10
SPARE
10
R4
10
SPARE
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
SPARE
14
Y5
10
SPARE
15
B5
10
SPARE
16
R6
10
SPARE
17
Y6
10
SPARE
18
B6
10
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
2.18
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
15W/mt
4.2
10
76
234
260
182
156
156
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
AT DIVERSITY
4.4
0.63
TCL IN KW [3]
3.46
TCL IN
WATTS
1058
1190
1216
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
52.92
0.7
164
0.7
182
0.7
127.4
0.7
109
0.7
109
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
REMARKS

LIGHT
DB REF :
2185

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT
AREA:
PANEL ID :
EMDB-01
OWNER :
FED FROM :
MDB-02
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
RATING - AMPS
PVC/
XLPE
CABLE SIZE
MCCB
(A)
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
35
FIRE RATED
2x4C 240
ISO
630A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
Lengt
h of
Cable
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
1x1C 240
LOCATION :

- kW
OF kWh METERS
LV/H
R - PH
Y - PH
V CT
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
70.69
68.80
68.77
208.26
276.26
0.96
67.56
65.86
65.85
199.26
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
LV ROOM

DIVERSITY
FACTORS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
PALM JUMEIRAH
REMARKS
OUTGOING
ESMDB-MECH
TP
250A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 185
225 1x1C 95
35.500
35.500
35.500
106.500
163.500
1.00
35.500
35.500
35.500
106.500
ESMDB-LL1
TP
125A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 70
12 1x1C 35
19.657
19.351
20.117
59.124
70.124
0.92
18.170
17.887
18.595
54.652
ESMDB-LL2
TP
80A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 50
225 1x1C 25
15.536
13.952
13.150
42.638
42.638
0.89
13.886
12.470
11.754
38.110
70.693
68.803
68.767
208.262
276.262
67.556
65.857
65.849
199.262

276.262
kW
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
STAND BY
68.000 [kW]
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
AREA:
PANEL ID :
ESMDB-MECH
OWNER :
FED FROM :
EMDB-01
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
250A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
PVC/
XLPE
LOCATION :ELECTRICAL ROOM
CABLE SIZE
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 185
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
RATING - AMPS
NAKHEEL
1x1C 95
35.50
35.50
35.50
106.50
163.50
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
PALM JUMEIRAH

- kW
OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.90
35.50
35.50
35.50
106.50
LV/H
1- PH 3- PH 3- PH
V CT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
REMARKS
OUTGOING
CP-CWPS-1
TP
40A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 16
109 1x1C 16
5.000
5.000
5.000
15.000
30.000
1.00
5.000
5.000
5.000
15.000
1DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-CWPS-2
TP
32A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 10
114 1x1C 10
2.500
2.500
2.500
7.500
15.000
1.00
2.500
2.500
2.500
7.500
1DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-CWPS-3
TP
80A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 50
118 1x1C 25
11.000
11.000
11.000
33.000
44.000
1.00
11.000
11.000
11.000
33.000
3DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-HWRP-1
TP
16A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 4
100
1x1C 4
0.500
0.500
0.500
1.500
3.000
1.00
0.500
0.500
0.500
1.500
1DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-SP-1
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 35
44 1x1C 16
7.333
7.333
7.333
22.000
33.000
1.00
7.333
7.333
7.333
22.000
2DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-SP-2
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 35
85 1x1C 16
7.333
7.333
7.333
22.000
33.000
1.00
7.333
7.333
7.333
22.000
2DUTY+1 STANDBY
CP-SP-4
TP
32A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 16
50 1x1C 16
1.833
1.833
1.833
5.500
5.500
1.00
1.833
1.833
1.833
5.500
35.500
35.500
35.500
106.500
163.500
35.500
35.500
35.500
106.500

163.500
kW
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
STAND BY
57.000 [kW]
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
AREA:
PANEL ID :
ESMDB-LL1
OWNER :
FED FROM :
EMDB-01
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
125A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
PVC/
XLPE
LOCATION :LV ROOM
CABLE SIZE
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 70
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
RATING - AMPS
NAKHEEL
1x1C 35
19.66
19.35
20.12
59.12
70.12
105 1x1C 16
7.333
7.333
7.333
22
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
PALM JUMEIRAH

- kW
OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.90
18.20
17.92
18.53
54.65
33
1.00
7.333
7.333
7.333
22.000
LV/H
1- PH 3- PH 3- PH
V CT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
REMARKS
OUTGOING
CP-SP-3
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 35
EDB-TEL-1
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 16
55
1x1C16
5.210
4.900
4.900
15
15
0.90
4.678
4.400
4.400
13.478
EDB-TEL-2
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 16
65
1x1C16
5.073
5.033
4.933
15
15
0.90
4.559
4.523
4.433
13.515
EDB-GF-LP1
TP
40A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 10
10
1x1C10
2.040
2.084
2.950
0.80
1.632
1.667
2.360
5.659
19.657
19.351
20.117
59.124
70.124
18.202
17.923
18.526
54.652

2DUTY+1 STANDBY
70.124
kW
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
STAND BY
11.000 [kW]
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
DB REF :
EDB-TEL-1
FED FROM :
ESMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
63A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
63A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[1]
40A 4P
30mA
[2]
40A 4P
30mA
[3]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : ETISALAT ROOM

DATE:
2014-11-19
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
2.5
2.5
ETISALAT TEL ROOM
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
02
Y1
10
SPARE
03
B1
10
SPARE
04
R2
10
SPARE
05
Y2
10
SPARE
06
B2
10
SPARE
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
ETISALAT TEL ROOM
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
ETISALAT TEL ROOM
1500
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0
ETISALAT TEL ROOM
1500
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
ETISALAT TEL ROOM
11
Y4
20
SPARE
12
B4
20
SPARE
13
R5
20
SPARE
14
Y5
20
SPARE
15
B5
20
SPARE
16
R6
20
SPARE
17
Y6
20
SPARE
18
B6
20
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
13.48
70
1x1C16 sqmm FIRE RATED. ECC.
210
200
200
200
200
200
400
2000
800
1500
1500
2000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
AT DIVERSITY
1x4C 16 sqmm Cu. FIRE RATED
0.90
TCL IN KW [3]
15.01
TCL IN WATTS
5210
4900
4900
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
REMARKS
after
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
157.5
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
720
0.9
1350
0.9
1350
0.9
1800
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
0.9
900
32A SPN
ISOLATOR
13478
WH=WATER HEATER, EX.FAN=EXHAUST FAN, SH.S/O=SHAVER SOCKET, H/D=HAND DRYER, FCU=FAN COIL UNIT
DB REF :
EDB-TEL-2
FED FROM :
ESMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
63A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
63A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[1]
40A 4P
30mA
[2]
40A 4P
30mA
[3]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : DU ROOM
DATE:
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
2.5
2.5
DU TEL ROOM
EX.
FAN
LTG
01
R1
10
02
Y1
10
SPARE
03
B1
10
SPARE
04
R2
10
SPARE
05
Y2
10
SPARE
06
B2
10
SPARE
07
R3
08
Y3
09
B3
10
R4
11
Y4
12
B4
13
R5
20
14
Y5
20
SPARE
15
B5
20
SPARE
16
R6
20
SPARE
17
Y6
20
SPARE
18
B6
20
SPARE
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D
2014-11-19

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
70
140
200
200
200
200
200
1667
20
4.0
4.0
DU TEL ROOM
1667
5000
1667
1667
20
4.0
4.0
DU TEL ROOM
1667
5000
1667
4.0
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
DU TEL ROOM
4.0
13.52
800
700
600
600
600
600
AT DIVERSITY
400
0.90
TCL IN KW [3]
15.04
TCL IN WATTS
5073
5033
4933
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
105
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
180
0.9
1500
0.9
1500
0.9
1500
0.9
1500
0.9
1500
0.9
1500
0.9
720
0.9
630
0.9
540
0.9
540
0.9
540
0.9
540
32A TPN
ISOLATO
R
32A TPN
ISOLATO
R
13515
UNIT
DB REF :
EDB-GF-LP1
FED FROM :
ESMDB-LL1
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
40A 4P
30mA
[3]
SL
No.
DATE:
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
2.5
2.5
LV ROOM+GENERATOR ROOM
12
70
02
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
IT ROOM
70
03
B1
10
SPARE
04
R2
10
SPARE
05
Y2
10
SPARE
06
B2
10
SPARE
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
LV ROOM
200
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
GENERATOR ROOM
200
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0
IT ROOM
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
IT ROOM
200
11
Y4
20
4.0
4.0
HANDICAPPED TOILET
200
12
B4
20
4.0
4.0
IT ROOM
13
R5
20
14
Y5
32
6.0
6.0
CDB-WB-02
15
B5
20
4.0
4.0
IT ROOM
16
R6
20
SPARE
17
Y6
20
SPARE
18
B6
20
SPARE
FEEDER CABLE:
5.66
840
140
200
200
200
400
400
1000
1000
200
200
400
1200
200
944
200
200
200
200
200
AT DIVERSITY
150
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
2014-11-19
0.80
TCL IN KW [3]
7.07
TCL IN WATTS
2040
2084
2950
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.8
672
0.8
112
0.8
120
0.8
160
0.8
160
0.8
160
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
800
RACK
0.8
160
FACP
0.8
160
0.8
960
0.8
160
0.8
755
0.8
160
0.8
160
0.8
160
0.8
160
DTA
5659
UNIT
DB REF :
CDB-WB-02
FED FROM :
EDB-GF-LP1
DATE:
INCOMER :
32A
Rating
Of
Module No
INCOMER
SL
No.
SPN
LOCATION OF DB : IT ROOM

ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
2014-11-19
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
01
C1
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
02
C2
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
03
C3
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
16
04
C4
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
13
05
C5
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
12
06
C6
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
11
07
C7
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
08
C8
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
09
C9
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
10
C10
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
11
C11
1.5
SPARE
12
C12
1.5
SPARE
13
C13
1.5
SPARE
14
C14
1.5
SPARE
15
C15
1.5
SPARE
16
C16
1.5
SPARE
EX1
13
6
EX2
EX3
Watts/
Unit
EX4
REMARKS
4+8
100
4+8
112
64
4+8
84
4+8
104
4+8
92
60
4+8
120
4+8
92
4+8
116
32A SPN ISOLATOR
4
6
2
2
15
10
10
3
100
TCL IN KW [3]
FEEDER CABLE:

1.04
TCL IN WATTS
1044
AREA:
PANEL ID :
ESMDB-LL2
OWNER :
FED FROM :
EMDB-01
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
80A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
PVC/
XLPE
LOCATION :ELECTRICAL ROOM
CABLE SIZE
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 50
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
RATING - AMPS
NAKHEEL
1x1C 25
15.54
13.95
13.15
42.64
42.64
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
PALM JUMEIRAH

- kW
OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.90
13.76
12.49
11.85
38.11
LV/H
1- PH 3- PH 3- PH
V CT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
REMARKS
OUTGOING
GSM EQT
TP
63A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 16
13 1x1C 16
6.667
6.667
6.667
20
20
1.00
6.667
6.667
6.667
20.000
EDB-GF-LP2
TP
40A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 10
12
1x1C10
5.536
3.952
3.150
13
13
0.80
4.429
3.162
2.520
10.110
LIFT-02
TP
32A
35
FIRE RATED
1x4C 10
35 1x1C 10
3.333
3.333
3.333
10
10
0.80
2.667
2.667
2.667
8.000
15.536
13.952
13.150
42.638
42.638
13.762
12.495
11.853
38.110

42.638
kW
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
DB REF :
EDB-GF-LP2
FED FROM :
ESMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
40A 4P
30mA
[3]
SL
No.
[SHEET 1 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
LOCATION OF DB : ELECTRICAL ROOM

DATE:
2014-11-19
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
2.5
2.5
FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
56
02
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
ELECTRICAL +IT+GSM ROOMS
13
70
03
B1
10
2.5
2.5
WATER FILTRATION &PUMP

ROOM
11
70
04
R2
10
2.5
2.5
IRRIGATION+FIRE PUMP ROOM
10
70
05
Y2
10
2.5
2.5
LIFT SHAFT LIGHT
18
06
B2
10
2.5
2.5
TEL +ELECROOM
70
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
FIRE PUMP ROOM
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
IT ROOM
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0 WATER FILTRATION &PUMP ROOM
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
11
Y4
20
4.0
4.0
ELECTRICAL ROOM
12
B4
20
4.0
4.0
TELECOM ROOM
400
13
R5
32
2x4.0
2x4.0
FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
400
14
Y5
20
4.0
4.0
GSM ROOM
400
15
B5
20
4.0
4.0
ELECTRICAL ROOM
400
16
R6
20
4.0
4.0
FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
400
17
Y6
32
6.0
6.0
CDB-WB-01
18
B6
20
200
2
910
770
700
36
280
600
800
200
2
200
600
400
200
600
800
1600
400
400
800
1006
SPARE
100
4436
336
400
3752
2950
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.8
268.8
0.8
728
0.8
616
0.8
560
0.8
29
0.8
224
0.8
480
0.8
640
0.8
480
0.8
320
0.8
480
0.8
640
0.8
1280
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
640
0.8
805
0.8
80
8910
RING
PROJECT:WEST BEACH CLUB
DB REF :
EDB-GF-LP2
FED FROM :
ESMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A 4P
30mA
[4]
SL
No.
[SHEET 2 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
4.0
4.0
FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
EX.
FAN
LTG
19
R7
20
20
Y7
10
SPARE
21
B7
10
SPARE
21
R8
10
SPARE
22
Y8
10
SPARE
23
B8
10
SPARE
FEEDER CABLE:
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]

DATE:
2014-11-19
10.11
AT DIVERSITY

13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
1000
1000
100
100
100
100
100
0.80
TCL IN KW [3]
12.64
TCL IN WATTS
5536
3952
3150
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.8
800
0.8
80
0.8
80
0.8
80
0.8
80
0.8
80
RACK
10110
UNIT
DB REF :
CDB-WB-01
FED FROM :
EDB-GF-LP2
DATE:
INCOMER :
32A
Rating
Of
Module No
INCOMER
SL
No.
SPN
LOCATION OF DB : FCC ROOM

ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
2014-11-19
E1
E2
E3
E4
EX3
Watts/
Unit
EX4
REMARKS
E5
EX1
EX2
4+8
68
4+8
72
4+8
80
4+8
80
4+8
112
4+8
96
01
C1
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
10
02
C2
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
03
C3
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
10
04
C4
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
05
C5
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
06
C6
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
07
C7
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
08
C8
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
09
C9
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
10
C10
1.5
2.5
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
11
C11
1.5
SPARE
100
12
C12
1.5
SPARE
150
32A SPN ISOLATOR
1
2
9
4
1
9
1
3
3
2
14
4+8
64
13
4+8
88
4+8
72
24
TCL IN KW [3]
FEEDER CABLE:

1.01
TCL IN WATTS
1006
AREA:
OWNER :
MDB-03
INCOMER
SP/
TP
ISO
MCCB
(A)
4P
PVC/
XLPE
FAUL
T
DUTY
ACB
kA
(A)
2500
LOCATION : ELECTRICAL ROOM
RATING - AMPS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
SWA/
PVC
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
mm
Lengt
h of
Cable
[m]
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF 11x1C 630 225mt
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
ACL
kW
TCL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
PANEL ID :
PALM JUMEIRAH
455.89
457.94
457.09
1370.93
1370.93

- kW
No. OF kWh METERS
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
0.87
396.41
397.96
397.36
1191.74
1PH
(1)
3PH
(2)
3- LV/H
PH V CT
(3)
(4)

GENERATOR SUPPLY BY
DEWA
OUTGOING
SMDB-LL2
TP
200A
50
14
1x1C 70
32.999
34.415
32.898
100.31
100.313
0.76
25.148
26.228
25.071
76.447
SMDB-R01
TP
400A
50
73
1x1C 150
69.200
69.200
69.200
207.60
207.600
0.90
62.280
62.280
62.280
186.840
SMDB-R02
TP
350A
50
66
1x1C 120
53.130
53.130
53.130
159.39
159.390
0.90
47.817
47.817
47.817
143.451
SMDB-R03
TP
400A
50
33
1x1C 150
69.400
69.400
69.400
208.20
208.200
0.90
62.460
62.460
62.460
187.380
SMDB-R04
TP
160A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 95
23
1x1C 50
27.733
27.733
27.733
83.20
83.200
0.90
24.960
24.960
24.960
74.880
SMDB-RE-05
TP
63A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 16
20
1x1C 16
8.000
8.000
8.000
24.00
24.000
0.90
7.200
7.200
7.200
21.600
SMDB-RE-02
TP
40A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
32
1x1C 10
5.433
5.433
5.433
16.30
16.300
0.90
4.890
4.890
4.890
14.670
SMDB-RE-03
TP
40A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
26
1x1C 10
3.680
3.680
3.680
11.04
11.040
0.90
3.312
3.312
3.312
9.936
SMDB-MECH
TP
300A
50
14
1x1C 120
53.197
53.197
53.197
159.59
159.590
0.82
43.863
43.863
43.863
131.590
SMDB-GYM
TP
125A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 70
28
1x1C 35
20.000
20.000
20.000
60.00
60.000
0.90
18.000
18.000
18.000
54.000
FP-1
TP
63A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 50
200
1x1C25
6.756
7.176
8.138
22.07
22.069
0.78
5.268
5.595
6.345
17.209
FP-2
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 25
34
1x1C16
0.834
1.102
1.102
3.04
3.038
0.65
0.540
0.713
0.714
1.967
FP-5
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 25
138
1x1C16
1.003
1.150
1.124
3.28
3.277
0.63
0.629
0.721
0.704
2.054
FP-6
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 25
235
1x1C16
1.359
1.161
0.888
3.41
3.408
0.64
0.864
0.738
0.564
2.166
SWIMMING
POOL EQT
TP
250A
50
50
1x1C 95
41.333
41.333
41.333
124.00
124.000
0.90
37.200
37.200
37.200
111.600
FIRE PUMP
TP
400A
50
120
1x1C 150
40.000
40.000
40.000
120.00
120.000
0.90
36.000
36.000
36.000
108.000
JOCKEY
PUMP
TP
40A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
115
1x1C 10
1.833
1.833
1.833
5.50
5.500
0.90
1.650
1.650
1.650
4.950
LIFT-04
TP
32A
50
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 10
54
1x1C 10
3.333
3.333
3.333
10.00
10.000
0.80
2.667
2.667
2.667
8.000
SPARE
TP
100A
50
16.667
16.667
16.667
50.00
50.000
0.70
11.667
11.667
11.667
35.000
SURGE
PROTECTION
TP
63A
50
CAPCITOR
BANK
TP
800A
50
SURGE PROTECTION
1x1C 300

455.891
457.944
457.091
1370.93
1370.93
396.414
397.960
397.365 1191.739
1370.93 kW
DATE:
2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 400A (4) LV CT
/ HV CT
AREA:
PANEL ID :
SMDB-LL2
OWNER :
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
RATING - AMPS
PVC/
XLPE
CABLE SIZE
MCCB
(A)
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
ISO
200A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
Lengt
h of
Cable
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
LOCATION :
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
PALM JUMEIRAH
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ELECTRICAL ROOM

- kW
OF kWh METERS
LV/H
R - PH
Y - PH
V CT
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
35
1x1C 70
33.00
34.42
32.90
100.31
0.90
25.19
26.20
25.06
76.45
REMARKS
OUTGOING
LIFT-01
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
3.333
3.333
3.333
10.000
0.80
2.667
2.667
2.667
8.000
DB-GF-L2
TP
40A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 16
1x1C16
5.191
6.213
5.249
16.654
0.73
3.804
4.554
3.847
12.205
DB-GF-P2
TP
40A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x4C 16
1x1C16
4.800
6.000
6.200
17.000
0.75
3.592
4.489
4.639
12.720
SMDB-RF
TP
125A
35
1x1C 50
18.009
17.202
16.449
51.660
0.78
14.126
13.493
12.903
40.522
SPARE
TP
32A
35
1.667
1.667
1.667
5.000
0.60
1.000
1.000
1.000
3.000
32.999
34.415
32.898
100.313
25.188
26.203
25.056
76.447

DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
DB REF :
DB-GF-L2
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
100mA
[1]
40A 4P
100mA
[2]
SL
No.
[SHEET 1 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A

DATE:
2014-11-19
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
2.5
2.5
GARBAGE ROOM
70
02
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
14
52
03
B1
10
2.5
2.5
OFFICE
11
56
04
R2
10
2.5
2.5
STORAGE/LOADING BAY
70
05
Y2
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
14
52
06
B2
10
07
R3
10
2.5
2.5
FEMALE TOILET
52
35
08
Y3
10
2.5
2.5
MALE TOILET
52
35
09
B3
10
10
R4
10
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
48mt
25.12W/mt
14
Y5
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
38mt
25.12W/mt
15
B5
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
33mt
25.12W/mt
16
R6
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
33mt
25.12W/mt
17
Y6
10
2.5
2.5
FAZARD LIGHT
36mt
25.12W/mt
18
B6
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
28.1mt
15W/mt
560
728
616
350
728
SPARE
200
313
313
SPARE
2.5
2.5
STORAGE
500
4
70
280
200
500
TCL IN WATTS
1206
955
829
829
904
422
3538
3828
3066
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
420
0.75
546
0.75
462
0.75
263
0.75
546
0.6
120
0.75
235
0.75
235
0.6
300
0.75
210
0.6
120
0.6
300
0.75
904
0.75
716
0.75
621.72
0.75
622
0.75
678
0.75
316.125
7614
UNIT
DB REF :DB-GF-LP
DB-GF-L2
[SHEET 2 OF 2]
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
32A 4P
100mA
[3]
32A 4P
100mA
[4]
SL
No.
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
DATE:
2014-11-19
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
EX.
FAN
LTG
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
19
R7
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
22mt
15W/mt
20
Y7
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
22.8mt
15W/mt
21
B7
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
27mt
15W/mt
22
R8
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
31mt
15W/mt
23
Y8
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
22.5mt
24
B8
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
26mt
15W/mt
25
R9
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
22mt
15W/mt
26
Y9
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
30.2mt
15W/mt
27
B9
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
43.2mt
15W/mt
28
R10
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
17
12
29
Y10
10
2.5
2.5
ENTRANCE LOBBY
17
12
30
B10
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
10
12
31
R11
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
14
12
32
Y11
10
2.5
2.5
MEP SERVICE CORRIDOR
52
33
B11
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
10
12
34
R12
10
2.5
2.5
CORRIDOR
13
12
35
Y12
10
2.5
2.5
STAIR
36
B12
10
2.5
2.5
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
12.21
AT DIVERSITY

15W/mt
51mt
330
342
405
465
12
362
390
330
453
648
204
204
120
168
260
120
156
15W/mt
765
500
0.73
TCL IN KW [3]
16.65
TCL IN WATTS
5191
6213
5249
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
248
0.75
257
0.75
303.75
0.75
349
0.75
271
0.75
292.5
0.75
248
0.75
340
0.75
486
0.75
153
0.75
153
0.75
90
0.75
126
0.75
195
0.75
90
0.75
117
0.75
574
0.6
300
12205
UNIT
DB REF :
DB-GF-P2
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
30mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
32A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
[SHEET 1 OF 2]
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A

DATE:
2014-11-19
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
LTG
EX.
FAN
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
20
4.0
4.0
MALE TOILET
1500
02
Y1
20
4.0
4.0
FEMALE TOILET
1500
03
B1
32
2x4.0
2x4.0
CORRIDOR+STORAGE+GARBAG
E RM
200
04
R2
20
4.0
4.0
STORAGE+CORRIDOR
200
05
Y2
32
2x4.0
2x4.0
BOH CORRIDOR
200
06
B2
32
2x4.0
2x4.0
BOH CORRIDOR
200
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
ENTRANCE LOBBY
200
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
LOADING BAY
200
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0
ENTRANCE LOBBY
200
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
ENTRANCE LOBBY
11
Y4
32
2x4.0
2x4.0
OFFICE
12
B4
20
4.0
4.0
OFFICE
13
R5
20
4.0
4.0
ENTRANCE LOBBY
200
14
Y5
20
4.0
4.0
ENTRANCE LOBBY
200
15
B5
20
4.0
4.0
OFFICE
16
R6
20
SPARE
17
Y6
20
SPARE
18
B6
20
4.0
REF. No
4.0
ELECTRICAL ROOM
400
200
1500
1400
600
1000
1200
400
400
400
400
1200
400
600
400
400
400
1200
500
500
200
TCL IN WATTS
1500
200
400
3800
5000
5200
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.8
1200
0.8
1200
0.8
1120
0.8
480
0.8
800
RING
0.8
960
RING
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
960
0.8
480
0.8
320
0.8
320
0.8
960
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
240
RING
RING
RING
10920
UNIT
DB REF :DB-GF-LP
DB-GF-P2
[SHEET 2 OF 2]
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL2
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A 4P
30mA
[4]
SL
No.
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
2014-11-19
Room / Area
EX.
FAN
LTG
19
R7
20
SPARE
20
Y7
20
SPARE
21
B7
20
SPARE
22
R8
20
SPARE
23
Y8
20
SPARE
24
B8
20
SPARE
FEEDER CABLE:
DATE:
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
12.72
AT DIVERSITY

13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
ISO
Watts/
Unit
500
500
500
500
500
500
0.75
TCL IN KW [3]
17.00
TCL IN WATTS
4800
6000
6200
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
0.6
300
12720
UNIT
AREA:
PANEL ID :
SMDB-RF
OWNER :
FED FROM :
SMDB-LL2
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
RATING - AMPS
PVC/
XLPE
CABLE SIZE
MCCB
(A)
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
ISO
125A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
Lengt
h of
Cable
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
LOCATION :
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
PALM JUMEIRAH
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ROOF ELECTRICAL ROOM

- kW
OF kWh METERS
LV/H
R - PH
Y - PH
V CT
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
35
1x1C 50
18.01
17.20
16.45
51.66
0.90
14.08
13.49
12.94
40.52
REMARKS
OUTGOING
FAHU-2
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
1.00
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
FAHU-3
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
1.00
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
CU-06
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
1.950
1.950
1.950
5.850
1.00
1.950
1.950
1.950
5.850
DB-RF-LP
TP
40A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x1C16
4.659
3.852
3.099
11.610
0.73
3.400
2.811
2.262
8.472
SPARE
TP
40A
35
6.667
6.667
6.667
20.000
0.60
4.000
4.000
4.000
12.000
18.009
17.202
16.449
51.660
14.083
13.494
12.945
40.522
1x4C 16

DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A
DB REF :
DB-RF-LP
FED FROM :
SMDB-RF
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
100mA
[1]
32A 4P
30mA
[2]
32A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : ROOF ELECTRICAL ROOM

DATE:
2014-11-19
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
EX.
FAN
LTG
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
Watts/
Unit
ISO
01
R1
10
2.5
2.5
TERRACE
11
16
02
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
TERRACE
16
03
B1
10
2.5
2.5
TERRACE
16
04
R2
10
05
Y2
10
06
B2
10
07
R3
20
4.0
4.0
LOBBY
200
08
Y3
20
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
200
09
B3
20
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
200
10
R4
20
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
200
11
Y4
20
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
200
12
B4
20
13
R5
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
28mt
15W/mt
14
Y5
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
30mt
15W/mt
15
B5
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
6.6mt
15W/mt
16
R6
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
49.5mt
15W/mt
17
Y6
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
10.4mt
15W/mt
18
B6
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
43mt
10W/mt
SPARE
2.5
128
80
100
16
128
100
600
800
600
800
600
SPARE
5.08
AT DIVERSITY

176
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
TERRACE
2.5
200
0.77
TCL IN KW [3]
6.61
TCL IN WATTS
420
450
99
743
156
430
2839
2262
1509
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
132
0.75
96
0.75
60
0.6
60
0.75
96
0.75
75
0.8
480
0.8
640
0.8
480
0.8
640
0.8
480
0.6
120
0.75
315
0.75
338
0.75
74
0.75
557
0.75
117
0.75
323
5082
UNIT
PROJECT:WEST BEACH CLUB
DB REF :
DB-RF-LP
FED FROM :
SMDB-RF
INCOMER :
40A TPN ISOLATOR
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
40A TPN ISOLATOR
40A 4P
100mA
[4]
40A 4P
100mA
[5]
SL
No.
LOCATION OF DB : ROOF ELECTRICAL ROOM

DATE:
2014-11-19
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
REF. No
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
EX.
FAN
LTG
13A
S/O
(1)
13A
S/O
(2)
16A
S/O
W/H
H/D
43mt

SH
S/O
Spur
O\L
FCU
OU
ISO
Watts/
Unit
10W/mt
19
R7
10
20
Y7
10
21
B7
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
59mt
10W/mt
22
R8
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
59mt
10W/mt
23
Y8
10
4.0
4.0
TERRACE
59mt
10W/mt
24
B8
10
SPARE
25
R9
10
SPARE
26
Y9
10
SPARE
27
B9
10
SPARE
28
R10
10
SPARE
29
Y10
10
SPARE
30
B10
10
SPARE
31
R11
10
SPARE
32
Y11
10
SPARE
33
B11
10
SPARE
34
R12
10
SPARE
35
Y12
10
SPARE
36
B12
10
SPARE
8.47
AT DIVERSITY

430
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND [3]
FEEDER CABLE:
200
590
590
590
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
0.73
TCL IN KW [3]
11.61
TCL IN WATTS
4659
3852
3099
Circuit
Diversit
load
y
after REMARKS
Factor
diversity
s
(W)
0.75
322.5
0.75
150
0.75
443
0.75
442.5
0.75
443
0.75
150
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
8472
UNIT
AREA:
PANEL ID :
SMDB-MECH
OWNER :
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER
SP/
TP
TP
RATING - AMPS
PVC/
XLPE
CABLE SIZE
MCCB
(A)
SWA/
PVC
2/3/4C
mm
ISO
300A
FAUL
T
ACB DUTY
kA
(A)
Lengt
h of
Cable
ECC
SIZE 1C, mm
LOCATION :
R - PH
kW
Y - PH
kW
B - PH
kW
TOTAL
kW
DIVERSITY
FACTORS
CIRCUIT/
FEEDER
DB No.
NAKHEEL
PALM JUMEIRAH
CONNECTED LOAD - kW
ELECTRICAL ROOM

- kW
OF kWh METERS
LV/H
R - PH
Y - PH
V CT
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
35
1x1C 120
53.20
53.20
53.20
159.59
0.90
43.86
43.86
43.86
131.59
REMARKS
OUTGOING
CU-01
TP
40A
35
1x1C 16
3.583
3.583
3.583
10.750
1.00
3.583
3.583
3.583
10.750
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
CU-02
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
1.00
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
CU-03
TP
32A
35
1x1C 10
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
1.00
1.957
1.957
1.957
5.870
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
HWT-01
TP
125A
35
1x1C 35
20.000
20.000
20.000
60.000
0.80
16.000
16.000
16.000
48.000
HWT-02
TP
125A
35
1x1C 35
20.000
20.000
20.000
60.000
0.80
16.000
16.000
16.000
48.000
FAHU-1
TP
32A
35
XLPE/SWA/LSF
1x1C10
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
1.00
2.367
2.367
2.367
7.100
SPARE
TP
32A
35
3.333
3.333
3.333
10.000
0.60
2.000
2.000
2.000
6.000
53.197
53.197
53.197
159.590
43.863
43.863
43.863
131.590
1x4C 10

DIGITAL MULTIMETER
DATE: 2014-11-19
NOTE :
Tameem house
P.O Box 500137
Tecom, Dubai
T : + 971 (0) 4 450 3999

F : + 971 (0) 4 450 3998
E : dubai@tjeg.com
W : www.tjeg.com
(1) Upto 60 A
(2) Upto 100 A
(1 phase)
(3 phase)
(3) 125 - 160 A
(4) LV CT
/ HV CT
/
/
A
A

FP-1
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER :
63A
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
63A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
32A 4P
100mA
[3]
32A 4P
100mA
[4]
SL
No.

TPN
2014-11-19
DATE:
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
mm2
ECC
Wire
Size
mm2
Room / Area
26
13
4.4
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
15W/mt
R1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
20
R2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
Y2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B3
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
R4
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
11
Y4
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
45
12
B4
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
75
13
R5
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
30
14
Y5
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
15
B5
10
16
R6
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
17
Y6
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
18
B6
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
19
R7
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
20
Y7
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
21
B7
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
22
R8
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
23
Y8
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
24
B8
20
10.0
10.0
BOAT JETTY
10
17.21
165
260
130
76
227
23
101
10
130
5
126
74
675
1125
360
130
400
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
AT DIVERSITY

91
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
4.2
0.78
TCL IN KW [3]
22.07
TCL IN
WATTS
6756
7176
8138
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
63.7
0.7
116
0.7
182
0.7
91
0.7
53
0.7
159
0.7
70.84
0.7
91
0.7
88
0.7
51.45
0.7
473
0.7
788
0.7
252
0.7
91
0.6
240
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
0.8
1600
REMARKS
TYP-1:BOLLARD LIGHT;TYP2:TREE UPLIGHT;TYP3:POOL LIGHT SMALL;TYP4:POOL LIGHT LARGE;TYP5:POLE

LIGHT;TYP6:TREE UPLIGHT PALM;TYP7:FLOOD LIGHT;TYP8:WATER PROOF LED STRIP LIGHT;TYP9:WALL
LIGHT
DB REF :
17209

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT

FP-2
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER :
32A
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
25A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.

TPN
2014-11-19
DATE:
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
2
mm
ECC
Wire
Size
2
mm
Room / Area
26
R1
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y1
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B1
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R2
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y2
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B2
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
R3
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y3
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B3
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
10
R4
10
2.5
2.5
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
SPARE
14
Y5
10
SPARE
15
B5
10
SPARE
16
R6
10
SPARE
17
Y6
10
SPARE
18
B6
10
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
1.97
4.4
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
15W/mt
4.2
10
104
20
260
60
78
156
260
95
3
10
86
14
182
9
158
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
AT DIVERSITY
13
0.65
TCL IN KW [3]
3.04
TCL IN
WATTS
834
1102
1102
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
72.8
0.7
182
0.7
42
0.7
54.6
0.7
109
0.7
182
0.7
66.15
0.7
60
0.7
127
0.7
110.25
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
REMARKS

LIGHT
DB REF :
1967

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT

FP-5
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER :
32A TPN
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
25A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
2014-11-19
DATE:
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
2
mm
ECC
Wire
Size
2
mm
Room / Area
26
13
4.4
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
15W/mt
4.2
10
R1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
14
B1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
12
R2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R3
10
Y3
10
B3
10
SPARE
10
R4
10
SPARE
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
SPARE
14
Y5
10
SPARE
15
B5
10
SPARE
16
R6
10
SPARE
17
Y6
10
SPARE
18
B6
10
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
2.05
210
50
127
114
200
78
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
300
300
200
AT DIVERSITY
245
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
6.0
R
53
SPARE
6.0
0.63
TCL IN KW [3]
3.28
TCL IN
WATTS
1003
1150
1124
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
36.75
0.7
172
0.7
147
0.7
35.28
0.7
89
0.7
80
0.6
120
0.7
55
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
180
0.6
180
0.6
120
REMARKS

LIGHT
DB REF :
2054

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT

FP-6
FED FROM :
MDB-03
INCOMER :
32A TPN
Rating
Rating Of
Of
ELCB
INCOMER
32A TPN ISOLATOR
25A 4P
100mA
[1]
25A 4P
100mA
[2]
25A 4P
100mA
[3]
SL
No.
2014-11-19
DATE:
ISOLATOR
MCB
CCT
Rtg. In
No.
A
CCT.
Wire
Size
2
mm
ECC
Wire
Size
2
mm
Room / Area
TYP1 W TYP3 W TYP4 W TYP5 W TYP6 W TYP7 W TYP8 W TYP9 W SIGNAGE

26
4.4
10.5
25.2
13
17.5
R1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
B1
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Y2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
12
B2
10
6.0
6.0
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
R3
10
SPARE
Y3
10
SPARE
B3
10
10
R4
10
SPARE
11
Y4
10
SPARE
12
B4
10
SPARE
13
R5
10
SPARE
14
Y5
10
SPARE
15
B5
10
SPARE
16
R6
10
SPARE
17
Y6
10
SPARE
18
B6
10
SPARE
MAXIMUM DEMAND :
FEEDER CABLE:
6.0
2.17
10
442
6
151
5
88
117
210
123
200
200
78
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
AT DIVERSITY
4.2
17
LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
6.0
15W/mt
0.64
TCL IN KW [3]
3.41
TCL IN
WATTS
1359
1161
888
Circuit
Diversit
load after
y
diversity
Factors
(W)
0.7
309.4
0.7
106
0.7
61
0.7
81.9
0.7
147
0.7
86
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.7
55
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
0.6
120
REMARKS

LIGHT
DB REF :
2166

FCU=FAN COIL UNIT

2014.11.23 - Electrical Specifications Combined - Tender Submission

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2014.11.23 - Electrical Specifications Combined - Tender Submission

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.

THE WEST BEACH CLUB

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

Tendering & Contract Conditions

General Specifications Architecture & Interior Design

Interior Design Schedules

Civil & Structural Specifications

Specialist Lighting Specifications

Vertical Transport Specifications

Waste Handling Equipment Specifications

Kitchen & Laundry Specifications

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

SECTION 260001 - PARTICULAR SPECIFCATION

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

SECTION 260001 PARTICULAR SPECIFCATION

Lighting and Controls

Fire Alarm systems

Emergency lighting systems

Division 08 Section 260001

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

DEWA Wiring Regulations

DEWA Substation Standards

Dubai Civil Defence

IET Wiring Regulations, BS 7671

BS EN 60439 and IEC 439

BS 88, BS 60898, BS 60269-2

The most up to date guides/regulations shall be used at all times.

PART 3 - SCOPE OF WORK

Division 08 Section 260001

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

All the Electrical Works listed below.

Liaising with local authorities for all submittals and approvals.

Ensure the design meets the criteria for EHS accreditation.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER

LV POWER DISTRIBUTION AND SWITCHGEAR

Sub main and final circuit distribution boards

Power factor correction and harmonic suppression

Transient over voltage protection

Division 08 Section 260001

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.08

STANDBY ELECTRICAL POWER

Generator fuel system, anti-vibration, acoustic treatment etc.

Rack Mounted UPS

CABLES AND PATHWAYS

Fire alarm cabling

Control and instrumentation cabling

SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS

Power supplies to all mechanical plant

Power supplies to all general sockets

Division 08 Section 260001

DMS No 139305 Palm Jumeirah Construction of the West Beach Club,